F3SG-R Series Safety Light Curtains User`s Manual

Safety Light Curtain
F3SG-□R□ Series
User's Manual
Cat. No. Z22I-E-02
http://www.ia.omron.com/f3sg-r
Original instructions
Introduction
Thank you for purchasing the F3SG-R Series Safety Light Curtain (hereinafter referred to as the "F3SG-R" ).
This is the instruction Manual describing the use of F3SG-R.
Always heed the following points when using the F3SG-R:
Be sure to have F3SG-R be handled by a "Responsible Person" who is well aware of and familiar with the machine to be installed.
The term "Responsible Person" used in this Instruction Manual means the person qualified, authorized and responsible to secure
"safety" in each process of the design, installation, operation, maintenance services and disposition of the machine.
It is assumed that F3SG-R will be used properly according to the installation environment, performance and function of the machine.
Responsible Person should conduct risk assessment on the machine and determine the suitability of this product before installation.
Read this Manual thoroughly to understand and make good use of the descriptions before installing and operating the product.
Keep this Manual at the place where the operator can refer to whenever necessary.
Trademarks
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. Any use of such marks by
Omron is under license. The names of the other companies and products mentioned herein are the trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective owners.
Introduction
Legislation and Standards
1. The F3SG-R does not receive type approval provided by Article 44-2 of the Industrial Safety and Health
Act of Japan. When using the F3SG-R in Japan as a "safety system for pressing or shearing machines"
prescribed in Article 42 of that law, the machine control system must receive type approval.
2. The F3SG-R is electro-sensitive protective equipment (ESPE) in accordance with European Union (EU)
Machinery Directive Index Annex V, Item 2.
3. EC/EU Declaration of Conformity
OMRON declares that the F3SG-R is in conformity with the requirements of the following EC/EU
Directives:
Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC
EMC Directive 2004/108/EC, 2014/30/EU
4. Conforming Standards
(1) European standards
EN61496-1 (Type 4 ESPE), EN 61496-2 (Type 4 AOPD), EN61508-1 through -4 (SIL 3 for Type 4),
EN ISO 13849-1:2008 (PL e, Category 4 for Type 4)
(2) International standards
IEC61496-1 (Type 4 ESPE), IEC61496-2 (Type 4 AOPD), IEC61508-1 through -4 (SIL 3 for Type 4),
ISO 13849-1:2006 (PL e, Category 4 for Type 4 and PL c)
(3) JIS standards
JIS B 9704-1 (Type 4 ESPE), JIS B 9704-2 (Type 4 AOPD)
(4) North American standards
UL61496-1(Type 4 ESPE), UL61496-2(Type 4 AOPD), UL508, UL1998,
CAN/CSA C22.2 No.14, CAN/CSA C22.2 No.0.8
(5) Chinese standards
GB4584(Specification of active opto-electronic protective devices for presses)
5. Third-Party Certifications
(1) TÜV SÜD
• EC Type-Examination certificate:
EU Machinery Directive, Type 4 ESPE (EN61496-1), Type 4 AOPD (EN 61496-2)
• Certificate:
Type 4 ESPE (EN61496-1), Type 4 AOPD (EN61496-2), EN 61508-1 through -4 (SIL 3 for Type 4, EN
ISO 13849-1:2008 (PL e, Category 4 for Type 4,)
(2) UL
• UL Listing:
Type 4 ESPE (UL61496-1), Type 4 AOPD (UL61496-2), UL508, UL1998, CAN/CSA C22.2 No.14,
CAN/CSA C22.2 No.0.8
(3) China National Casting and Forging Machines Quality Supervision and Inspection Center
• Certificate:
GB4584 (Specification of active opto-electronic protective devices for presses) (Type 4)
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
i
Introduction
6. Other Standards
The F3SG-R is designed according to the standards listed below. To make sure that the final system
complies with the following standards and regulations, you are asked to design and use it in accordance
with all other related standards, laws, and regulations. If you have any questions, consult with specialized
organizations such as the body responsible for prescribing and/or enforcing machinery safety regulations
in the location where the equipment is to be used.
• European Standards: EN415-4, EN691-1, EN692, EN693, IEC/TS 62046
• U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Standards: OSHA 29 CFR 1910.212
• U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Standards: OSHA 29 CFR 1910.217
• American National Standards: ANSI B11.1 to B11.19
• American National Standards: ANSI/RIA R15.06
• Canadian Standards Association CSA Z142, Z432, Z434
• SEMI Standards SEMI S2
• Japan Ministry of Health, Labour and Welfare "Guidelines for Comprehensive Safety Standards of
Machinery", Standard Bureau's Notification No. 0731001 dated July 31, 2007.rms and Conditions
Agreement
• Chinese National Standards: GB17120, GB27607
ii
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Introduction
Terms and Conditions Agreement
Warranties.
(a) Exclusive Warranty. Omron's exclusive warranty is that the Products will be free from defects in materials
and workmanship for a period of twelve months from the date of sale by Omron (or such other period
expressed in writing by Omron). Omron disclaims all other warranties, express or implied.
(b) Limitations. OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
ABOUT NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF
THE PRODUCTS. BUYER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE
PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE.
Omron further disclaims all warranties and responsibility of any type for claims or expenses based on
infringement by the Products or otherwise of any intellectual property right.
(c) Buyer Remedy. Omron's sole obligation hereunder shall be, at Omron's election, to (i) replace (in the form
originally shipped with Buyer responsible for labor charges for removal or replacement thereof) the noncomplying Product, (ii) repair the non-complying Product, or (iii) repay or credit Buyer an amount equal to
the purchase price of the non-complying Product; provided that in no event shall Omron be responsible for
warranty, repair, indemnity or any other claims or expenses regarding the Products unless Omron's
analysis confirms that the Products were properly handled, stored, installed and maintained and not
subject to contamination, abuse, misuse or inappropriate modification. Return of any Products by Buyer
must be approved in writing by Omron before shipment. Omron Companies shall not be liable for the
suitability or unsuitability or the results from the use of Products in combination with any electrical or
electronic components, circuits, system assemblies or any other materials or substances or environments.
Any advice, recommendations or information given orally or in writing, are not to be construed as an
amendment or addition to the above warranty.
See http://www.omron.com/global/ or contact your Omron representative for published information.
Limitation on Liability; Etc.
OMRON COMPANIES SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOSS OF PROFITS OR PRODUCTION OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY
WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS, WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED IN CONTRACT,
WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY.
Further, in no event shall liability of Omron Companies exceed the individual price of the Product on which
liability is asserted.
Suitability of Use.
Omron Companies shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes or regulations which
apply to the combination of the Product in the Buyer's application or use of the Product. At Buyer's request,
Omron will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use
which apply to the Product. This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the
suitability of the Product in combination with the end product, machine, system, or other application or use.
Buyer shall be solely responsible for determining appropriateness of the particular Product with respect to
Buyer's application, product or system. Buyer shall take application responsibility in all cases.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCT FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR
PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO
ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCT(S) IS PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED
FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
iii
Introduction
Programmable Products.
Omron Companies shall not be responsible for the user's programming of a programmable Product, or any
consequence thereof.
Performance Data.
Data presented in Omron Company websites, catalogs and other materials is provided as a guide for the user
in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of Omron's test
conditions, and the user must correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to
the Omron's Warranty and Limitations of Liability.
Change in Specifications.
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other
reasons. It is our practice to change part numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when
significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the Product may be changed
without any notice. When in doubt, special part numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications
for your application. Please consult with your Omron's representative at any time to confirm actual
specifications of purchased Product.
Errors and Omissions.
Information presented by Omron Companies has been checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no
responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical or proofreading errors or omissions.
iv
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Introduction
Safety Precautions
Indications and Meanings for Safe Use
The precautions listed in this document indicated by alert symbols and statements must be followed for the
safe use of the F3SG-R. Failure to follow all precautions and alerts may result in an unsafe use or
operation.Thoroughly read this manual and understand the installation procedures, operation check
procedures, and maintenance procedures before using F3SG-R.
The following word and symbols are used in this document.
Meaning of Signal Word
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, is likely to result in
serious injury or may result in death. Additionally there may be severe property
damage.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in minor or
moderate injury, or may result in serious injury or death. Additionally there may be
significant property damage.
Meanimgs of Alert Symbols
Indicates prohibited actions.
Indicates mandatory actions.
Indicates the risk of electric shock.
Alert Statements in this Manual
Make sure to test the operation of the F3SG-R after setting with DIP Switch to verify that the
F3SG-R operates as intended. Make sure to stop the machine until the test is complete.
Unintended settings may cause a person to go undetected, resulting in serious injury or death.
For users
The F3SG-R must be installed, configured, and incorporated into a machine control system by a
sufficiently trained and qualified person. An unqualified person may not be able to perform these
operations properly, which may cause a person to go undetected, resulting in serious injury.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
v
Introduction
For machines
Do not use this sensor for machines that cannot be stopped by electrical control. For example,
do not use it for a pressing machine that uses full-rotation clutch. Otherwise, the machine may
not stop before a person reaches the hazardous part, resulting in serious injury.
To use F3SG-R in PSDI mode (initiation of cycle operations by a presence sensing device), you
must configure an appropriate circuit between F3SG-R and the machine.For details about PSDI,
refer to OSHA1910.217, IEC61496-1, and other relevant standards and regulations.
For installation
Make sure Responsible Person tests the operation of the F3SG-R after installation to verify that
the F3SG-R operates as intended. Make sure to stop the machine until the test is complete.
Unintended installation, wiring or function settings may cause a person to go undetected,
resulting in serious injury.
Make sure to install the F3SG-R at the safety distance from the hazardous part of the machine.
Otherwise, the machine may not stop before a person reaches the hazardous part, resulting in
serious injury.
Install a protective structure so that the hazardous part of a machine can only be reached by
passing through the sensor's detection zone. If access to the hazardous part by reaching over
the detection zone of a vertically mounted F3SG-R cannot be excluded, the height of the
detection zone and the safety distance shall be determined in consideration of such a risk. Install
the sensors so that part of the person is always present in the detection zone when working in a
machine's hazardous zones. If a person is able to step into the hazardous zone of a machine
and remain behind the F3SG-R's detection zone, configure the system with Restart Interlock
function due to unexpected startup. Failure to do so may result in serious injury.
Install the reset switch in a location that provides a clear view of the entire hazardous zone and
where it cannot be activated from within the hazardous zone.
Install the pre-reset switch always in the hazardous zone and where it cannot be activated from
outside the hazardous zone.
The F3SG-R cannot protect a person from a projectile exiting the hazardous zone. Install
protective cover(s) or fence(s).
When the fixed blanking or floating blanking function is used, observe the following. Failure to do
so may cause a person to go undetected, resulting in serious injury.
• Responsible Person must verify that a test rod is detected for all detection zones except the
blanked area.
• When the fixed blanking function is used, install a protective structure to cover the whole
blanked area in order to prevent personnel approach to hazardous part of the machine through
the blanked area.
vi
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Introduction
Detection capability gets larger when fixed/floating blanking or reduced resolution function is
used. When these functions are used, the safety distance calculation must be based on the
increased detection capability for these functions. Otherwise the machine may not stop before a
person reaches to the hazardous part, resulting in serious injury.
A warning zone must not be used for safety applications. Always install your system so that a
detection zone should be passed before reaching a hazardous part of the machine. If access to
the hazardous part by reaching over the detection zone of a vertically mounted F3SG-R cannot
be excluded, the height of the detection zone and the safety distance shall be determined in
consideration of such a risk.
When a warning zone is configured, you must attach labels that indicate a border between
normal detection zone and warning zone. Otherwise the machine may not stop before a person
reaches to the hazardous part, resulting in serious injury.
A warning zone must be configured based on a safety distance.
The muting and override functions disable the safety functions of the device. You must ensure
safety using other method when these functions are operating.
Install muting sensors so that they can distinguish between the object that is being allowed to
pass through the detection zone and a person. If the muting function is activated by the detection
of a person, the machine may not stop operating, resulting in serious injury.
Muting lamps that indicate the state of the muting and override functions must be installed where
they are clearly visible to workers from all the operating positions.
Use 2 independent input devices for muting inputs. Failure to do so may result in a muting status
due to a single muting sensor's failure.
You must install F3SG-R, muting sensor, and physical barrier, and configure time settings for
muting so that an operator should not enter hazardous zone.
The Dynamic Muting function can configure a new muting zone after muting is enabled based on
a result measuring a workpiece height for a certain period of time. The function must be
completely verified by a trained and qualified person before being used. Take additional safety
measures if necessary.
Install the switch that activates the override and that uses hold-to-run device, such as spring
return key switch, in a location that provides a clear view of the entire hazardous zone and where
it cannot be activated from within the hazardous zone. Make sure that nobody is in the
hazardous zone before activating the override function.
Override time must be properly configured for its application by a sufficiently trained and qualified
person.
Make sure to connect an override cancel switch to the Reset line when using the override
function. Otherwise the override state may not be released by the override cancel switch,
resulting in serious injury.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
vii
Introduction
Install F3SG-R so that it is not affected by reflective surfaces. Failure to do so may hinder
detection, resulting in serious injury. For an installation distance from reflective surfaces, see 4-13. Distance from Reflective Surfaces.
When using more than 1 set of F3SG-R in adjacent areas, the emitter of one F3SG-R may
interfere with the receiver of the other, causing the safety functions to stop working properly.
Install and configure them so that mutual interference does not occur.
Make sure that foreign material such as water, oil, or dust does not enter the F3SG-R or the
connector while the cap or the cover of the DIP Switch is removed.
To change the response time, calculate the safety distance based on the setting. Otherwise, the
machine may not stop before a person reaches the hazardous part, resulting in serious injury.
Do not use the sensor system with mirrors in a retro-reflective configuration as shown
below.Doing so may hinder detection. It is possible to use mirrors to alter the detection zone to a
90-degree angle.
Reflector
Reflector
Position with retro-reflection
Position with detection zone bent at 90
Perform an inspection for all F3SG-R as described in Chapter 6 Checklists. When using cascade
connections, perform inspections for every connected F3SG-R.
For wiring
When using the PNP output, connect the load between the output and 0 V line. When using the
NPN output, connect the load between the output and +24 VDC line. Connecting the load
between the output and a different power supply line from the above will result in a dangerous
condition because the operation mode of safety output is reversed to "Dark-ON".
When using the PNP output, do not ground +24 VDC line. When using the NPN output, do not
ground 0 V line. Otherwise, a ground fault may turn the safety output ON, resulting in a failure of
stopping the machine.
Configure the system by using the optimal number of safety outputs that satisfy the requirements
of the necessary safety category.
viii
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Introduction
Do not connect each line of F3SG-R to a DC power supply of higher than 24 VDC+20%. Also, do
not connect it to an AC power supply. Failure to do so may result in electric shock.
Make sure to perform wiring while the power supply is OFF.
Do not use the auxiliary output for safety applications. Failure to do so may result in serious
injury when the F3SG-R fails.
For the F3SG-R to comply with IEC 61496-1 and UL 508, the DC power supply unit must satisfy
all of the following conditions:
• Must be within the rated power voltage (24 VDC ± 20%)
• Must have tolerance against the total rated current of devices if it is connected to multiple
devices
• Must comply with EMC directives (industrial environment)
• Double or reinforced insulation must be applied between the primary and secondary circuits
• Automatic recovery of overcurrent protection characteristics
• Output holding time must be 20ms or longer
• Must satisfy output characteristic requirements for class 2 circuit or limited voltage current
circuit defined by UL508. Refer to 4-5-2. Power Supply Unit.
• Must comply with laws and regulations, regarding EMC and electrical equipment safety, of the
country or region where the F3SG-R is used (For example, in EU, the power supply must
comply with the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive.)
Double or reinforced insulation from hazardous voltage must be applied to all input and output
lines. Failure to do so may result in electric shock.
Extension of the cable must be within a specified length. If it isn't, safety function may not work
properly, resulting in danger.
Settings
Some settings of functions or the Setting Recovery function configurable with the Configuration
Tool may increase risks. Make sure the Responsible Person conduct a thorough risk assessment
analysis before managing and changing the settings. Unintended changes to the settings may
cause a person go to undetected, resulting in serious injury.
After completion of teach-in, check that the configuration have been properly done.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
ix
Introduction
Other
Do not try to disassemble, repair, or modify this product. Doing so may cause the safety functions
to stop working properly.
Do not use the F3SG-R in environments where flammable or explosive gases are present. Doing
so may result in explosion.
Perform daily and 6-month inspections for the F3SG-R as described in Chapter 6 Checklists.
Otherwise, the system may fail to work properly, resulting in serious injury.
Do not use the F3SG-R in environments where strong electromagnetic field may be produced.
Doing so may cause the safety functions to stop working properly.
x
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Introduction
Precautions for Safe Use
Make sure to observe the following precautions that are necessary for ensuring safe use of the product.
Do not install, use, or store the F3SG-R in the following types of environments:
- Areas exposed to intense interference light, such as direct sunlight
- Areas with high humidity where condensation is likely to occur
- Areas where oil mist or corrosive gases are present
- Areas exposed to vibration or shock levels higher than in the specification provisions
- Areas where the product may come into contact with water
- Areas where the pollution degree is harsher than 3, such as outdoor environment
- Areas where the product may get wet with oil that can solve adhesive
• Loads must satisfy both of the following conditions:
- Not short-circuited
- Not used with a current that is higher than the rating
• Do not drop the product.
• Dispose of the product in accordance with the relevant rules and regulations of the country or area where the
product is used.
• Make sure that the F3SG-R is securely mounted and its cables and connectors are properly secured based
on the torque recommended in this document.
• Bending radii of cables must be equal to or higher than specified minimum values.
• When replacing the cable connectors with other types of connectors, use connectors that provide a
protection grade of IP54 or higher.
• Be sure to route the input/output lines for the F3SG-R separate from high-potential power lines or through an
exclusive conduit.
• To extend a cable length with a cable other than the dedicated cable, use a cable with the same or superior
specifictions.
Refer to 4-5-3-4. Extending Cable Length with Commercially Available Cable
• In environments where foreign material such as spatter adheres to the F3SG-R, attach a cover to protect the
F3SG-R from the spatter.
• Interface Unit F39-GIF is dedicated to the F3SG-R series. Do not use it for F3SJ-A or F3SJ-E/B series.
• Read and understand this document for DIP Switch setting.
• The rated life of this product is 6 years.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
xi
Introduction
Precautions for Correct Use
Observe the precautions described below to prevent operation failure, malfunctions, or undesirable effects on
product performance.
 Storage conditions and installation environment
• Do not install, use, or store the F3SG-R for a long time at a temperature or humidity out of the
specified range.
• This is a class A product. In residential areas it may cause radio interference, in which case the
Responsible Person may be required to take adequate measures to reduce interference.
 Wiring and installation
• Properly perform the wiring after confirming the signal names of all the terminals.
• Be sure that there is nothing in the detection zone and the stable-state indicator is turned ON after
power is turned ON.
• Do not operate the control system until 2 seconds or more after turning ON the power of the F3SG-R.
• When using a commercially available switching regulator power supply, make sure to ground the PE
terminal (protective earth terminal).
• Install the emitter and receiver to the same vertical direction.
• Use brackets of specified quantities and locations according to the dimensions.
If the brackets described above are not used, ratings and performance cannot be met.
• Do not install the F3SG-R close to a device that generates high-frequency noise. Otherwise, take
sufficient blocking measures.
 Cleaning
• Do not use thinner, benzene, or acetone for cleaning. They affect the product's resin parts and paint
on the housing.
 Object detection
• The F3SG-R cannot detect transparent and/or translucent objects.
 Settings
• Do not operate the DIP Switch during normal operation of the F3SG-R. Otherwise, the F3SG-R
enters the Lockout state.
• Do not operate the DIP Switch and Push Switch with tools that may damage the product.
• Be sure that the F3SG-R is in the Setting mode when making a change to the setting.
xii
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Introduction
Visual Aids
The following symbols appear in this document to help you locate different types of information.
Indicates important information or advice on a function or operation of the product.
Indicates page numbers or chapter title of related information.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
xiii
Introduction
xiv
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Legislation and Standards
i
Terms and Conditions Agreement
iii
Safety Precautions
v
Precautions for Safe Use
xi
Precautions for Correct Use
xii
Visual Aids
xiii
Chapter1
Overview and Specifications
1
1-1. What is Included
2
1-2. System Components
3
1-2-1. Basic Components
4
1-2-2. Model Overview
5
1-3. List of Features
6
1-3-1. Model Overview
6
1-3-2. Versions
6
1-3-3. List of Features
7
1-4. LED Indicators
1-4-1. LED Indicator Status
8
9
1-5. Ratings/Specifications
11
1-6. List of Models
15
Chapter2
1-6-1. List of Models/Response Time/Current Consumption/Weight
15
1-6-2. Calculation of Response Time of Cascaded Segments
18
System Operation and Functions
19
2-1. Combination of Functions
21
2-2. Operating States
23
2-2-1. Machine Run State
23
2-2-2. Machine Stop State
23
2-2-3. Interlock State
23
2-2-4. Lockout State
23
2-2-5. Teach-in Mode
23
2-2-6. Setting State
24
2-3. Optical Synchronization
2-3-1. Overview
2-4. Scan Code Selection
Introduction
Table of Contents
25
25
26
2-4-1. Overview
26
2-4-2. Factory Default Setting
26
2-4-3. Setting with DIP Switch
26
2-4-4. Setting with Configuration Tool
26
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
E
xv
Introduction
2-5. PNP/NPN Selection
2-5-1. Overview
27
2-5-2. Factory Default Setting
27
2-5-3. Setting with DIP Switch
27
2-5-4. Setting with Configuration Tool
27
2-6. Self-Test
2-6-1. Overview
28
28
2-6-1-1. Self-Test details
28
2-6-1-2. Waveform of safety outputs
29
2-7. External Test
30
2-7-1. Overview
30
2-7-2. Factory Default Setting
31
2-7-3. Setting with DIP Switch
31
2-7-4. Setting with Configuration Tool
31
2-8. Lockout Reset
32
2-8-1. Overview
32
2-9. Interlock
33
2-9-1. Over view
33
2-9-2. Factory Default Setting
36
2-9-3. Setting with DIP Switch
36
2-9-4. Setting with Configuration Tool
37
2-10. External Device Monitoring (EDM)
38
2-10-1.Overview
38
2-10-2.Factory Default Setting
39
2-10-3.Setting with DIP Switch
39
2-10-4.Setting with Configuration Tool
39
2-11. Auxiliary Output
41
2-11-1.Overview
41
2-11-2.Factory Default Setting
42
2-11-3.Setting with DIP Switch
42
2-11-4.Setting with Configuration Tool
43
2-12. Muting
F3SG-R
45
2-12-1.Standard Muting Mode
47
2-12-2.Exit-Only Muting Mode
57
2-12-3.Position Detection Muting Mode
63
2-12-4.Dynamic Muting
68
2-12-5.Factory Default Setting
69
2-12-6.Setting with DIP Switch
69
2-12-7.Setting with Configuration Tool
69
2-13. Override
xvi
27
71
2-13-1.Override at Normal Operation
72
2-13-2.Override upon Startup
74
User’s Manual
75
2-13-4.Setting with Configuration Tool
75
2-14. Fixed Blanking
76
2-14-1.Overview
76
2-14-2.Factory Default Setting
79
2-14-3.Setting with DIP Switch
79
2-14-4.Setting with Configuration Tool
79
2-15. Floating Blanking
80
2-15-1.Overview
80
2-15-2.Factory Default Setting
83
2-15-3.Setting with DIP Switch
83
2-15-4.Setting with Configuration Tool
84
2-16. Reduced Resolution
85
2-16-1.Overview
85
2-16-2.Factory Default Setting
86
2-16-3.Setting with DIP Switch
86
2-16-4.Setting with Configuration Tool
86
2-17. Warning Zone
87
2-17-1.Overview
87
2-17-2.Factory Default Setting
90
2-17-3.Setting with DIP Switch
90
2-17-4.Setting with Configuration Tool
90
2-18. Setting Zone Adjacency Conditions
91
2-19. Operating Range Selection
93
2-19-1.Overview
93
2-19-2.Factory Default Setting
93
2-19-3.Setting with DIP Switch
93
2-19-4.Setting by Wiring
94
2-19-5.Setting with Configuration Tool
94
2-20. Response Time Adjustment
95
2-20-1.Overview
95
2-20-2.Factory Default Setting
95
2-20-3.Setting with DIP Switch
95
2-20-4.Setting with Configuration Tool
95
2-21. Lamp
96
2-21-1.Overview
96
2-21-2.Factory Default Setting
96
2-21-3.Setting with DIP Switch
96
2-21-4.Setting with Configuration Tool
96
2-22. Designated Beam Output
Introduction
2-13-3.Setting with DIP Switch
99
2-22-1.Overview
99
2-22-2.Factory Default Setting
99
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
E
xvii
Introduction
2-22-3.Setting with DIP Switch
100
2-22-4.Setting with Configuration Tool
100
2-23. Light Level Monitoring
2-23-1.Incident Light Level Information
101
2-23-1-1. Overview
101
2-23-1-2. Setting with Configuration Tool
101
2-23-2.Ambient Light Level Information
101
2-23-2-1. Overview
101
2-23-2-2. Setting with Configuration Tool
101
2-24. Maintenance Information
102
2-24-1.Overview
102
2-24-2.Error Log
102
2-24-3.Warning Log
102
2-24-4.Power-ON Time
102
2-24-5.Load Switching Frequency
103
2-24-6.Muting Statistics Information
103
2-25. Operating Status Monitoring
104
2-25-1.Overview
104
2-25-2.Readout Information
104
2-26. Setting Recovery
105
2-26-1.Overview
105
Chapter3
Setting with DIP Switch
107
3-1. List of Features Configurable by DIP Switch
108
3-2. DIP Switch
109
3-2-1. DIP Switch on Receiver
110
3-2-2. DIP Switch on Emitter
111
3-2-3. Push Switch
111
3-3. Setting by Teach-in
112
3-3-1. Setting Fixed Blanking by Teach-in
112
3-3-2. Setting Floating Blanking by Teach-in
115
Chapter4
Wiring/Installation
4-1. Installation Considerations
xviii
101
F3SG-R
119
121
4-1-1. Detection Zone and Approach
121
4-1-2. Safety Distance
122
4-1-2-1. Safety Distance Formulas according to ISO 13855/EN ISO 13855
122
4-1-2-2. Safety Distance Formulas according to ANSI B11.19
125
4-1-3. Distance from Reflective Surfaces
126
4-1-3-1. F3SG-4R (Type 4 ESPE)
126
User’s Manual
4-2. Cascade Connection
127
129
4-2-1. Overview
129
4-2-2. Connection Procedure
131
4-3. Dimensions
4-3-1. Mounted with Standard Fixed Brackets (F39-LGF)
132
132
4-3-1-1. F3SG-RA Series
132
4-3-1-2. F3SG-RE Series
134
4-3-1-3. Standard Fixed Bracket
136
4-3-2. Mounted with Standard Adjustable Brackets (F39-LGA)
Introduction
4-1-4. Mutual Interference Prevention
137
4-3-2-1. F3SG-RA Series
137
4-3-2-2. F3SG-RE Series
139
4-3-2-3. Standard Adjustable Bracket
141
4-3-3. Mounted with Top/Bottom Adjustable Brackets (F39-LGTB) and Standard Adjustable Brackets
(F39-LGA) 142
4-3-3-1. F3SG-RA Series
142
4-3-3-2. F3SG-RE Series
148
4-3-3-3. Top/Bottom Adjustable Bracket (F39-LGTB)
152
4-3-3-4. Top/Bottom Adjustable Bracket (F39-LGTB-1)
152
4-4. Mounting
153
4-4-1. Mounting Method
153
4-4-2. Number of Brackets Required
153
4-4-3. Mounting Procedure
154
4-4-3-1. Mounting with Standard Fixed Brackets (F39-LGF)
154
4-4-3-2. Mounting with Standard Adjustable Brackets (F39-LGA)
155
4-4-3-3. Mounting with Top/Bottom Adjustable Brackets (F39-LGTB)
159
4-4-4. Beam Alignment Procedure
4-5. Wiring
162
163
4-5-1. Wiring Precautions
163
4-5-2. Power Supply Unit
164
4-5-3. Cable Connections(F3SG-RA Series)
165
4-5-3-1. Single-Ended Cable
165
4-5-3-2. Double-Ended Cable
166
4-5-3-3. Cascading Cable
168
4-5-3-4. Extending Cable Length with Commercially Available Cable
169
4-5-3-5. Reduced Wiring Connector System with Y-Joint Plug/Socket Connector
169
4-5-3-6. Reduced Wiring Connector System with 4-Joint Plug/Socket Connector
170
4-5-4. Cable Connections(F3SG-RE Series)
173
4-5-4-1. Recommended Cable
173
4-5-4-2. Extending Cable Length with Commercially Available Cable
174
4-5-4-3. Reduced Wiring Connector System
174
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
E
xix
Introduction
4-5-5. Functional Earth Connection
Chapter5
Input/Output Circuit and Applications
5-1. Input/Output Circuit
175
177
179
5-1-1. Entire Circuit Diagram
179
5-1-1-1. F3SG-RA Series
179
5-1-1-2. F3SG-RE Series
181
5-1-2. Input Circuit Diagram by Function
183
5-1-2-1. F3SG-RA Series
183
5-1-2-2. F3SG-RE Series
183
5-2. Wiring Examples(F3SG-RA Series)
184
5-2-1. Standalone F3SG-RA using PNP Outputs
184
5-2-2. Standalone F3SG-RA using NPN Outputs
185
5-2-3. Standard Muting Mode/Exit-Only Muting Mode using PNP Outputs
186
5-2-4. Standard Muting Mode/Exit-Only Muting Mode using NPN Outputs
187
5-2-5. Standard Muting Mode/Exit-Only Muting Mode with two Muting Sensors using PNP Outputs
188
5-2-6. Standard Muting Mode/Exit-Only Muting Mode with two Muting Sensors using NPN Outputs
189
5-2-7. Standard Muting Mode with four Muting Sensors using PNP Outputs
190
5-2-8. Standard Muting Mode with four Muting Sensors using NPN Outputs
191
5-2-9. Standard Muting Mode with F3W-MA (T-Shaped Configuration with 4-Joint Plug/Socket Connector) 192
5-2-10.Exit-Only Muting Mode with F3W-MA (L-Shaped Configuration with 4-Joint Plug/Socket Connector) 193
5-2-11.Pre-Resest Mode using PNP Output
194
5-2-12.Pre-Resest Mode using NPN Output
195
5-2-13.Standalone F3SG-RA with Y-Joint Plug/Socket Connector using PNP outputs
196
5-2-14.Standalone F3SG-RA with Y-Joint Plug/Socket Connector using NPN outputs
197
5-2-15.F3SG-RA with Y-Joint Plug/Socket Connector in Standard Muting Mode/Exit-Only Muting
Mode using PNP outputs 198
5-3. Wiring Examples (F3SG-RE Series)
5-3-1. Short Mode
199
5-3-2. Long Mode
200
5-3-3. Standalone F3SG-RE with Y-Joint Plug/Socket Connector
201
5-4. Connectable Safety Control Units
Chapter6
Checklists
6-1. Pre-Operation Checklists
6-1-1. Checklists
xx
F3SG-R
199
User’s Manual
202
203
204
204
6-1-1-1. Installation Condition Check
204
6-1-1-2. Wiring Check Before Power Is Turned ON
204
205
6-1-1-4. Checking that Hazardous Parts Stop While the Machine Operates
206
6-2. Maintenance Checklists
6-2-1. Checklists
207
207
6-2-1-1. Inspection at Startup and When Changing Operators
207
6-2-1-2. Checking that Hazardous Parts Stop While the Machine Operates
208
6-2-1-3. Items to Inspect Every 6 Months or When Machine Settings Are Changed
208
Appendix
211
7-1. Troubleshooting
212
Chapter7
7-1-1. Lockout State
213
7-1-1-1. Description
213
7-1-1-2. Troubleshooting
214
7-1-2. Warning
Introduction
6-1-1-3. Operation Check While the Machine Is Stopped
218
7-1-2-1. Description
218
7-1-2-2. Troubleshooting
218
7-1-2-3. Muting Sequence Error Indication
219
7-1-2-4. Interlock Sequence Error Indication
220
7-2. Optional Accessories(Sold Separately)
221
7-3. Glossary
228
7-4. Revision History
232
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
xxi
Introduction
xxii
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Chapter
Chapter 1 Overview and Specifications
1
2
1-2. System Components
3
1-2-1. Basic Components
4
1-2-2. Model Overview
5
1-3. List of Features
6
1-3-1. Model Overview
6
1-3-2. Versions
6
1-3-3. List of Features
7
1-4. LED Indicators
1-4-1. LED Indicator Status
Overview and Specifications
1-1. What is Included
8
9
1-5. Ratings/Specifications
11
1-6. List of Models
15
1-6-1. List of Models/Response Time/Current Consumption/Weight
15
1-6-2. Calculation of Response Time of Cascaded Segments
18
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
1
Overview and Specifications
1-1. What is Included
Before use, confirm that the items below are included with the product.
Chapter
If you find that an item is missing, please contact your local branch office or distributor.
1
Product
What is Included
F3SG-RA main unit
Quantity
Emitter x 1, Receiver x 1
F3SG-RE main unit
2
Standard Fixed Bracket
The number of brackets included depends on protective height of the F3SG-R.
Less than 1,280 mm: 2 sets
1,280 mm or longer and up to 2,270 mm: 3 sets
2,350 mm or longer and up to 2,510 mm: 4 sets
Warning Zone Label
F3SG-RA series: 1, F3SG-RE series: Not included
Troubleshooting Guide Sticker
1
Safety Precautions
4
Quick Installation Manual
1
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Overview and Specifications
1-2. System Components
 F3SG-RA Series
Chapter
This section describes the system components and part names of the F3SG-R system.
 F3SG-RE Series
Beam
Emitter
Indicator
Indicator
Receiver
Receiver
DIP Switch (Emitter)
Power Cable
(Gray)
DIP Switch (Receiver)
Power Cable
(Gray)
Push-Switch
Extension cable
Power Cable
(Black)
System Components
Beam
Emitter
1
Beam center-line mark
Beam center-line mark
Communication Port
Power Cable
(Black)
Extension cable
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
3
Overview and Specifications
1-2-1. Basic Components
Chapter
Component
Emitter, receiver
Model name
F3SG-RA--
Description
1
Select a model name based on the required protective
height and ESPE type.
The model name can be understood as follows:
System Components
F3SG-RA--
1: ESPE type (4: Type 4)
2: Protective height (mm)
3: Object resolution (mm)
4: L: Emitter, D: Receiver, blank: Emitter and receiver.
Emitter, receiver
F3SG-RE- Select a model name based on the required protective
height and ESPE type.
The model name can be understood as follows:
F3SG-RE-
1: ESPE type (4: Type 4)
2: Protective height (mm)
3: Output type (P: PNP output, N: NPN output*)
4: Object resolution (mm)
5: L: Emitter, D: Receiver, blank: Emitter and receiver.
* For emitter, a hyphen "-" is indicated instead of "P" or "N".
To distinguish between the emitter and receiver, find the labels attached to the front of the F3SG-R. The label on the
emitter reads "EMITTER" and the label on the receiver reads "RECEIVER".
4
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Overview and Specifications
1-2-2. Model Overview
The F3SG-R safety light curtain family is available in one ESPE type, Type 4 according to EN
F3SG-4RA : Type 4 ESPE
Chapter
(These are also referred to as the "F3SG-RA".)
1
61496-1, identified as follows:
System Components
The F3SG-RA is multi-functional and designed for various applications.
Refer to Chapter 2 System Operation and Functions for more information on available features.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
5
Overview and Specifications
1-3. List of Features
Chapter
1-3-1. Model Overview
The F3SG-R safety light curtain family has two types, F3SG-RA and F3SG-RE.
1
 F3SG-RA Series
List of Features
The model name is represented as F3SG-RA-.
The F3SG-RA series is an advance model, allowing you to configure the safety light curtain to fit your
application.
Refer to the List of Features below for available features.
 F3SG-RE Series
The model name is represented as F3SG-RE.
The F3SG-RE series is a limited-function model, easy to use with simple wiring (emitter: 4-wire,
receiver: 4-wire).
Refer to the List of Features below for available features.
1-3-2. Versions
The F3SG-R has Version 1.0 and Version 1.1. Avaialble features vary depending on the versions.
When Version 1.0 and Version 1.1 of F3SG-RA are in cascade connection, all cascaded segments
operate as Version 1.0.
Configuration Tool Version
F3SG-R Version
1.0
1.1 and up
1.01 and down
Supported
-
1.10 and up
Supported
Supported
Refer to  Functions by versions under 1-3-3. List of Features for more information.
Please note that it is not possible to update the version of the F3SG-RA with the Configuration tool.
You can find a version of F3SG-R on the nameplate of the receiver as shown below.
6
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Overview and Specifications
1-3-3. List of Features
The F3SG-R safety light curtain family has the following features. For the F3SG-RA, some of the
Configuration Tool (SD Manager 2) via a PC.
Setting with DIP Switch and Configuration Tool is not available for the F3SG-RE.
Chapter
features are available or configurable by the DIP Switch on the body of the safety light curtain or the
1
Feature
Setting by
DIP Switch
Factory default setting
F3SG-RE
Series
Page
Scan Code Selection
X
Code A
p.26
PNP/NPN Selection
X
PNP output
p.27
External Test
X
24 V Active
p.30
Interlock
X
X
Auto Reset Mode
p.33
Pre-Reset
X
X
Disabled
p.38
External Device Monitoring(EDM)
X
p.38
X
Disabled
Auxiliary Output
X
Muting/Override information
p.41
Muting
X
Standard Muting mode
p.45
Override
X
Enabled
p.71
Fixed Blanking *
X
X
Disabled
p.76
Floating Blanking *
X
X
Disabled
p.80
X
Disabled
p.85
Reduced Resolution
Warning Zone
X
Operating Range Selection
Disabled
X
p.87
Short mode
Response Time Adjustment
X
p.93
X
Normal mode
p.95
X
Red:Disabled
Orange:Disabled
Green:Muting/Override
information
p.96
Designated Beam Output
X
Disabled
p.99
Muting Statistics Data Recording *
X
Enabled
p.103
Lamp
List of Features
F3SG-RA Series
Setting by
Configuration
Tool
* The functions are upgraded in Version 1.1 of F3SG-RA.
 Functions by versions
F3SG-R Version
1.0
1.1
Fixed Blanking
Configuring an allowable beam is possible on
both ends of Fixed Blanking zone.
Configuring an allowable beam is possible on
both or either end of Fixed Blanking zone.
Floating Blanking
Temporarily Disable Monitoring function is only Temporarily Disable Monitoring function is
available when the F3SG-RA is in one
available when the F3SG-RA is in either one
segment system.
segment system or cascade connection.
Muting Statistics Information
Monitoring muting statistics information is only
possible when it is offline.
Monitoring muting statistics information is
possible when it is either online or offline.
Clearing log files of muting statistics
information is possible.
Refer to 1-3-2. Versions to check versions of your F3SG-R.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
7
Overview and Specifications
1-4. LED Indicators
Chapter
 F3SG-RA Series
<Emitter>
<Receiver>
1
LED Indicators
1. Top-beam-state indicator (Blue)
2. PNP/NPN mode indicator (Green)
3. Response time indicator (Green)
4. Sequence error indicator (Yellow)
5. Blanking indicator (Green)
6. Configuration indicator (Green)
1. Test indicator (Green)
7. Interlock indicator (Yellow)
2. Operating range indicator (Green)
8. External device monitoring indicator (Green)
3. Power indicator (Green)
9. Internal error indicator (Red)
4. Lockout indicator (Red)
10. Lockout indicator (Red)
11. Stable-state indicator (Green)
12. ON/OFF indicator (Green/Red)
13. Communication indicator (Green)
14. Bottom-beam-state indicator (Blue)
 F3SG-RE Series
<Emitter>
<Receiver>
1. Top-beam-state indicator (Blue)
2. Operating range indicator (Green)
3. Power indicator (Green)
9. Internal error indicator (Red)
4. Lockout indicator (Red)
10. Lockout indicator (Red)
11. Stable-state indicator (Green)
12. ON/OFF indicator (Green/Red)
13. Communication indicator (Green)
14. Bottom-beam-state indicator (Blue)
8
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Overview and Specifications
1-4-1. LED Indicator Status
Shown below are indication statuses of F3SG-R LED indicators when you purchased.
Location
TEST
Green
F3SG-RA F3SG-RE
Series
Series
X
Illuminated
-
Blinking
External Test is being
performed
Lockout state due to DIP
Switch setting error or
Operating range selection
setting error
Error due to noise
2
Operating range
LONG
Green
X
X
Long range mode is
selected
3
Power
POWER
Green
X
X
Power is ON.
4
Lockout
LOCKOUT Red
X
X
-
Lockout state due to error
in emitter
Illuminated
Blinking
LED Indicators
Test
Color
1
1
Name of Indicator
Chapter
Emitter
Receiver
Location
Name of Indicator
Color
F3SG-RA F3SG-RE
Series
Series
X
The top beam is
unblocked
Muting/Override state, or
Lockout state due to Cap
error or Other sensor error
*3
1
Top-beam-state
TOP
Blue
X
2
PNP/NPN mode
NPN
Green
X
NPN mode is selected by
DIP Switch
-
3
Response time
SLOW
Green
X
Response Time
Adjustment is enabled
-
4
Sequence error
SEQ
Yellow
X
-
5
Blanking
BLANK
Green
X
Blanking, Warning Zone
or Reduced Resolution is
enabled
Sequence error in Muting
or Pre-reset mode
Teach-in mode, or
Blanking Monitoring error
Teach-in mode, zone
measurement beng
performed by Dynamic
Muting, or Lockout state
due to Parameter error or
Cascading Configuration
error
6
Configuration
CFG
Green
X
-
7
Interlock
INT-LK
Yellow
X
Interlock state
Pre-reset mode *2
8
External device
monitoring
EDM
Green
X
RESET input is in ON
state *1
Lockout state due to EDM
error
9
Internal error
INTERNAL Red
X
X
-
Lockout state due to
Internal error, or error due
to abnormal power supply
or noise
10
Lockout
LOCKOUT Red
X
X
-
Lockout state due to error
in receiver
11
Stable-state
STB
Green
X
X
Safety output is in ON
state
Green
12
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
X
Red
Incident light level is
170% or higher of ONthreshold
X
Safety output is in OFF
state, or the sensor is in
Setting state
Safety output is
instantaneously turned
OFF due to ambient light
or vibration
Lockout state due to
Safety Output error, or
error due to abnormal
power supply or noise
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
E
9
Overview and Specifications
Location
Name of Indicator
Color
F3SG-RA F3SG-RE
Series
Series
Chapter
1
LED Indicators
13
Communication
COM
Green
X
X
14
Bottom-beamstate
BTM
Blue
X
X
Illuminated
Blinking
Synchronization between
emitter and receiver is
maintained
Lockout state due to
Communication error, or
error due to abnormal
power supply or noise
The bottom beam is
unblocked
Muting/Override state , or
Lockout state due to DIP
Switch setting error *3
*1. The EDM indicator is illuminated when the RESET input is in the ON state regardless of the use of
the EDM function.
*2. Refer to the timing chart of Pre-Reset mode in 2-9. Interlock for more information of blinking patterns.
*3. Muting/Override and cascade connection are not available for the F3SG-RE.
Refer to 7-3. Glossary for definitions of terms used in the table above.
TOP, CFG, LOCKOUT, STB and ON/OFF indicators are illuminated when the receiver of the F3SG-RA is
in Setting mode.
10
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Overview and Specifications
1-5. Ratings/Specifications
F3SG-4RA-14
Type 4
F3SG-4RA-14/-30
F3SG-4RE14
F3SG-4RE30
F3SG-4RE14/30
1
Type of ESPE
(IEC 61496-1)
F3SG-4RA-30
Object Resolution
(Detection Capability)
Opaque objects
14-mm dia.
30-mm dia.
14-mm dia.
30-mm dia.
Beam Gap
10 mm
20 mm
10 mm
20 mm
Number of Beams
15 to 207
8 to 124
15 to 207
8 to 124
Lens Size
5.2 × 3.4 (W × H) mm
7-mm dia.
5.2 × 3.4 (W × H) mm
7-mm dia.
Protective Height
160 to 2080 mm (6.3 to
81.9 inch)
190 to 2510 mm (7.3 to
98.7 inch)
160 to 2080 mm (6.3 to
81.9 inch)
190 to 2510 mm (7.3 to
98.7 inch)
Response Time
Long
0.3 to 10.0 m (1 to 32 ft.) 0.3 to 20.0 m (1 to 65 ft.) 0.3 to 10.0 m (1 to 32 ft.) 0.3 to 20.0 m (1 to 65 ft.)
Short
0.3 to 3.0 m (1 to 10 ft.)
0.3 to 7.0 m (1 to 23 ft.)
0.3 to 3.0 m (1 to 10 ft.)
Normal mode: 8 to 18 ms *1
ON to OFF
Slow mode: 16 to 36 ms *1 *2
5 to 15 ms
OFF to ON 40 to 90 ms *1
25 to 75 ms
Ratings/Specifications
Performance
Operating Range
Chapter
The  in the model names indicate the protective heights in millimeters.
0.3 to 7.0 m (1 to 23 ft.)
*1. Response time when used in one segment system or in cascaded connection.
Refer to 1-6. List of Models for more information.
*2. Selectable by Configuration Tool.
Effective Aperture
Angle (EAA) (IEC
61496-2)
Type 4
±2.5° max., emitter and receiver at operating range of 3 m or greater
Light Source
Infrared LEDs, Wavelength: 870 nm
Startup Waiting Time
2 s max.
Electrical
Power Supply Voltage (Vs)
Current Consumption
SELV/PELV 24 VDC±20% (ripple p-p 10% max.)
Refer to 1-6. List of Models
Two PNP or NPN transistor outputs (PNP or NPN
is selectable by DIP Switch.)
Safety Outputs (OSSD)
F3SG-REP: Two PNP transistor
outputs
F3SG-REN: Two NPN transistor
outputs
Load current of 300 mA max., Residual voltage of 2 V max. (except for voltage drop due to cable
extension), Capacitive load of 1 F max., Inductive load of 2.2 H max. *1
Leakage current of 1 mA max. (PNP), 2 mA max. (NPN) *2
*1. The load inductance is the maximum value when the safety output frequently repeats ON and OFF.
When you use the safety output at 4 Hz or less, the usable load inductance becomes larger.
*2. These values must be taken into consideration when connecting elements including a capacitive
load such as a capacitor.
Auxiliary Output
Safety
Output Operation Output
Mode
Auxiliary
Output
One PNP or NPN transistor output (PNP or NPN is
selectable by DIP Switch.)
Load current of 100 mA max., Residual voltage of
2 V max .
-
Light-ON (Safety output is enabled when the receiver receives an emitting signal.)
Muting or Override output (default) (Configurable
by Configuration Tool)
-
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
11
Overview and Specifications
F3SG-4RA-14
F3SG-4RA-30
F3SG-4RE14
F3SG-4RE30
Chapter
1
Ratings/Specifications
ON
Voltage
Operating Range Select Input:
TEST:
Long: 9 V to Vs (sink current 3 mA max.) *
24 V Active: 9 V to Vs (sink current 3 mA max.) *
Short: 0 to 3 V (source current 3 mA max.)
0 V Active: 0 to 3 V (source current 3 mA max.)
MUTE A/B:
PNP: Vs to Vs-3 V (sink current 3 mA max.) *
NPN: 0 to 3 V (source current 3 mA max.)
RESET:
PNP: Vs to Vs-3 V (sink current 5 mA max.) *
NPN: 0 to 3 V (source current 5 mA max.)
OFF
Voltage
TEST:
24 V Active: 0 to 1.5 V or open
0 V Active: 9 V to Vs or open
MUTE A/B, RESET:
PNP: 0 to 1/2 Vs, or open *
NPN: 1/2 Vs to Vs, or open *
Input Voltage
* The Vs indicates a supply voltage value in your environment.
Overvoltage Category (IEC
60664-1)
II
Refer to 1-4-1. LED Indicator Status
Indicators
Protective Circuit
Output short protection, Power supply reverse polarity protection
Insulation Resistance
20 M or higher (500 VDC megger)
Dielectric Strength
1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz (1 min)
Functional
Mutual Interference Prevention
(Scan Code)
This function prevents mutual interference in up to
two F3SG-RA systems.
-
4-1-4. Mutual Interference Prevention
Cascade Connection
Number of cascaded segments: 3 max.
Total number of beams: 255 max.
Cable length between sensors: 10 m max.
Test Function
Self-test (at power-on, and during operation)
External test (light emission stop function by test
input)
Safety-Related Functions
Self-test (at power-on, and during operation)
Interlock
External device monitoring (EDM)
Pre-reset
Fixed blanking/Floating blanking
Reduced resolution
Muting/Override
Scan code selection
PNP/NPN selection
Response time adjustment
Chapter 2 System Operation and Functions
Chapter 3 Setting with DIP Switch
Environmental
12
Ambient
Temperature
Operating
Storage
-10 to 55°C (14 to 131°F) (non-icing)
-25 to 70°C (-13 to 158°F)
Ambient
Humidity
Operating
35% to 85% (non-condensing)
Storage
35% to 95%
Ambient Illuminance
Incandescent lamp: 3,000 Ix max. on receiver surface
Sunlight: 10,000 Ix max. on receiver surface
Degree of Protection
(IEC 60529)
IP65 and IP67
Vibration Resistance
(IEC 61496-1)
10 to 55 Hz, Multiple amplitude of 0.7 mm, 20 sweeps for all 3 axes
Shock Resistance
(IEC 61496-1)
100 m/s2, 1000 shocks for all 3 axes
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
-
Overview and Specifications
F3SG-4RA-14
Pollution Degree
(IEC 60664-1)
F3SG-4RA-30
F3SG-4RE14
F3SG-4RE30
Pollution Degree 3
Number of
Emitter: 5, Receiver: 8
Wires
Emitter: 4, Receiver: 4
Cable
Length
0.3 m
Cable
Diameter
6 mm
Minimum
Bending
Radius
R5 mm
Ratings/Specifications
M12 connectors: 4-pin, IP67 rated when mated,
Cables prewired to the sensors
1
Power cable
Type of
M12 connectors: 5-pin emitter and 8-pin receiver,
Connection IP67 rated when mated,
Cables prewired to the sensors
Chapter
Connections
Type of
M12 connectors: 5-pin emitter and 8-pin receiver,
Connection IP67 rated when mated
Number of
Emitter: 5, Receiver: 8
Wires
Cascading cable
Cable
Length
0.2 m
Cable
Diameter
6 mm
Minimum
Bending
Radius
R5 mm
-
Type of
M12 connectors: 5-pin emitter and 8-pin receiver,
Connection IP67 rated when mated
Extension cable
- Single-ended
cable
- Double-ended
cable
Number of
Wires
Cable
Length
Emitter: 5, Receiver: 8
Refer to 4-5-3-1. Single-Ended Cable and
4-5-3-2. Double-Ended Cable for cable
lengths and twisted pair wires.
Cable
Diameter
6.6 mm
Minimum
Bending
Radius
R36 mm
Extension of Power Cable
M12 connectors; 4-pin emitter and receiver cable:
XS2F-M12 _ _ _ 4S- _ M single ended cable
XS2W-M12 _ _ _ 4SS- _ M double ended cable
PVC Cable Diameter: 5 mm
PUR Cable Diameter: 4.7 mm
100 m max.(Emitter/Receiver)
Material
Material
Weight (packaged)
Included Accessories
Housing: Aluminum
Cap: PBT
Front window: PMMA
Cable: Oil resistant PVC
Mounting Bracket: ZDC2
FE plate: SUS
Refer to 1-6. List of Models
Safety Precautions, Quick Installation Manual, Standard Fixed Bracket*1, Troubleshooting Guide
Sticker, Warning Zone Label *2
*1. The quantity of Standard Fixed Brackets included varies depending on the protective height.
[F3SG-RA-14]/F3SG-RE14]
- Protective height of 0160 to 1200: 2 sets
- Protective height of 1280 to 2080: 3 sets
[F3SG-RA-30]/F3SG-RE30]
- Protective height of 0190 to 1230: 2 sets
- Protective height of 1310 to 2270: 3 sets
- Protective height of 2350 to 2510: 4 sets
*2. Included in the F3SG-RA series.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
13
Overview and Specifications
F3SG-4RA-14
F3SG-4RA-30
F3SG-4RE14
Conformity
Chapter
1
Ratings/Specifications
14
Conforming standards
Performance Level
(PL)/Safety category
Type 4
Refer to Legislation and Standards
PL e/Category 4 (EN ISO 13849-1:2008)
PFHd
1.1 × 10-8 (IEC 61508)
Proof test interval TM
Every 20 years (IEC 61508)
SFF
99% (IEC 61508)
HFT
1 (IEC 61508)
Classification
Type B (IEC 61508-2)
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
9.1×10-9 (IEC 61508)
F3SG-4RE30
Overview and Specifications
1-6. List of Models
F3SG-4RA-14
Weight
[kg] *3
OFF
OFF (Not
ON→OFF *1 (Synchronized) synchronized) Emitter Receiver
→ON *2
→ON *2
F3SG-4RA0160-14
15
160
8
40
140
40
75
1.8
F3SG-4RA0240-14
23
240
8
40
140
45
75
2.0
F3SG-4RA0320-14
31
320
8
40
140
55
75
2.2
F3SG-4RA0400-14
39
400
8
40
140
60
80
2.7
F3SG-4RA0480-14
47
480
13
65
165
50
80
2.9
F3SG-4RA0560-14
55
560
13
65
165
55
80
3.1
F3SG-4RA0640-14
63
640
13
65
165
60
85
3.3
F3SG-4RA0720-14
71
720
13
65
165
65
85
3.9
F3SG-4RA0800-14
79
800
13
65
165
65
90
4.1
F3SG-4RA0880-14
87
880
13
65
165
70
90
4.3
F3SG-4RA0960-14
95
960
13
65
165
75
90
4.5
F3SG-4RA1040-14
103
1040
13
65
165
80
95
4.7
4.8
F3SG-4RA1120-14
111
1120
13
65
165
85
95
F3SG-4RA1200-14
119
1200
13
65
165
90
100
5.0
F3SG-4RA1280-14
127
1280
13
65
165
95
100
5.2
F3SG-4RA1360-14
135
1360
13
65
165
95
105
5.6
F3SG-4RA1440-14
143
1440
18
90
190
85
105
5.8
F3SG-4RA1520-14
151
1520
18
90
190
90
105
6.0
F3SG-4RA1600-14
159
1600
18
90
190
90
110
6.6
F3SG-4RA1680-14
167
1680
18
90
190
95
110
6.8
F3SG-4RA1760-14
175
1760
18
90
190
100
115
7.0
F3SG-4RA1840-14
183
1840
18
90
190
100
115
7.2
F3SG-4RA1920-14
191
1920
18
90
190
105
120
7.3
F3SG-4RA2000-14
199
2000
18
90
190
105
120
7.5
List of Models
Number Protective
Height
of
[mm]
Beams
1
Model
Current
Consumption
[mA]
Response Time[ms]
Chapter
1-6-1. List of Models/Response Time/Current Consumption/Weight
F3SG-4RA2080-14
207
2080
18
90
190
110
125
8.1
*1. The response times are values when Scan Code is set at Code B. The response times for Code A are 1 ms shorter than these values.
*2. Refer to 2-3. Optical Synchronization for more information.
*3. The weight includes an emitter, a receiver and included brackets in a product package.
F3SG-4RA-30
Model
Number Protective
of
Height[m
Beams
m]
Current
Consumption
[mA]
Response Time[ms]
Weight
[kg] *3
OFF
OFF (Not
ON→OFF *1 (Synchronized) synchronized) Emitter Receiver
→ON *2
→ON *2
F3SG-4RA0190-30
8
190
8
40
140
35
75
1.8
F3SG-4RA0270-30
12
270
8
40
140
35
75
2.0
F3SG-4RA0350-30
16
350
8
40
140
40
75
2.2
F3SG-4RA0430-30
20
430
8
40
140
45
75
2.7
F3SG-4RA0510-30
24
510
8
40
140
50
75
2.9
F3SG-4RA0590-30
28
590
8
40
140
50
75
3.1
F3SG-4RA0670-30
32
670
8
40
140
55
75
3.3
F3SG-4RA0750-30
36
750
8
40
140
60
80
3.9
F3SG-4RA0830-30
40
830
8
40
140
65
80
4.0
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
E
15
Overview and Specifications
Number Protective
of
Height[m
Beams
m]
Model
Current
Consumption
[mA]
Response Time[ms]
Chapter
Weight
[kg] *3
OFF
OFF (Not
ON→OFF *1 (Synchronized) synchronized) Emitter Receiver
→ON *2
→ON *2
1
List of Models
F3SG-4RA0910-30
44
910
13
65
165
50
80
4.2
F3SG-4RA0990-30
48
990
13
65
165
50
80
4.4
F3SG-4RA1070-30
52
1070
13
65
165
55
80
4.6
F3SG-4RA1150-30
56
1150
13
65
165
55
85
4.8
F3SG-4RA1230-30
60
1230
13
65
165
55
85
4.9
F3SG-4RA1310-30
64
1310
13
65
165
60
85
5.1
F3SG-4RA1390-30
68
1390
13
65
165
60
85
5.6
F3SG-4RA1470-30
72
1470
13
65
165
65
85
5.8
F3SG-4RA1550-30
76
1550
13
65
165
65
90
6.0
F3SG-4RA1630-30
80
1630
13
65
165
70
90
6.5
F3SG-4RA1710-30
84
1710
13
65
165
70
90
6.7
F3SG-4RA1790-30
88
1790
13
65
165
70
90
6.9
F3SG-4RA1870-30
92
1870
13
65
165
75
90
7.1
F3SG-4RA1950-30
96
1950
13
65
165
75
95
7.3
F3SG-4RA2030-30
100
2030
13
65
165
80
95
7.4
F3SG-4RA2110-30
104
2110
13
65
165
80
95
8.0
F3SG-4RA2190-30
108
2190
13
65
165
85
95
8.2
F3SG-4RA2270-30
112
2270
13
65
165
85
100
8.4
F3SG-4RA2350-30
116
2350
13
65
165
85
100
8.8
F3SG-4RA2430-30
120
2430
13
65
165
90
100
8.9
F3SG-4RA2510-30
124
2510
13
65
165
90
100
9.1
*1. The response times are values when Scan Code is set at Code B. The response times for Code A are 1 ms shorter than these values.
*2. Refer to 2-3. Optical Synchronization for more information.
*3. The weight includes an emitter, a receiver and included brackets in a product package.
F3SG-4RE14
Model
16
Number Protective
of
Height
[mm]
Beams
Current
Consumption
[mA]
Response Time[ms]
ON→OFF
Weight
[kg] *2
OFF
OFF (Not
(Synchronized) synchronized) Emitter Receiver
→ON *1
→ON *1
F3SG-4RE016014
15
160
5
25
125
45
50
1.7
F3SG-4RE024014
23
240
5
25
125
55
55
1.9
F3SG-4RE032014
31
320
7
35
135
55
55
2.1
F3SG-4RE040014
39
400
7
35
135
65
60
2.6
F3SG-4RE048014
47
480
7
35
135
70
60
2.8
F3SG-4RE056014
55
560
7
35
135
80
60
3.1
F3SG-4RE064014
63
640
7
35
135
85
65
3.3
F3SG-4RE072014
71
720
9
45
145
80
65
3.8
F3SG-4RE080014
79
800
9
45
145
85
70
4.0
F3SG-4RE088014
87
880
9
45
145
90
70
4.2
F3SG-4RE096014
95
960
9
45
145
95
75
4.4
F3SG-4RE104014
103
1040
9
45
145
100
75
4.6
F3SG-4RE112014
111
1120
11
55
155
90
75
4.7
F3SG-4RE120014
119
1200
11
55
155
95
80
4.9
F3SG-4RE128014
127
1280
11
55
155
100
80
5.1
F3SG-4RE136014
135
1360
11
55
155
105
85
5.6
F3SG-4RE144014
143
1440
11
55
155
110
85
5.7
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Overview and Specifications
Number Protective
Height
of
[mm]
Beams
Model
Current
Consumption
[mA]
Response Time[ms]
F3SG-4RE152014
151
1520
13
65
165
100
90
5.9
Chapter
F3SG-4RE160014
159
1600
13
65
165
105
90
6.5
1
List of Models
Weight
[kg] *2
OFF
OFF (Not
(Synchronized) synchronized) Emitter Receiver
→ON *1
→ON *1
ON→OFF
F3SG-4RE168014
167
1680
13
65
165
110
95
6.7
F3SG-4RE176014
175
1760
13
65
165
115
95
6.9
F3SG-4RE184014
183
1840
13
65
165
115
95
7.1
F3SG-4RE192014
191
1920
15
75
175
110
100
7.3
199
2000
15
75
175
115
F3SG-4RE200014
207
2080
15
75
175
115
F3SG-4RE208014
*1. Refer to 2-3. Optical Synchronization for more information.
*2. The weight includes an emitter, a receiver and included brackets in a product package.
100
7.4
105
8.0
F3SG-4RE30
Number Protective
Height
of
[mm]
Beams
Model
Current
Consumption
[mA]
Response Time[ms]
ON→OFF
Weight
[kg] *2
OFF
OFF (Not
(Synchronized) synchronized) Emitter Receiver
→ON *1
→ON *1
F3SG-4RE019030
8
190
5
25
125
40
50
1.7
F3SG-4RE027030
12
270
5
25
125
45
50
1.9
F3SG-4RE035030
16
350
5
25
125
50
50
2.1
F3SG-4RE043030
20
430
5
25
125
55
55
2.6
F3SG-4RE051030
24
510
5
25
125
60
55
2.8
F3SG-4RE059030
28
590
7
35
135
50
55
3.0
F3SG-4RE067030
32
670
7
35
135
55
55
3.2
F3SG-4RE075030
36
750
7
35
135
60
60
3.8
F3SG-4RE083030
40
830
7
35
135
65
60
4.0
F3SG-4RE091030
44
910
7
35
135
65
60
4.2
F3SG-4RE099030
48
990
7
35
135
70
60
4.4
F3SG-4RE107030
52
1070
7
35
135
75
60
4.5
F3SG-4RE115030
56
1150
7
35
135
80
65
4.7
F3SG-4RE123030
60
1230
7
35
135
85
65
4.9
F3SG-4RE131030
64
1310
7
35
135
85
65
5.1
F3SG-4RE139030
68
1390
9
45
145
75
65
5.5
F3SG-4RE147030
72
1470
9
45
145
80
65
5.7
F3SG-4RE155030
76
1550
9
45
145
80
70
5.9
F3SG-4RE163030
80
1630
9
45
145
85
70
6.4
F3SG-4RE171030
F3SG-4RE179030
84
88
1710
1790
9
9
45
45
145
145
85
90
70
70
6.6
6.8
F3SG-4RE187030
92
1870
9
45
145
95
75
7.0
F3SG-4RE195030
96
1950
9
45
145
95
75
7.2
F3SG-4RE203030
100
2030
9
45
145
100
75
7.3
F3SG-4RE211030
104
2110
9
45
145
100
75
7.9
F3SG-4RE219030
108
2190
11
55
155
90
75
8.1
F3SG-4RE227030
112
2270
11
55
155
95
80
8.2
F3SG-4RE235030
116
2350
11
55
155
95
80
8.7
F3SG-4RE243030
120
2430
11
55
155
95
80
8.8
124
2510
11
55
155
100
F3SG-4RE251030
*1. Refer to 2-3. Optical Synchronization for more information.
*2. The weight includes an emitter, a receiver and included brackets in a product package.
80
9.0
The maximum speed of movement of a test rod up to which the detection capability is maintained is 2.0 m/s.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
17
Overview and Specifications
1-6-2. Calculation of Response Time of Cascaded Segments
The F3SG-RA can be used in cascade connection.
If the total number of beams of all F3SG-RA in a cascade connection is 140 or less, its response time
is 12 ms (Code A)/13 ms (Code B). The number of beams of respective F3SG-RA, however, must be
1
112 or less. If an F3SG-RA with 113 or more beams is included in the cascade connection, its
List of Models
Chapter
In case of a cascade connection, a response time is determined by the total number of beams.
response time is 17 ms (Code A)/18 ms (Code B).
The F3SG-RE cannot be used in cascade connection.
The diagram below summarizes the relation described above.
3 segments
cascaded
2 segments
cascaded
17ms (CodeA) /
18ms (CodeB)
12ms (CodeA) /
13ms (CodeB)
140 beams*
* The number of beams of each segment in cascaded connection must be 112 or less.
2-4. Scan Code Selection
4-2. Cascade Connection
18
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Total No. of
beams
255 beams
Chapter 2 System Operation and Functions
2
Chapter
21
2-2. Operating States
23
2-2-1. Machine Run State
23
2-2-2. Machine Stop State
23
2-2-3. Interlock State
23
2-2-4. Lockout State
23
2-2-5. Teach-in Mode
23
2-2-6. Setting State
24
2-3. Optical Synchronization
25
2-4. Scan Code Selection
26
2-5. PNP/NPN Selection
27
2-6. Self-Test
28
2-7. External Test
30
2-8. Lockout Reset
32
2-9. Interlock
33
2-10. External Device Monitoring (EDM)
38
2-11. Auxiliary Output
41
2-12. Muting
45
2-13. Override
71
2-14. Fixed Blanking
76
2-15. Floating Blanking
80
2-16. Reduced Resolution
85
2-17. Warning Zone
87
2-18. Setting Zone Adjacency Conditions
91
2-19. Operating Range Selection
93
2-20. Response Time Adjustment
95
2-21. Lamp
96
System Operation and Functions
2-1. Combination of Functions
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
19
System Operation and Functions
2-22. Designated Beam Output
2
Chapter
20
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
99
2-23. Light Level Monitoring
101
2-24. Maintenance Information
102
2-25. Operating Status Monitoring
104
2-26. Setting Recovery
105
System Operation and Functions
2-1. Combination of Functions
Possible combinations of the F3SG-RA functions are shown in the table below. The combinations in the table
are available under certain conditions. The other functions can be combined without any limitations.
The functions listed in the table below are not available for the F3SG-RE.
YES-C: Combination available by setting with Configuration Tool.
NO: Combination unavailable
Fixed Blanking
Floating Blanking
Fixed
Blanking
Floating
Blanking
Reduced
Resolution
Muting/
Override
Pre-Reset
Warning
Zone
EDM
Interlock
-
YES-C *2
NO
YES
NO
YES-C
YES
YES
YES-C
-
NO
NO
YES-C
YES
YES
Reduced Resolution
NO
NO
-
NO
YES-C
NO
YES-C
YES-C
Muting/Override
YES
YES *1
NO
-
NO
YES-C
YES
YES
Pre-Reset
*2
YES
*1
NO
NO
YES-C
NO
-
YES-C
YES
NO
YES-C
YES-C
NO
YES-C
YES-C
-
YES-C
YES-C
EDM
YES
YES
YES-C
YES
YES
YES-C
-
YES
Interlock
YES
YES
YES-C
YES
NO
YES-C
YES
-
Warning Zone
Combination of Functions
YES: Combination available
2
The DIP Switch must be set so as to allow the F3SG-R to be configurable by the Configuration Tool. Refer to
Chapter 3 Setting with DIP Switch for more information.
Chapter
Refer to 2-18. Setting Zone Adjacency Conditions for further information.
*1.This combination requires that the Floating Blanking zone covers the full detection zone and that the
Muting/Override function also covers the full detection zone.
*2.When the Fixed Blanking and Floating Blanking are selected, the top or bottom beam must be included in
the Fixed Blanking zone, as shown in the left figure below. It is not allowed to set the Fixed Blanking zone
not to cover the top or bottom beam, as shown in the right figure below. It is also not allowed to set a Fixed
Blanking zone to split a Floating Blanking zone.
Floating
blanking zone
Fixed blanking
zone
Floating
blanking zone
Fixed blanking
zone
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
21
System Operation and Functions
 Considerations for enabling and disabling Muting function
Setting parameters of the following functions are saved according to the state where the Muting
function is enabled and disabled, respectively. After changing the Muting function from Enable to
Disable or from Disable to Enable, check the settings of these functions again.
Affected functions:
Chapter
• External Device Monitoring (EDM)
• Start Interlock
• Restart Interlock
2
• Auxiliary Output
Combination of Functions
• Lamp Output
22
Refer to the Setting with Configuration Tool sections of the affected functions in Chapter 2 System Operation
and Functions for more information on the setting parameters.
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
System Operation and Functions
2-2. Operating States
The operating condition of a F3SG-R system is described in terms of states. The following operating states
exist for a F3SG-R system.
2-2-1. Machine Run State
protected machine is allowed to operate. Pressing and releasing the reset switch has no effect.
2
Chapter
The two receiver safety outputs are in the ON state, the green ON/OFF indicator is illuminated. The
The two receiver safety outputs are in the OFF state, the red ON/OFF indicator is illuminated. The
protected machine is not allowed to operate.
2-2-3. Interlock State
The two receiver safety outputs are in the OFF state, yellow Interlock indicator is illuminated. The
Operating States
2-2-2. Machine Stop State
Interlock state does not allow the protected machine to operate until the detection zone is clear of
obstructions and the reset switch is pressed and released.
The F3SG-RE does not have the Interlock state.
Refer to 2-9. Interlock for more information.
2-2-4. Lockout State
The two receiver safety outputs are in the OFF state, the red Lockout indicator is blinking, and another
indicator is blinking showing an error. The Lockout state does not allow the protected machine to
operate. The primary difference between Lockout and Interlock states is that the F3SG-R system will
remain in the Lockout state until the cause of the error is corrected, regardless of power cycling or an
external reset switch press and release.
2-2-5. Teach-in Mode
The two receiver safety outputs are in the OFF state, the green Blanking indicator and the green
Configuration indicator are blinking.
The F3SG-RE does not have the Teach-in mode.
Refer to 3-3. Setting by Teach-in for more information.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
23
System Operation and Functions
2-2-6. Setting State
The two receiver safety outputs are in the OFF state, the green Power indicator of the emitter is
blinking. The blue Top-beam-state indicator, green Configuration indicator, red Lockout indicator, green
Stable-state indicator and green ON/OFF indicator of the receiver are blinking. The Setting state does
not allow the protected machine to operate. The user can change settings of the functions, monitor the
operating states or view maintenance information with the Configuration Tool (SD Manager 2) under
The F3SG-RE does not have the Setting state.
2
Chapter
this state.
Operating States
24
Refer to Safety Light Curtain Configuration Tool for Model F3SG (SD Manager 2) User’s Manual for more
information.
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
System Operation and Functions
2-3. Optical Synchronization
F3SG-RA Series
X
F3SG-RE Series
X
Synchronization is required between an emitter and a receiver for normal operation of F3SG-R.
F3SG-R uses a specific beam for Synchronization. The beam is hereinafter called synchronization
2
beam.
Optical Synchronization
Chapter
2-3-1. Overview
Depending on sensor configuration, the synchronization beam is either of the followings:
• One segment system: End beams (Top or Bottom beam)
• Cascaded system* : End beams (Top or Bottom beam) of the primary sensor
* The F3SG-RE cannot be used in cascade connection.
For an emitter and a receiver to synchronize, at least one synchronization beam must be unblocked.
The synchronization process is performed when:
(1) The power is turned on for an emitter and a receiver
(2) All beams of the primary sensor are blocked and then unblocked
(3) Synchronization is lost due to an error such as noise and ambient light
Conditions to establish synchronization
Upper
Lower
Upper
Lower
Upper
Lower
Upper
Lower
Conditions to fail synchronization
Upper
Lower
Upper
Lower
Upper
Lower
Upper
Lower
Upper
Lower
Upper
Lower
The sensor can maintain the synchronization in other cases than those described above and it is not necessary to keep
the synchronization beam unblocked all the time.
 Response time of “OFF (Synchronized) → ON” and “OFF (Not synchronized) → ON”
Response time of “OFF (Synchronized) → ON” is the response time from when the F3SG-R is in the
OFF state and the emitter and receiver are synchronized to when the F3SG-R is turned to the ON
state.
Response time of “OFF (Not synchronized) → ON” is the response time from when the F3SG-R is in
the OFF state and the emitter and receiver are not synchronized to when the F3SG-R is turned to the
ON state. This response time is longer since the F3SG-R evaluates if it is blocked or unblocked, after
the synchronization is established.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
25
System Operation and Functions
2-4. Scan Code Selection
F3SG-RA Series
X
F3SG-RE Series
2
Chapter
2-4-1. Overview
The F3SG-RA has two scan codes (Code A and Code B). These scan codes have different internal
processing time. The use of different scan codes allows for placement of systems in close proximity
Scan Code Selection
and in line with each other and minimize mutual interference.
The Scan Code Selection is not available for the F3SG-RE.
Refer to 4-1-4. Mutual Interference Prevention for how to mitigate mutual interference.
2-4-2. Factory Default Setting
The factory default setting is Code A.
Both the emitter and receiver units must be set to the same code.
2-4-3. Setting with DIP Switch
The user can select the scan code from Code A or Code B by the DIP Switch.
Refer to Chapter 3 Setting with DIP Switch for more information on setting this function by the DIP Switch.
2-4-4. Setting with Configuration Tool
The user cannot make any changes to the scan code by the Configuration Tool.
26
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
System Operation and Functions
2-5. PNP/NPN Selection
F3SG-RA Series
X
F3SG-RE Series
The F3SG-RA offers PNP/NPN selection for the user to select the polarity of the inputs and outputs of
the receiver between PNP and NPN.
2
When the system is set to the NPN type, the “NPN” indicator is illuminated.
PNP/NPN Selection
Chapter
2-5-1. Overview
The PNP/NPN Selection function is not available for the F3SG-RE. Select an F3SG-RE of your preferred I/O type.
2-5-2. Factory Default Setting
The factory default setting is PNP type.
2-5-3. Setting with DIP Switch
The user can select the type from PNP or NPN by the DIP Switch.
Refer to Chapter 3 Setting with DIP Switch for more information on setting this function by the DIP Switch.
2-5-4. Setting with Configuration Tool
The user cannot make any changes to the PNP/NPN selection by the Configuration Tool.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
27
System Operation and Functions
2-6. Self-Test
F3SG-RA Series
X
F3SG-RE Series
X
2
Chapter
2-6-1. Overview
The F3SG-R performs the Self-Test when power is turned ON (within 2 seconds) to check for errors.
Also, it regularly performs the Self-Test (within a response time) while operating.
Self-Test
This function cannot be cancelled.
Power supply
Self test
ON
OFF
ON
2 s max.
OFF
Subsequently performs periodic test
If an error is found in the Self-Test, the F3SG-R enters the Lockout state, keeps the safety output in the
OFF state, and indicates the error at the same time.
2-6-1-1. Self-Test details
The Self-Test detects such error as described below.
Emitter
• Failure of emitter unit or circuit
• CPU failure
• Memory failure
• Failure of DIP Switch*
Receiver
• Abnormal external power supply voltage
• Failure of internal power supply circuit
• Failure of receiver unit or detection circuit
• CPU failure
• Memory failure
• Failure of safety output circuit
• Disconnected or short-circuited cable
• Failure of DIP Switch*
* The Self-Test for the DIP Switch is not available for the F3SG-RE as it does not have the DIP Switch.
28
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
System Operation and Functions
2-6-1-2. Waveform of safety outputs
When the safety outputs are in the ON state, they are cyclically turned OFF as shown below to test the
output circuit. When this OFF signal is fed back, the output circuit is diagnosed as normal. If the output
signal does not include an OFF pulse signal due to short-circuit, etc, the receiver diagnoses a failure in
the output circuit or wiring, and it enters the Lockout state.
 F3SG-RA Series
Chapter
Approx. 90 to 240 ms
*1
2
*1
Self-Test
ON
OSSD 1
OFF
*2
*3
Approx.
45 to 120ms
ON
OSSD 2
OFF
*1. Approx. 15 to 35 ms
Approx. 40 us *4
*2. Signal when in 2-segment or 3-segment cascade.
*3. Signal when in 3-segment cascade.
*4. An OFF pulse signal of safety output may extend to about 100 μs
due to the effect of the connected load (mostly capacitive load ).
 F3SG-RE Series
Approx. 200 ms
ON
OSSD 1
OFF
Approx. 100 ms
ON
OSSD 2
OFF
Approx. 40 us *
*An OFF pulse signal of safety output may extend to about 100 μs due
to the effect of the connected load (mostly capacitive load ).
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
29
System Operation and Functions
2-7. External Test
F3SG-RA Series
X
F3SG-RE Series
2
Chapter
2-7-1. Overview
This function stops the emission using an external signal. It can be used to verify that a safety system
should properly stop (safety output turns OFF) when F3SG-RA is interrupted.
External Test
To stop the emission, apply the following voltage to the emitter's TEST input line according to the DIP
switch settings of the emitter.
When muting, safety output is kept ON even if the emission is stoped.
DIP Switch settings
(Position 4 on Emitter)
24 V Active
0 V Active
Input voltage
9 V to Vs
0 to 3 V
The External Test is not available for the F3SG-RE.
24 V Active
0 V Active
㻱㼙㼕㼠㼠㼑㼞
㻱㼙㼕㼠㼠㼑㼞
<Basic wiring diagram>
24 VDC: Brown
0 VDC: Blue
TEST: Black
F39-JGA-L
24 VDC: Brown
0 VDC: Blue
TEST: Black
F39-JGA-L
S1
+24 VDC
+24 VDC
Power Supply
Power Supply
0 VDC
0 VDC
S1: Test Switch (Connect the line to
0 V if this switch is not required)
30
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
S1
S1: Test Switch (Connect the line to
24 V if this switch is not required)
System Operation and Functions
<Timing chart>
TEST
ON
OFF
Toff x 4 or less
OSSD
ON
Toff x 12 or less
OFF
Chapter
Toff: ON to OFF Response time
2
2-7-2. Factory Default Setting
External Test
The factory default setting is 24 V Active.
2-7-3. Setting with DIP Switch
The user can select the setting from 24 V Active or 0 V Active by the DIP Switch.
Refer to Chapter 3 Setting with DIP Switch for more information on setting this function by the DIP Switch.
2-7-4. Setting with Configuration Tool
The user cannot make any changes to the External Test settings by the Configuration Tool.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
31
System Operation and Functions
2-8. Lockout Reset
F3SG-RA Series
X
F3SG-RE Series
2
Chapter
2-8-1. Overview
When the cause of the lockout is removed, you can release the Lockout state of the F3SG-RA by using
either of the following methods.
Lockout Reset
• Cycle the power back ON
• Reset input
For the F3SG-RE, you can release the Lockout state by cycling the power back ON.
PNP output
NPN output
Receiver
Receiver
<Basic wiring diagram>
S2
+24 VDC
+24 VDC
Power Supply
Power Supply
0 VDC
0 VDC
S2: Lockout/Interlock Reset Switch
S2: Lockout/Interlock Reset Switch
<Timing chart>
RESET
ON
1 s or more
OFF
1 s or more
Lockout reset
The table below shows the relation between the ON/OFF states and external lines.
External Connection
Input
32
F3SG-R
PNP
NPN
ON
Vs-3 V to Vs
0 to 3 V
OFF
0 V to 1/2 Vs, or open
1/2 Vs to Vs, or open
User’s Manual
24 VDC: Brown
0 VDC: Blue
S2
RESET: Yellow
F39-JGA-D
24 VDC: Brown
RESET: Yellow
0 VDC: Blue
F39-JGA-D
System Operation and Functions
2-9. Interlock
Install the reset switch in a location that provides a clear view of the entire hazardous zone and
where it cannot be activated from within the hazardous zone.
Chapter
Interlock
F3SG-RA Series
2
Install the pre-reset switch always in the hazardous zone and where it cannot be activated from
outside the hazardous zone.
X
F3SG-RE Series
2-9-1. Overview
The F3SG-RA turns the safety outputs OFF when its power is turned on or the F3SG-RA is blocked
and holds this state until a reset signal is received. This state is called "interlock state". The function to
keep the Interlock state is called "Interlock function".
The F3SG-RA has two Interlock functions, Start Interlock and Restart Interlock.
The F3SG-RE does not have the Interlock state and is only available with Auto Reset mode.
• Start Interlock
The F3SG-RA turns the safety output OFF at power-on or recovery from power failure and keep this
state until a reset signal is received. This is useful if you want to keep the machine stopped until a
pre-operation check is completed after the power is turned ON.
• Restart Interlock
The F3SG-RA turns the safety output OFF when the F3SG-R is blocked and keep this state until a
reset signal is received. Restart interlock is useful if you want to restart the machine being stopped
upon interruption of the F3SG-R, only after the operator confirms a safe condition.
The F3SG-RA offers three ways to reset the Interlock state: Auto Reset, Manual Reset, and Pre-Reset
applicable to specific applications.
• Auto Reset mode
Auto Reset mode disables the Start Interlock and Restart Interlock. When the interrupting object is
removed from the detection zone, the Interlock state is automatically released and the safety outputs
are automatically turned ON. Auto Reset is desirable for application where a worker is not able to
enter the area between the detection zone and the hazardous part of the machine or you use a relay
unit to activate Start Interlock and Restart Interlock.
• Manual Reset mode
Manual Reset mode enables the Start Interlock and Restart Interlock. When a reset signal is given
while no interrupting object exists in a detection zone, the safety outputs are turned ON.
• Pre-Reset mode
An operator may enter and work in the hazardous zone for maintenance.
Under such a circumstance, another operator may press the resest switch to restart the machine
without recognizing the operator working in the hazardous zone, posing a danger. The Pre-Reset
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
E
33
System Operation and Functions
function ensures safety for an operator working in the hazardous zone by adding another reset switch
(pre-reset switch) in the hazardous zone.
If the Pre-Reset function is enabled, an operator can work in the hazardous zone and press the prereset switch installed in the hazardous zone, pass the light curtain, and press the reset switch to
restart the machine.
Shown below is overview of restarting the machine using the Pre-Reset.
2.Pass and interrupt F3SG-RA
3.Press the Reset switch to restart the system (Input RESET signal)
2
Chapter
1.Press the Pre-Reset switch (Input PRE-RESET signal)
Interlock
Hazardous area
Operator
F3SG-R
2.
Reset Switch
3.
䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷
䚷䚷
1.
Pre-reset Switch
Refer to 2-1. Combination of Functions for more information on the use in conjunction with other functions.
<Basic wiring diagram >
PNP output
NPN output
Receiver
Receiver
• Auto or Manual Reset mode
24 VDC: Brown
0 VDC: Blue
RESET: Yellow
F39-JGA-D
24 VDC: Brown
RESET: Yellow
0 VDC: Blue
F39-JGA-D
S1
+24 VDC
+24 VDC
Power supply
Power supply
0 VDC
S1: Lockout/Interlock Reset Switch
S1
0 VDC
S1: Lockout/Interlock Reset Switch
34
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
System Operation and Functions
PNP output
NPN output
Receiver
Receiver
• Pre-Reset mode
+24 VDC
Power supply
Power supply
0 VDC
0 VDC
S1: Lockout/Interlock Reset Switch
S2: Pre-reset Switch
24 VDC : Brown
PRERESET: Gray
RESET : Yellow
0 VDC : Blue
24 VDC : Brown
PRERESET: Gray
0 VDC : Blue
+24 VDC
Interlock
S2
2
S1
F39-JGA-D
Chapter
RESET : Yellow
F39-JGA-D
S2
S1
S1: Lockout/Interlock Reset Switch
S2: Pre-reset Switch
The table below shows the relation between the ON/OFF states and external lines.
External Connection
Input
PNP
NPN
ON
Vs-3 V to Vs
0 to 3 V
OFF
0V to 1/2 Vs, or open
1/2 Vs to Vs, or open
<Timing chart>
• Start Interlock
Power
Beam state
RESET
OSSD
ON
OFF
Unblocked
Beam state
Blocked
ON
OFF
ON
Power
OFF
Unblocked
RESET
300 ms or more
ON
OSSD
OFF
50 ms or less
Start Interlock: Enabled
Blocked
ON
OFF
Toff x 10 or less
ON
OFF
Start Interlock: Disabled
• Restart Interlock
Power
Beam state
RESET
OSSD
ON
Power
OFF
Unblocked
Beam state
Blocked
ON
OFF
RESET
300 ms or more
ON
50 ms or less
OSSD
OFF
Restart Interlock: Enabled
ON
OFF
Unblocked
Blocked
ON
OFF
ON
Toff x 5 or less
OFF
Restart Interlock: Disabled
Toff: Response time ON to OFF
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
35
System Operation and Functions
• Pre-Reset mode
Pre Reset SW
ON
OFF
Unblocked
Beam state
Blocked
ON
Reset SW
OFF
2
Chapter
ON
OSSD
OFF
Auxiliary Output *
Interlock
INT-LK Indicator
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
T1
T3
T2
T1: Push time: must be T1 >= 300 ms
T2: Pre-reset limit time between Pre-reset and Reset:
must be T2 <= 8 s (Factory default setting)
T1
T3
T2
Flash
once
Flash
twice
Solid
on
T3: Push time: must be T3 >= 300 ms
* When Auxiliary Output is set to Pre-Reset Enabled by the Configuration Tool.
2-9-2. Factory Default Setting
The factory default setting is Auto Reset mode enabled, Start Interlock, Restart Interlock and PreReset mode disabled.
2-9-3. Setting with DIP Switch
The user can select the mode from Auto Reset, Manual Reset or Pre-Reset by the DIP Switch.
When configured to Manual Reset mode, the Start Interlock and Restart Interlock are enabled.
When configured to Pre-Reset mode, the function is activated with the following conditions:
• Maximum number of times the F3SG-RA is blocked after input of PRE-RESET signal: Infinite (The
F3SG-RA must be blocked at least once.)
• Maximum period of time from input of PRE-RESET signal to input of RESET signal: 8 s
Make sure the Position 8 of the DIP Switch is set to DIP Switch Enabled to activate the settings by the DIP Switch.
Refer to Chapter 3 Setting with DIP Switch for more information on setting this function by the DIP Switch.
36
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
System Operation and Functions
2-9-4. Setting with Configuration Tool
Chapter
Some settings of functions configurable with the Configuration Tool may increase risks.
Make sure the Responsible Person conduct a thorough risk assessment analysis before
managing and changing the settings. Unintended changes to the settings may cause a
person to go undetected, resulting in serious injury.
2
The user can make changes to the settings by the Configuration Tool.
Factory Default Setting
Function
Muting function enabled*
Muting function disabled*
Available Parameters
Start Interlock
Disable
Disable
Enable/Disable
Restart Interlock
Disable
Disable
Enable/Disable
Interlock
Interlock function
* Setting parameters of this function are saved according to the states where the Muting function is
enabled and disabled, respectively. After changing the Muting function from Enable to Disable or
from Disable to Enable, also check the settings of this function again.
Refer to  Considerations for enabling and disabling Muting function under 2-1. Combination of Functions
for more information.
Pre-Reset function
Function
Factory Default Setting
Available Parameters
Pre-Reset
Disable
Enable*1*2/Disable
Maximum number of times F3SG-R is blocked *3
infinite
1 to 9 times in 1-time increments, or infinate
Maximum permissible time from input of PRERESET signal to input of RESET signal
8s
1 to 60 s in 1-s increments
*1. When the Pre-Reset is enabled, it precedes all other interlock functions and the parameters of Start
Interlock and Restart Interlock are ignored.
*2. It is not possible to configure the Pre-Reset function together with the Muting function. To enable
settings of the Pre-Reset function, disable the Muting function.
In addition, setting parameters of the following functions are saved according to the states where
the Muting function is enabled and disabled, respectively. After changing the Muting function from
Enable to Disable or from Disable to Enable, also check the settings of these functions again.
Affected functions: External Device Monitoring (EDM), Start Interlock, Restart Interlock, Auxiliary
Output, Lamp Output
*3. The minimum number of times is fixed to 1.
Make sure the Position 8 of the DIP Switch is set to Configuration Tool Enabled to activate the settings by the
Configuration Tool.
Refer to Safety Light Curtain Configuration Tool for Model F3SG (SD Manager 2) User’s Manual for more
information on setting this function by the Configuration Tool.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
37
System Operation and Functions
2-10. External Device Monitoring (EDM)
F3SG-RA Series
X
F3SG-RE Series
2
Chapter
2-10-1. Overview
This function monitors if external relays (or contactors) operate normally to detect malfunctions, such as
welding, in the external relays. When the N.C. contact of the external relays is open before the safety
External Device Monitoring (EDM)
outputs switch from OFF to ON, the safety outputs remain in the OFF state. When the N.C. contact is not
open within the allowable delay time after the safety outputs switch from OFF to ON, the F3SG-RA enters
the Lockout state.
Wiring
Perform wiring so that the specified voltage is applied to the RESET input line via the N.C. contact of
the extenal relays. Refer to the table below for the specified voltage.
The external relays or contactors must have the direct opening mechanism or be force-guided ones.
PNP/NPN
Voltage
PNP
Vs-3 V to Vs
NPN
0 V to 3 V
The External Device Monitoring is not available for the F3SG-RE.
PNP output
NPN output
Receiver
Receiver
<Basic wiring diagram>
+24 VDC
Power supply
S1
KM1
KM2
0 VDC
S1: Lockout/Interlock Reset Switch
KM1, KM2: External device
* Also used as EDM input line
38
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
24 VDC : Brown
0 VDC : Blue
S1
RESET : Yellow *
F39-JGA-D
24 VDC : Brown
RESET: Yellow *
0 VDC : Blue
F39-JGA-D
+24 VDC
Power supply
0 VDC
KM1
KM2
System Operation and Functions
<Timing chart>
Beam state
Unblocked
Blocked
OSSD
OFF
T1 max.
T1
Chapter
EDM input
Lockout
ON
ON
OFF
2
T1: Allowable delay time
The default setting is EDM Disable.
2-10-3. Setting with DIP Switch
The user can select the setting from EDM Enabled or Disabled by the DIP Switch. When it is enabled,
the allowable delay time is set to 0.3 s.
Make sure the Position 8 of the DIP Switch is set to DIP Switch Enabled to activate the setting by the DIP Switch.
External Device Monitoring (EDM)
2-10-2. Factory Default Setting
After making the setting, make sure to perform the wiring so that the specified voltage is supplied into the Reset input of
the receiver without passing through the N.C. contacts of the external relays, and confirm the F3SG-RA enters the
Lockout state.
Refer to Chapter 3 Setting with DIP Switch for more information on setting this function by the DIP Switch.
2-10-4. Setting with Configuration Tool
Some settings of functions configurable with the Configuration Tool may increase risks.
Make sure the Responsible Person conduct a thorough risk assessment analysis before
managing and changing the settings. Unintended changes to the settings may cause a
person to go undetected, resulting in serious injury.
The user can make changes to the settings by the Configuration Tool.
Function
Factory Default Setting
Muting function enabled*
Muting function disabled*
Available Parameters
EDM
Disable
Disable
Enable/Disable
Allowable delay time
0.3 s
0.3 s
0.1 to 4 s in 0.1-s increments
*Setting parameters of this function are saved according to the states where the Muting function is
enabled and disabled, respectively. After changing the Muting function from Enable to Disable or from
Disable to Enable, also check the settings of this function again.
Refer to  Considerations for enabling and disabling Muting function under 2-1. Combination of Functions
for more information.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
39
System Operation and Functions
Make sure the Position 8 of the DIP Switch is set to Configuration Tool Enabled to activate the settings by the
Configuration Tool.
After you make any change to the setting, verify that the F3SG-RA goes to the Lockout state when the F3SG-RA is wired
in such a way that the specified voltage is applied directly to the RESET input of the receiver without the N.C. contact of
an external device.
Chapter
Refer to Safety Light Curtain Configuration Tool for Model F3SG (SD Manager 2) User’s Manual for more
information on setting this function by the Configuration Tool.
2
External Device Monitoring (EDM)
40
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
System Operation and Functions
2-11. Auxiliary Output
Do not use the auxiliary output for safety applications.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury when the F3SG-RA fails.
Chapter
X
2
F3SG-RA Series
2-11-1. Overview
The auxiliary output is used to monitor the status of F3SG-RA. This output can be connected to a
device such as an indication lamp, programmable controller, etc.
Usage Example:
Auxiliary Output
F3SG-RE Series
• Indicate that F3SG-RA is in muting or override state
• Indicate that a machine is stopped (Safety outputs are in the OFF state)
The Auxiliary Output is not available for the F3SG-RE.
<Basic wiring diagram>
Sh
own below are hard wirings for PNP and NPN types, respectively.
+24 VDC: Brown
F3SG-R
+24 VDC: Brown
+24 V
AUX: Red
F3SG-R
Receiver
+24 V
Load
Receiver
Load
PNP
0 VDC: Blue
NPN
0V
AUX: Red
0 VDC: Blue
0V
The load current of the auxiliary output is 100 mA max.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
41
System Operation and Functions
2-11-2. Factory Default Setting
The factory default setting is Muting/Override Information. When F3SG-RA is under a muting or
override state, the F3SG-RA switches ON and OFF at 0.5 s (1 Hz).
Muting state
2
Chapter
Override state
Auxiliary output
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Switching at every 0.5 s
OFF
Auxiliary Output
2-11-3. Setting with DIP Switch
When the Interlock is set to Pre-Reset Enabled by the DIP Switch, the auxiliary output is configured as
a inverted signal of the safety output. Other settings are configured as the same as the factory default
setting.
Beam state
Unblocked
Blocked
Toff
OSSD
Auxiliary output
Ton
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Ton: Response time OFF to ON
Toff: Response time ON to OFF
42
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
System Operation and Functions
2-11-4. Setting with Configuration Tool
Chapter
Some settings of functions configurable with the Configuration Tool may increase risks.
Make sure the Responsible Person conduct a thorough risk assessment analysis before
managing and changing the settings. Unintended changes to the settings may cause a
person to go undetected, resulting in serious injury.
2
The user can make changes to the settings by the Configuration Tool.
Auxiliary Output
• Output operation mode
Information to be allocated to the auxiliary output
• Inverted signal output mode
Auxiliary output gives a inverted signal of the safety output.
• Output pattern
Pattern to send an output signal from the auxiliary output
The user can make changes to the settings by the Configuration Tool.
Function
Factory Default Setting
Muting function enabled*1
Available Parameters
Muting function disabled*1
Output operation mode
Muting/Override information
Safety output information
*2
Inverted signal output
Disable
Enable
Enable/Disable
Output pattern
ON 1 time *3
Solid-ON
Solid-ON/ON 1 time *3
*1. Setting parameters of this function are saved according to the states where the Muting function is
enabled and disabled, respectively. After changing the Muting function from Enable to Disable or
from Disable to Enable, also check the settings of this function again.
Refer to  Considerations for enabling and disabling Muting function under 2-1. Combination of
Functions for more information.
Refer to 2-12. Muting for more information on settings of the Muting function.
*2. Refer to the table of Information (Output operation mode) assigned to auxiliary output below.
*3. Output signal is sent according to the patterns as shown in the output pattern chart below.
 Output pattern chart
1s
ON 1 time
Solid-ON
Information (Output operation mode) assigned to auxiliary output
Information Name
Description
(Auxiliary output is turned ON under the following condition)
Safety output information
When Safety output is in the ON state.
Reset-input information
When Reset/EDM/Override input is in the ON state
Interlock information
Under Interlock state
Pre-reset Information
Under Pre-reset state
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
43
System Operation and Functions
Information Name
Description
(Auxiliary output is turned ON under the following condition)
2
Chapter
Lockout information
Under error/ Lockout state
Excess power-on time
information
When power-on time exceeds power-on time threshold
Excess load switching
frequency information
When load switching frequency exceeds load switching frequency threshold
Light level diagnosis
information
When the F3SG-R is unblocked and light intensity is within a range from 100% to 170% of ONthreshold for 10 s or longer
Blanking/Warning-zone
information
When Fixed Blanking, Floating Blanking, Reduced Resolution or Warning Zone function is
enabled
Auxiliary Output
Muting information
Under Muting state
Override information
Under Override state
Muting/Override information
Under either Muting or Override state
Sequence error information
Under Muting sequence error state or Interlock sequence error state
Warning Zone Information
When warning zone is interrupted
Blanking bream unblocked
information
When Fixed-Blanking or Floating Blanking beams are unblocked
Designated beam output
information
When a designated beam is blocked or unblocked
Interference/vibration
information
When the F3SG-R system stops accidentally due to interference or vibration. (In case of
cascade connection, when any of cascaded segments comes under this condition.)
Troubleshooting support
signal
When one of the signals of Sequence error information, Interference/vibration information and
Light level diagnosis information is in the ON state.
Individual cascaded sensor
output (Channel 1)
When Safety output of Primary sensor in cascade connection is the ON state
Individual Cascaded Sensor
Output (Channel 2)
When Safety output of 1st Secondary sensor in cascade connection is the ON state
Individual Cascaded Sensor
Output (Channel 3)
When Safety output of the 2nd Secondary sensor in cascade connection is the ON state
Make sure the Position 8 of the DIP Switch is set to Configuration Tool Enabled to activate the settings by the
Configuration Tool.
Refer to Safety Light Curtain Configuration Tool for Model F3SG (SD Manager 2) User’s Manual for more
information on setting this function by the Configuration Tool.
44
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
System Operation and Functions
2-12. Muting
F3SG-RA Series
X
F3SG-RE Series
are interrupted. This makes it possible to install safety light curtains for AGV passage, enabling both safety
and productivity. When muting, the top-beam-state indicator (TOP), bottom-beam-state indicator (BTM) and
2
external indicator (if wired) connected to the auxiliary output blink to notify people in the surrounding zone that
Muting
Chapter
Muting function temporarily disables safety function of the F3SG-RA, keeping safety output ON even if beams
the safety functions are disabled.
The following three operation modes are available for the muting function.
1.Standard Muting Mode (factory default setting)
2.Exit-Only Muting Mode
3.Position Detection Muting Mode
Refer to 2-1. Combination of Functions for more information on the use in conjunction with other functions.
The Muting is not available for the F3SG-RE.
The following settings are available for a beam range to be the muting state.
• All Range Disabled Setting
• Partially Disabled Setting
• Dynamic Muting Setting
The muting and override functions disable the safety functions of the device. You must ensure
safety using other method when these functions are operating.
Install muting sensors so that they can distinguish between the object that is being allowed to be
passed through the detection zone and a person.
If the muting function is activated by the detection of a person, it may result in serious injury.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
45
System Operation and Functions
All muting lamps that indicate state of muting function must be installed where workers can see
them from all the operating positions.
Use 2 independent input devices for muting input. A muting state may occur due to a single
failure of the muting sensor.
2
Chapter
You must install F3SG-RA, muting sensor, and physical barrier, and configure time settings for
muting so that an operator should not enter hazardous zone.
Muting
The Dynamic Muting function can configure a new muting zone after muting is enabled based on
a result of workpiece height measurement for a certain period of time. The function must be used
after careful verification by a qualified person with sufficient training. Apply additional safety
measures if required.
 Using muting function
<Muting sensor>
The muting sensor is the sensor to trigger a signal to temporarily disable the safety functions of the
F3SG-R. You can use a photoelectric switch of through-beam type or reflective type proximity switch,
or limit switch. (Recommended: OMRON E3Z series, E2E series (3-wire type), D4N series)
Use a 3-wire type transistor output, which is the same as the output type of the F3SG-RA, or N.O. type
contact. Two-wire type sensor must not be used.
When the F3SG-RA is in PNP settings, use the muting sensor of the PNP transistor type.
When the F3SG-RA is in NPN settings, use the muting sensor of the NPN transistor type.
<Muting lamp>
You may need a muting lamp depending on your application or as a result of a risk assessment
analysis. Before determining the use of the muting lamp, check laws and regulations of the country or
region where the F3SG-RA is used and make sure of full compliance with them. For the muting lamp,
use a Lamp (F39-LP and F39-BTLP, sold separately) or a commercially available external indicator.
The external indicator can be connected to the auxiliary output.
For settings of the auxiliary output, see 2-11. Auxiliary Output.
For settings of the optional Lamp (F39-LP and F39-BTLP, sold separately), see 2-21. Lamp
<LED indicator statuses of F3SG-RA: Receiver>
Top-beam-state indicator
Blinks during muting/override.
Bottom-beam-state indicator
Sequence error indicator
Blinks during a muting sequence error.
Configuration indicator
If the Dynamic Muting function is enabled, the indicator flashes while measuring
the workpiece height.
If the Dynamic Muting function is enabled, the indicator turns on after the new
muting zone is reflected.
For muting error indication, see 7-1-2-3. Muting Sequence Error Indication.
For dynamic muting, see 2-12-4. Dynamic Muting.
For the use in conjunction with other functions, see 2-1. Combination of Functions.
46
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
System Operation and Functions
<Muting range>
You can specify a detection zone to be muted within the detection zone of the F3SG-RA.
Muting Range
Description
A specified area in the detection zone configured by the Configuration Tool is muted.
This can be used if you want to disable only a specific area of the detection zone.
Specifying the full zone results in the Full Zone Setting State.
Dynamic Muting
This can be used by enabling the Dynamic Muting function.
The full detection zone is disabled for a certain time period from the start of the muting, then a partial
zone is muted depending on the detected workpiece size.
2-12-4. Dynamic Muting
Muting
Partial Zone Muted
State
2
Full area of the detection zone is muted.
This disables the full detection zone and is used typically.
Chapter
Full Zone Muted State
(factory default
setting)
2-12-1. Standard Muting Mode
The factory default setting is set to this mode.
Turning muting inputs A and B ON with time difference enables muting state.
 Start Conditions
If both of the following two conditions are satisfied, the muting state is enalbed.
1. No interrupting object is found in the F3SG-RA's detection zone, and safety outputs are ON.
2. After muting input A is turned ON*, muting input B is turned ON* within the range between the
muting input time limit values T1min (0.1 s) and T1max (4 s).
*PNP setting: Vs-3V to Vs, NPN setting: 0 to 3V
Muting state can be enabled in up to 80ms after the condition No.2 is satisfied.
When the condition No.1 is satisfied but the time requirement of the condition No.2 is not, a muting
sequence error occurs and the Sequence error indicator on the receiver blinks. However, when there is
a muting sequence error, the F3SG-RA does not enter the Muting state but it continues the normal
operation with the safety function enabled.
For muting error indication, see 7-1-2-3. Muting Sequence Error Indication.
Muting error can be released by any of following conditions:
1. Correct muting initial condition continues for 0.1 s or longer. *
2. Power cycle when muting inputs A and B are in the OFF state.
* The correct initial muting condition is the state where the following two conditions are satisfied.
• Safety outputs of the F3SG-RA are turned ON.
• Muting input A and B are turned OFF.
 End conditions
If either of the following conditions is satisfied, the muting state is released.
• Muting input A or B turns OFF for the maximum allowable muting signal interruption of T3 (at least
0.1 s: configurable) or longer.
• The duration of the muting state exceeds the muting time limit of T2 (at least 60 s: configurable).
Muting state is also released when the F3SG-RA enters the Lockout state.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
47
System Operation and Functions
 Timing chart
Muting input A
Muting input B
T3 max.
ON
OFF
T1min to T1max
ON
Chapter
OFF
T2 max.
80 ms max.
Muting state
2
Muting
Auxiliary output
Beam state
OSSD
T3 max.
Enabled
Disabled
Blinking at 0.5 s (1 Hz)
Blinking
OFF
Unblocked
Blocked
ON
OFF
 Default settings
Variable
48
Variable name
Value
Description
T1min
Muting input time limit value
(minimum)
0.1 s
Minimum time difference between muting inputs A and B.
If the time difference between muting inputs A and B is smaller
than this value, a muting sequence error occurs.
T1max
Muting input time limit value
(maximum)
4s
Maximum time difference between muting inputs A and B.
If the time difference between muting inputs A and B is larger
than this value, a muting sequence error occurs.
T2
Muting time limit
60 s
The duration time of the Muting function. The Muting state is
cancelled if it continues for longer than this time limit.
T3
Maximum allowable muting
signal interruption
0.1 s
Maximum duration of a signal interruption allowed in muting
inputs A and B.
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
System Operation and Functions
PNP output
NPN output
Receiver
Receiver
 Wiring diagram
24 VDC : Brown
MUTE B : Pink
+24 VDC
Power supply
Power supply
0 VDC
0 VDC
S1, S2: Muting sensor
MUTE A : Gray
0 VDC : Blue
24 VDC : Brown
MUTE A : Gray
0 VDC : Blue
MUTE B : Pink
S2
Muting
S1
2
+24 VDC
F39-JGA-D
Chapter
F39-JGA-D
S1
S2
S1, S2: Muting sensor
 Installation standard for muting sensors
• Set the muting sensors so that they can detect all of the passing detection (palettes, automobiles,
etc.). Do not install the muting sensor in a position so that only the front or rear end of the objects is
detected.
• Set the muting sensors so that they detect the objects even when they are loaded on palettes or
other transport devices.
• Also, install the F3SG-R and muting sensors so that each object passes through all muting sensors
before the next object arrives at the first muting sensor. Also, install all F3SG-Rs and muting sensors
so that no person is able to accidentally enter the hazardous zone while the muting function is
enabled.
• If objects' speeds can vary, the allocation of muting sensors must be taken into consideration.
• Install muting sensors so that they can distinguish between the object that is being allowed to be
passed through the detection zone and a person.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
49
System Operation and Functions
 Installation example 1 of standard muting mode (Using two muting sensors)
This is an example of two retro-reflective type photoelectric sensors used as muting sensors installed
in a cross pattern.
Use two sensors when the length L of the workpieces are not constant or are insufficient.
1. Before a workpiece passes through
Chapter
Hazardous zone
2
Muting
B1
Workpiece
L
F3SG-RA
Reflector
The crossover point of muting sensors
A1 and B1 must be located within the
hazardous zone
V
A1
F3SG-RA
Reflector
d1=D1
L: Length of workpiece
d1: Maximum distance required for the muting sensor to keep the muting function enabled
D1: Minimum distance required for the muting sensor to keep the muting function enabled
The output state of muting sensors A1 and B1 are both OFF, and the safety function of the F3SG-RA is
working.
In this example where two muting sensors are used, the crossover point of muting sensors A1 and B1
is in the hazardous zone. This configuration prevents the muting function from being enabled by a
person passing through the crossover point.
2. Muting state started
Hazardous zone
B1
F3SG-RA
Reflector
Workpiece
A1
Reflector
When muting sensors A1 and B1 are turned ON in this order, the F3SG-R enters the muting state. In
this state, the safety function of F3SG-RA is disabled.
50
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
System Operation and Functions
3. Muting state is maintained
Hazardous zone
B1
F3SG-RA
Reflector
2
Chapter
A1
Muting
Workpiece
Reflector
The F3SG-RA is blocked but the safety function is disabled due to the muting state, and safety outputs
1 and 2 are turned ON.
4. The muting state is released
Hazardous zone
B1
F3SG-RA
Reflector
Workpiece
A1
Reflector
Muting sensor A1 is turned OFF, the muting state is released, and the safety function of the F3SG-RA
is enabled.
<Installation distance>
The minimum distance, D1 [m], required for muting sensors to keep the muting state enabled is :
D1 < L . . . . . Formula (1)
L [m]: Length of a workpiece
The maximum distance, d1 [m], required for muting sensors to keep the muting state enabled is :
V x T1min < d1 < V x T1max . . . . . Formula (2)
V [m/s]: Approach speed of a workpiece
T1min [s]: Muting input time limit value (minimum). It is set as 0.1 s.
T1max [s]: Muting input time limit value (maximum). It is set as 4 s.
To enable the muting state, D1 and d1 must satisfy formulas (1) and (2), respectively.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
51
System Operation and Functions
This distance must prevent the muting state from being enabled by a person passing through the
muting sensors.
Also, install the F3SG-R and muting sensors so that each workpiece passes through all muting
sensors before the next workpiece arrives at the first muting sensor (PNP mode).
<Wiring diagram (PNP setting)>
Reflector
A1
Muting Input B: Pink
B1
Using an N.O contact type switch as a muting sensor
Muting Input A: Gray
Muting
Muting Input B: Pink
Muting Input A: Gray
2
Chapter
Using a photoelectric switch as a muting sensor
B1
A1, B1: Retro-reflective
photoelectric switch
- PNP Output
- ON when Interrupted
A1, B1: N.O. contact type switch
+24 VDC
0V
A1
F3SG-RA
Reflector
Note. Two-wire type muting sensor cannot be used.
<Timing chart>
Muting sensor A1
Muting sensor B1
Muting state
Auxiliary output
Beam state
OSSD
52
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
T3 max.
ON
OFF
T1min to T1max
ON
OFF
Enabled
80 ms max.
T3 max.
T2 max.
Disabled
Blinking
OFF
Unblocked
Blocked
ON
OFF
Blinking at 0.5 s (1 Hz)
Power
supply
System Operation and Functions
 Installation example 2 of standard muting mode (Using four muting sensors)
This installation example uses four through-beam type photoelectric sensors as muting sensors.
The use of four muting sensors is useful when the length of the workpieces is constant or longer, and
the entrance and exit have enough space. Muting can be performed from both directions in the
arrangement as shown below.
Chapter
1. Before a workpiece passes through
Workpiece
L
Muting
A1
2
Hazardous zone
F3SG-RA A2
V
V
B1
Workpiece
B2
d2
d2
D3
d2: Maximum distances required for the muting sensor to keep the muting function enabled
D3: Minimum distance required for the muting sensor to keep the muting function enabled
All muting sensors are turned OFF and the safety function of the F3SG-RA is working.
2. The muting sensor is blocked and the safety function of the F3SG-RA is disabled
Hazardous zone
A1
F3SG-RA A2
Workpiece
B1
B2
When muting sensors A1 and B1 are turned ON in this order, the muting state is enabled. In this state,
the safety function of F3SG-RA is disabled.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
53
System Operation and Functions
3. The muting sensor is blocked and the safety function of the F3SG-RA is disabled
Hazardous zone
A1
F3SG-RA A2
Chapter
Workpiece
2
Muting
B1
B2
Muting sensors A1 and B1 are turned OFF but A2 and B2 are ON, so the muting state is still
maintained. Safety outputs 1 and 2 are turned ON.
4. The muting state is released
Hazardous zone
A1
F3SG-RA A2
Workpiece
B1
B2
Muting sensor B2 is turned OFF, the muting state is released, and the safety function of the F3SG-RA
is enabled.
<Installation distance>
The minimum distance, D3 [m], required for muting sensors to keep the muting state enabled is :
D3 < L . . . . . Formula (3)
L [m]: Length of a workpiece
The maximum distance, d2 [m], required for muting sensors to keep the muting state enabled is :
V x T1min < d2 < V x T1max . . . . . Formula (4)
V [m/s]
: Approach speed of a workpiece
T1min [s] : Muting input time limit value (minimum). It is set as 0.1 s. (configurable)
T1max [s] : Muting input time limit value (maximum). It is set as 4 s. (configurable)
54
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
System Operation and Functions
To enable the muting state, D3 and d2 must satisfy formulas (3) and (4), respectively.
This distance must prevent the muting state from being enabled by a person passing through the
muting sensors. Also, install the F3SG-RA and muting sensors so that each workpiece passes through
all muting sensors before the next workpiece arrives at the first muting sensor.
Workpiece
Workpiece
2
Chapter
Workpiece
Workpiece
Muting
Moving direction
Moving direction
<Wiring diagram (PNP setting)>
Using an N.O. contact type switch as a muting sensor (PNP mode)
B1
B2
A1
A1, B1, A2, B2 :
Through-beam type
photoelectric switch
- PNP Output
- ON when Interrupted
A1
F3SG-R
Muting input B: Pink
Muting input A: Gray
Muting input B: Pink
Muting input A: Gray
Using a photoelectric switch as a muting sensor
A2
B1
B2
A1, A2, B1, B2:
N.O. contact type switch
+24 VDC
0V
Power
supply
A2
Note. Two-wire type muting sensor cannot be used.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
55
System Operation and Functions
<Timing chart>
T3 (0.1 s) max.
ON
Muting sensor A1
OFF
T1min to T1max
T3 (0.1 s) max.
ON
Muting sensor B1
OFF
Chapter
T3 (0.1 s) max.
ON
Muting sensor B2
OFF
2
Muting
Muting sensor A2
OFF
Enabled
Muting state
T2 max.
80 ms max.
Disabled
Blinking at 0.5 s (1 Hz)
Blinking
Auxiliary output
Beam state
T3 (0.1 s) max.
ON
OFF
Unblocked
OSSD
Blocked
ON
OFF
<Reference: Preventing light interference of muting sensor>
When a photoelectric sensor is used as a muting sensor, light interference may cause a muting error of
F3SG-RA.
The cause and measures for light interference are shown as follows:
Reflected light
Direct light
Light from other F3SG-RA
A1 B1 F3SG-RA B2 A2
A1 B1 F3SG-RA B2 A2
A1 B1 F3SG-RA B2 A2
(1)
(1)
Workpiece
(1)
Workpiece
L
Workpiece
(1)
(3)
(2)
D
(1) Interference between muting sensors
• Use sensors with mutual interference prevention (such as retro-reflective E3Z-R series)
• Use laser-type sensors (such as laser-type E3Z-LR series)
• Take distance from a sensor causing the interference
• Displace beams for each other to prevent interference (change installation height or place them
crosswise)
• Install a physical barrier
• Attach interference prevention filter (provided for E3Z series as accessories)
• Attach a slit to reduce light intensity (provided for E3Z series as accessories)
• Lower the sensitivity
• Reduce a distance between a workpiece and a muting sensor to prevent reflected light from a workpiece
56
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
System Operation and Functions
(2) Interference to a muting sensor from F3SG-RA
• Take distance (D) from a sensor causing the interference
• Displace beams for each other to prevent interference (change installation height or place them
crosswise)
• Install a physical barrier
• Arrange sensors in alternation
Chapter
• Lower the sensitivity
(3) Interference to F3SG-RA from a muting sensor
• Use a red LED type sensor (such as retro-reflective E3Z-R series)
• Use laser-type sensors (such as laser-type E3Z-LR series)
2
• Take distance (D) from a sensor causing the interference
Muting
• Displace beams for each other to prevent interference (change installation height or place them
crosswise)
• Install a physical barrier
• Arrange sensors in alternation
• Attach a slit to reduce light intensity (provided for E3Z series as accessories)
Mutual interference between a muting sensor and F3SG-RA in (2) and (3) above can be prevented by
configuring D satisfying a formula shown below:
•If L = 0.3 to 3 m, D = 0.26 m or larger
•If L = 3 m or larger, D = L x tan5° = L x 0.088 m or larger
L : Distance between an emitter and a receiver of the F3SG-RA
D : Distance between a muting sensor and a F3SG-RA
2-12-2. Exit-Only Muting Mode
Turning muting inputs A and B ON with time difference enables muting state.
Difference from standard mode exists in muting completion condition.
 Start conditions
If both of the following 2 conditions are satisfied, the muting state is enalbed.
1. No interrupting object is found in the F3SG-RA's detection zone, and the safety outputs are ON.
2. After muting input A is turned ON*, muting input B is turned ON* within the range between the
muting input time limit values T1min (0.1 s) and T1max (4 s).
*PNP setting: Vs-3V to Vs, NPN setting: 0 to 3V
Muting state can be enabled in up to 80 ms after the condition No.2 is satisfied.
If the condition No.1 is satisfied but the time requirement of the condition No.2 is not, a muting error
occurs, and the Sequence error indicator on the receiver turns ON. However, when there is a muting
error, the F3SG-RA continues the normal operation with the safety function enabled.
For muting error indication, see 7-1-2-3. Muting Sequence Error Indication.
Muting error can be released by any of following conditions:
1. Correct muting initial condition continues for 0.1 s or longer. *
2. Power cycle when the muting inputs A and B are in the OFF state.
* The correct initial muting condition is the state where the following two conditions are satisfied.
• Safety outputs of the F3SG-RA are turned ON.
E
• Muting input A and B are turned OFF.
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
57
System Operation and Functions
 End conditions
If any of the following condition is satisfied, the muting state is released.
• When a workpiece passes a muting sensor A or B and the exit-only muting delay time (4 s) passes.
• When a workpiece passes F3SG-R's detection zone and the muting end wait time (1 s:
configurable) passes.
• The duration of the muting state exceeds the muting time limit (60 s: configurable).
2
Chapter
 Timing chart
T3 (0.1 s) max.
Muting
ON
Muting input A
(Muting sensor A1)
OFF
Muting input B
(Muting sensor B1)
ON
OFF
T1min to T1max
T3 (0.1 s) max.
T2 max.
T3 (0.1s) max.
Muting state
Auxiliary output
Beam state
OSSD
Enabled
80 ms max.
T5 max.
T4 (1 s)
Disabled
Blinking at 0.5 s (1 Hz)
Blinking
OFF
Unblocked
Blocked
ON
OFF
* This timing chart shows the case in which the muting state was released under the condition of T4 (1 s).
 Factory default setting
Variable
58
Variable name
Value
Description
T1min
Muting input time limit value
(minimum)
0.1 s
Minimum time difference between muting inputs A and B.
If the time difference between muting inputs A and B is smaller
than this value, a muting sequence error occurs.
T1max
Muting input time limit value
(maximum)
4s
Maximum time difference between muting inputs A and B.
If the time difference between muting inputs A and B is larger
than this value, a muting sequence error occurs.
T2
Muting time limit
60 s
The duration time of the Muting function. The Muting state is
cancelled if it continues for longer than this time limit.
T3
Maximum allowable muting
signal interruption
0.1 s
Maximum duration of a signal interruption allowed in muting
inputs A and B.
T4
Muting end wait time
1s
Time difference from when the F3SG-RA is unblocked until the
Muting state is cancelled.
T5
Exit-only muting delay time
4s
Time difference from when the signal of Muting input A or B is
turned OFF until the Muting state is cancelled.
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
System Operation and Functions
PNP output
NPN output
Receiver
Receiver
 Wiring diagram
24 VDC : Brown
MUTE B : Pink
MUTE A : Gray
0 VDC : Blue
24 VDC : Brown
MUTE B : Pink
0 VDC : Blue
Muting
S2
2
S1
+24 VDC
F39-JGA-D
Chapter
MUTE A : Gray
F39-JGA-D
+24 VDC
Power supply
Power supply
0 VDC
0 VDC
S1
S2
S1, S2: Muting sensor
S1, S2: Muting sensor
 Installation Example of Exit-Only Muting Mode
This is an installation example of exit-only muting mode. When exit-only muting mode is set, install the
muting sensor on the hazardous side of the workpiece exit.
This can be used if a workpiece has a certain length and the hazardous side of the workpiece exit has
enough space around it.
1. Before a workpiece passes through
Hazardous zone
A1 B1 F3SG-RA
Workpiece
A1 : Muting sensor to be connected
to muting input A
V
B1 : Muting sensor to be connected
to muting input B
d1
d2
All muting sensors are turned OFF and the safety function of the F3SG-RA is working.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
59
System Operation and Functions
2. The muting sensor is blocked and the safety function of the F3SG-RA is disabled
Hazardous zone
A1 B1 F3SG-RA
2
Chapter
Workpiece
A1 : Muting sensor to be connected
to muting input A
V
B1 : Muting sensor to be connected
to muting input B
Muting
d1
d2
When muting sensors A1 and B1 are turned ON in this order, and the muting state is enabled. In this
state, the safety function of F3SG-RA is disabled.
3. Muting sensor A1 is turned OFF
Hazardous zone
A1 B1 F3SG-RA
A1 : Muting sensor to be connected
to muting input A
Workpiece
V
B1 : Muting sensor to be connected
to muting input B
d1
d2
The workpiece has completely passed the muting sensor A1 and the sensor starts turning OFF. For
standard muting system, muting is released here. For exit-only muting, F3SG-RA's safety function is
disabled for the exit-only muting delay time: T5.
4. Muting sensor B1 is turned OFF
Hazardous zone
A1 B1 F3SG-RA
A1 : Muting sensor to be connected
to muting input A
Workpiece
B1 : Muting sensor to be connected
to muting input B
V
d1
d2
The workpiece has completely passed the muting sensor B1 and the sensor is turned OFF. F3SG-RA
disables its safety function if it is within the exit-only muting delay time.
60
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
System Operation and Functions
5. The workpiece passed F3SG-RA’s detection zone
Hazardous zone
A1 B1 F3SG-RA
A1 : Muting sensor to be connected
to muting input A
V
2
Chapter
Workpiece
B1 : Muting sensor to be connected
to muting input B
A workpiece has passed F3SG-RA’s detection zone. When the muting end wait time: T4 (1 s:
Muting
d1
d2
configurable) passes after the F3SG-RA is unblocked, the muting state is released.
 Installation Distance
Distances between muting sensors A1, B1, and F3SG-RA must be configured based on speed of a
workpiece.
Distance d1 between muting sensors A1 and B1 must satisfy Equations (1) and (2).
Distance d2 between muting sensor A1 and F3SG-RA must satisfy Equations (3) and (4).
Time t1 [ s ] to turn muting sensors A1 and B1 in this order is:
t1 = d1 / V . . . . . . . . . . . Equation (1)
d1 [ m ] : Distance between muting sensors A1 and B1
V [ m/s ] : Approach speed of a workpiece
Time t1 in Equation (1) for F3SG-RA to enter muting state is within a range shown below:
T1min < t1 < T1max. . . . Equation (2)
T1min [ s ] : Muting input time limit value (minimum)
T1max [ s ] : Muting input time limit value (maximum)
The values of T1min and T1max can be changed by the Configuration Tool.
Time t2 [ s ] for a workpiece to pass F3SG-RA’s detection zone after passing the muting sensor A1 is:
t2 = d2 / V . . . . . . . . . . . . Equation (3)
d2 [ m ] : Distance between muting sensor A1 and F3SG-RA
V [ m/s ] : Approach speed of a workpiece
Time t2 in Equation (3) must satisfy following condition:
t2 < T5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equation (4)
T5: Exit-only muting delay time
The value of T5 can be changed by the Configuration Tool.
Sensors must be installed so that person’s passing should not cause muting state.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
61
System Operation and Functions
Also, muting sensors and F3SG-RA must be installed so that muting state caused by a workpiece
should be ended before the next workpiece arrives at the first muting sensor.
Hazardous zone
Hazardous zone
A1 B1 F3SG-RA
Chapter
Workpiece
A1 B1 F3SG-RA
Workpiece
Workpiece
Workpiece
2
Muting
d1
d2
d1
d2
Moving direction
Moving direction
 Timing Chart
62
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Muting input A
(Muting sensor A1)
ON
OFF
Muting input B
(Muting sensor B1)
ON
OFF
Muting state
Enabled
Disabled
Auxiliary output
Blinking
OFF
Beam state
Unblocked
Blocked
OSSD
ON
OFF
T3 (0.1 s) max.
T1min to T1max
T3(1 s) max.
T2 max.
T1max
80 ms max.
T5 max.
T4 (1 s)
Blinking at 0.5 s (1 Hz)
System Operation and Functions
2-12-3. Position Detection Muting Mode
Muting state is enabled when muting input A turns ON from the OFF state and muting input B turns
OFF from the ON state within the muting input time limit value T1max, measured by a limit switch, etc.
Muting inputs must be heterogeneous redundant inputs such as the combination of N.O. contact and
N.C. contact types. (When using photoelectric sensors of PNP output, use one for Light-ON operation
temporarily disabled while a worker puts objects at a loading station.
2
 Start conditions
Chapter
while the other for Dark-ON.) This mode can be used for such a case that the F3SG-RA should be
1. No interrupting object is found in the F3SG-RA's detection zone, and the safety outputs are ON.
2. The duration between when the muting input A is turned ON* from the OFF state and when the
Muting
If both of the following 2 conditions are satisfied, the muting state is enalbed.
muting input B is turned OFF from the ON state* is within the range between the muting input time
limit values T1min (0.1 s) and T1max (4 s). Order of muting inputs A and B is irrelevant.
*PNP setting: Vs-3V to Vs, NPN setting: 0 to 3V
Muting state can be enabled in up to 80 ms after the condition No. 2 is satisfied.
If the condition No. 1 is satisfied but the time requirement of the condition No.2 is not, a muting error
occurs, and the Sequence error indicator on the receiver turns ON. However, when there is a muting
error, the F3SG-RA continues the normal operation with the safety function enabled.
For muting error indication, see 7-1-2-3. Muting Sequence Error Indication.
Muting error can be released by any of following conditions:
1. Correct muting initial condition continues for 0.1 s or longer. *1
2. Power cycle when the muting inputs A and B are in the OFF state.
*1 The correct initial muting condition is the state where the following two conditions are satisfied.
• Safety outputs of the F3SG-RA are turned ON.
• Muting input A is turned OFF and Muting input B is turned ON.
 End conditions
If any of the following conditions is satisfied, the muting state is released.
• Muting input A is in the OFF state for T3 or longer (0.1 s or longer).
• Muting input B is in the ON state for T3 or longer (0.1 s or longer).
• The duration of the muting state exceeds the muting time limit of T2 (60 s).
Muting state is also released when the F3SG-RA enters the Lockout state.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
63
System Operation and Functions
 Timing chart
Muting input A
(Limit switch1)
ON
OFF
Muting state
Enabled
Disabled
2
Chapter
Muting input B
(Limit switch2)
Muting
Auxiliary output
Blinking
OFF
Beam state
Unblocked
Blocked
OSSD
ON
OFF
Variable
64
T3 (0.1 s) max.
ON
OFF
T1max
80 ms max.
Variable name
T3 (0.1 s) max.
T2 max.
T2 max.
Blinking at 0.5 s (1 Hz)
Value
Description
T1max
Muting input time limit value
(maximum)
3s
Maximum time difference between muting inputs A and B.
If the time difference between muting inputs A and B is larger
than this value, a muting error occurs.
T2
Muting time limit
60 s
The duration time of the Muting function. The Muting state is
cancelled if it continues for longer than this time limit.
T3
Maximum allowable muting
signal interruption
0.1 s
Maximum duration of a signal interruption allowed in muting
inputs A and B.
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
System Operation and Functions
PNP output
NPN output
Receiver
Receiver
 Wiring diagram
24 VDC : Brown
MUTE B : Pink
MUTE A : Gray
0 VDC : Blue
24 VDC : Brown
MUTE B : Pink
0 VDC : Blue
Muting
㻿㻞
2
S1
+24 VDC
F39-JGA-D
Chapter
MUTE A : Gray
F39-JGA-D
+24 VDC
Power supply
Power supply
0 VDC
0 VDC
S1
㻿㻞
S1, S2: Muting sensor
S1, S2: Muting sensor
 Installation Example of Position Detection Muting Mode
Shown below is an installation example of position detection muting mode.
This is an application that places a workpiece on a machine’s turntable surrounded by guard fence.
When hazardous part of the machine is on the opposite side of a human body, safety function of
F3SG-RA can be disabled so that an operator should be able to place a workpiece on the turntable.
1. Hazardous part of the machine is on the same side of a human body
F3SG-RA
Guard fence
Worktable
Limit switch 2
(N.C. Contact)
24 V or 0 V
Robot arm
table
Under normal operation
Limit switch1
(N.O. Contact)
OFF: To muting input A
ON: To muting input B
The safety functions of the F3SG-RA is activated with the limit switch 1 being in the OFF state and the
limit switch 2 in the ON state.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
65
System Operation and Functions
2, Hazardous part of the machine is on the opposite side of a human body
Guard fence
F3SG-RA
Under normal operation
Chapter
Limit switch1
(N.O. Contact)
2
Limit switch 2
(N.C. Contact)
Muting
OFF -> ON: To muting input A
24 V
ON: To muting input B
Rotation of a robot arm sets the muting input A from OFF to ON. Safety function of F3SG-RA is
enabled.
Guard fence
F3SG-RA
During muting
Limit switch 2
(N.C. Contact)
24 V
Limit switch1
(N.O. Contact)
ON: To muting input A
ON -> OFF: To muting input B
Input time difference between muting inputs A and B
must be T1max or less
(initial setting is 4 s)
If the duration between when the muting input A is turned ON from the OFF state and when the muting
input B is turned OFF from the ON state is within T1max [ s ], the safety function of the F3SG-RA is
disabled. (Safety outputs are kept ON even if F3SG-RA is blocked)
Time t1 [ s ] for F3SG-RA to enter muting state is within the range shown below:
t1 < T1max. . . . . . . . . . . Equation (5)
T1max [ s ] : Muting input time limit value (maximum)
The value of T1max can be changed by the Configuration Tool.
66
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
System Operation and Functions
 Timing Chart
Muting input A
(Limit switch1)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Muting state
Enabled
Disabled
Beam state
Unblocked
Blocked
OSSD
ON
OFF
T2 max.
T2 max.
Blinking at 0.5 s (1 Hz)
Muting
Blinking
OFF
80 ms max.
T3 (0.1 s) max.
2
Auxiliary output
T1max
Chapter
Muting input B
(Limit switch2)
T3 (0.1 s) max.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
67
System Operation and Functions
2-12-4. Dynamic Muting
The Dynamic Muting function can configure a new muting zone while the muting state is enabled,
based on a result measuring a workpiece height for a certain period of time.
This materializes safer muting function with a limited muting zone adjusted according to a workpiece
height.
2
Chapter
 Usage Example
This function cannot be used for an application in which a workpiece height gets larger after measuring
the zone as shown below.
Muting
Applicable Example
Application Examples
Position after Zone
Measurement
NOT Applicable Example
Application Examples
㻺㼑㼣㻌㼦㼛㼚㼑
㻺㼑㼣㻌㼦㼛㼚㼑
㻺㼑㼣㻌㼦㼛㼚㼑
㻺㼑㼣㻌㼦㼛㼚㼑
Position after Zone
Measurement
㻺㼑㼣㻌㼦㼛㼚㼑
㻺㼑㼣㻌㼦㼛㼚㼑
㻺㼑㼣㻌㼦㼛㼚㼑
㻺㼑㼣㻌㼦㼛㼚㼑
 Zone Measurement Start Condition
After the muting start condition is satisfied and the full detection zone is muted, interruption of a part of
the F3SG-RA causes the Zone Measurement to start.
 Zone Measurement
The Zone Measurement monitors the highest and lowest parts of a passing workpiece during the
dynamic muting measurement time Tdyn (3 s). (Void spaces in workpiece(s) are ignored.)
 Zone Determination
A zone enclosed by the highest and the lowest parts of the workpiece is set as a new muting zone.
Configuring a dynamic muting allowable beam allows the muting zone to be expanded by the number
of allowable beams. Configuring a dynamic muting allowable beam prevents unintended line stop due
to swing of a workpiece, etc. (The factory default setting of the dynamic muting allowable beam is 1.)
68
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
System Operation and Functions
 Dynamic Muting Allowable Beam
The dynamic muting allowable beam allows the muting zone measured by the Zone Measurement to
be expanded by the number of additional beam(s) specified as allowable beam.
 Timing chart
OFF
2
ON
Muting Input B
Enabled
Disabled
All Zone
Muting
OFF
Muting State
Beam state
Chapter
ON
Muting Input A
Partial Zone
Unblocked
Blocked
ON
Zone Measurement
OFF
Tdyn (3 s)
2-12-5. Factory Default Setting
In the factory default setting, the muting mode is set to Standard Muting Mode and the dynamic muting
to Disable.
2-12-6. Setting with DIP Switch
If the pre-reset function is enabled by the DIP Switch, the muting function is disabled.
Otherwise the muting function is always being enabled.
Refer to Chapter 3 Setting with DIP Switch for more information on setting this function by the DIP Switch.
2-12-7. Setting with Configuration Tool
Some settings of functions configurable with the Configuration Tool may increase risks.
Make sure the Responsible Person conduct a thorough risk assessment analysis before
managing and changing the settings. Unintended changes to the settings may cause a
person to go undetected, resulting in serious injury.
The user can make changes to the settings by the Configuration Tool.
Function
Factory Default Setting
Available Parameters
Muting function *
Enable
Enable/Disable
Muting mode
Standard muting mode
Standard muting mode/Exit-only muting
mode/Position detection muting mode
Statistics data recording
Enable
Enable/Disable
*Setting parameters of the following functions are saved according to the states where the Muting function is
enabled and disabled, respectively. After changing the Muting function from Enable to Disable or from Disable to
Enable, also check the settings of these functions again.
Affected functions: External Device Monitoring (EDM), Start Interlock, Restart Interlock, Auxiliary Output, Lamp
Output
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
E
69
System Operation and Functions
Refer to 2-24-6. Muting Statistics Information for more information.
Standard Muting Mode
Function
Factory Default Setting
Available Parameters
2
Chapter
Muting zone
All beams
1 to all beams in 1-beam increments
T1min: Muting input time limit value (minimum)
0.1 s
0.1 to 3.9 s in 0.1-s increments
T1max: Muting input time limit value (maximum)
4s
0.2 to 60 s in 0.1-s increments, or infinite
T2: Muting time limit
60 s
1 to 600 s in 1-s increments, or infinite
T3: Maximum allowable muting signal interruption
0.1 s
0.1 to 20 s in 0.1-s increments
Muting
Exit-Only Muting Mode
Function
Muting zone
Factory Default Setting
All beams
Available Parameters
1 to all beams in 1-beam increments
T1min: Muting input time limit value (minimum)
0.1 s
0.1 to 3.9 s in 0.1-s increments
T1max: Muting input time limit value (maximum)
4s
0.2 to 60 s in 0.1-s increments, or infinite
T2: Muting time limit
60 s
1 to 600 s in 1-s increments, or infinite
T3: Maximum allowable muting signal interruption
0.1 s
0.1 to 4 s in 0.1-s increments
T4: Muting end wait time
1s
0.1 to 20 s in 0.1-s increments
T5: Exit-only muting delay time
4s
4 to 20 s in 0.1-s increments
Position Detection Muting Mode
Function
Factory Default Setting
Available Parameters
Muting zone
All beams
1 to all beams in 1-beam increments
T1max: Muting input time limit value(maximum)
4s
0.2 to 60 s in 0.1-s increments, or infinite
T2: Muting time limit
60 s
1 to 600 s in 1-s increments, or infinite
T3: Maximum allowable muting signal interruption
0.1 s
0.1 to 4 s in 0.1-s increments
Dynamic Muting
Function
Factory Default Setting
Available Parameters
Dynamic muting
Disable
Enable/Disable
Dynamic muting measurement time
3s
1 to 25 s in 0.1-s increments
Number of dynamic muting allowable beams
1
0 to 5 in 1-beam increments
Make sure the Position 8 of the DIP Switch is set to Configuration Tool Enabled to activate the settings by the
Configuration Tool.
Setting the muting time limit to infinite may cause a failure of the muting sensors to go undetected, resulting in the F3SG-RA
in an unintended muting state. Conduct risk assessment analysis thoroughly before enabling this setting.
Setting the muting input time limit value (maximum) to infinite may cause a failure of the muting sensors to go
undetected, resulting in a failure of disabling the muting state. Conduct risk assessment analysis thoroughly before
enabling this setting.
Dynamic Muting can be used in conjunction with any of Standard, Exit-only and Position detection muting modes.
Refer to Safety Light Curtain Configuration Tool for Model F3SG (SD Manager 2) User’s Manual for more
information on setting this function by the Configuration Tool.
70
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
System Operation and Functions
2-13. Override
F3SG-RA Series
X
F3SG-RE Series
workpiece stops while passing through the F3SG-RA, as shown below, causing a muting error, the normal
state cannot be recovered unless the workpiece is removed from the muting sensors and the detection field of
2
the F3SG-RA. However, the override function will mute the safety outputs of the F3SG-RA so that the
Override
Chapter
The override function turns the safety outputs ON when the muting start condition is not satisfied. If a
conveyor only can be restarted to move the workpiece out of the muting sensors and detection zone.
B1
F3SG-RA
Reflector
Workpiece
A1
F3SG-RA
Reflector
The override function can be enabled for up to 600 s.
Receiver's top-beam-state indicator and bottom-beam-state indicator blink during override.
The Override is not available for the F3SG-RE.
The muting and override functions disable the safety function of the device. You must ensure
safety using other method when these functions are operating.
Install the switch that uses hold-to-run device such as a spring-return key switch. Install the
switch in a location that provides a clear view of the entire hazardous zone and where it cannot
be activated from within the hazardous zone. Make sure that nobody is in the hazardous zone
before activating the override function.
Override time must be properly configured for its application by a sufficiently trained and qualified
person.
Make sure to connect an override cancel switch to the Reset line when using the override
function. Otherwise the override state may not be released by the override cancel switch,
resulting in serious injury.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
71
System Operation and Functions
2-13-1. Override at Normal Operation
You can enable the override function under the normal operation.
 Override start conditions
If all of the following conditions are satisfied, the override state is enabled. The override state can be
1. Either muting input A or B is in the ON state. (One or more muting sensors are turned ON by a
workpiece)
This does not apply to Exit-Only Muting mode.
2
Chapter
enabled even when there is a muting error.
Override
2. The F3SG-RA is blocked and the safety outputs are in the OFF state.
3. An input signal of a special sequence is entered three times to the reset input when the conditions
No. 1 and 2 above are satisfied. The signal must be entered within a range from 0.1 s to the override
input time limit T1 (1 s). (See the timing chart below.)
The F3SG-RA does not enter Override state when the sensor is in Lockout state.
 Override end conditions
When any of the following conditions is satisfied, the override state is released.
1. A period of 600 s (configurable) passes in the override state.
2. All muting sensors are turned OFF.
3. The F3SG-RA is unblocked (during exit-only muting mode).
4. The following signal to cancel the override state is entered:
• When the external device monitoring function is enabled, the reset input is turned ON. (PNP:
Connected to Vs-3 V~Vs; NPN: Connected to 0 V~3 V)
• When the external device monitoring function is disabled, the reset input is turned OFF.
Override state can be also released when the F3SG-RA enters the Lockout state.
 Timing chart
72
Muting input A
ON
OFF
Muting input B
ON
OFF
Reset input
ON
OFF
Override state
Enabled
Disabled
Beam state
Unblocked
Blocked
OSSD
ON
OFF
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
1 s max.
T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1
1 s max.
T2 max.
System Operation and Functions
 Factory default setting
Variable
Variable name
Value
Description
T1
Override input time limit
1s
Maximum input time of override input.
T2
Override time limit
600 s
The duration time of the Override function. The Override state is
cancelled if it continues for longer than this time limit.
Chapter
 Wiring diagram
+24 VDC
Power supply
0 VDC
S2
*2
S1
Receiver
S3
S4
KM1
KM2
0 VDC
*2
S1
S3
24 VDC : Brown
MUTE B : Pink
MUTE A : Gray
0 VDC : Blue
+24 VDC
Power supply S2
RESET : Yellow *1
F39-JGA-D
24 VDC : Brown
MUTE B : Pink
MUTE A : Gray
RESET : Yellow *1
0 VDC : Blue
F39-JGA-D
Override
NPN output
2
PNP output
Receiver
When External Device Monitoring Enabled
S4
KM1
KM2
S1: Lockout/Interlock Reset Switch or Override Switch
S2: Override Cancel Switch
S3, S4: Muting sensor
KM1, KM2: External device feedback
*1. Also used as Override input line.
*2. Make sure to connect an override cancel switch to
the Reset line when using the override function.
Otherwise the override state may not be released
by the override cancel switch, resulting in serious injury.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
73
System Operation and Functions
PNP output
NPN output
Receiver
Receiver
When Position Detection Muting and External Device Monitoring Disabled
S1
S2
S3
+24 VDC
Power supply
0 VDC
24 VDC : Brown
MUTE B : Pink
MUTE A : Gray
0 VDC : Blue
RESET : Yellow *1
F39-JGA-D
24 VDC : Brown
MUTE B : Pink
MUTE A : Gray
Override
0 VDC : Blue
2
Chapter
RESET : Yellow *1
F39-JGA-D
+24 VDC
Power supply
S1
S2
S3
0 VDC
S1: Lockout/Interlock Reset Switch, Override Switch or Override Cancel Switch
S2, S3: Muting sensor
*1. Also used as Override input line.
2-13-2. Override upon Startup
You can enable the override state by entering a special sequence when the power is turned on. This
function is dedicated to exit-only muting mode.
Under the standard muting mode or the position detection muting mode, a workpiece can be ejected using the override
function under the normal operation as any of muting inputs always turns on even if the power is restarted while muting
failed.
 Override start conditions
When all of the following conditions are satisfied, the override state is enabled. The override state can
be achieved even when there is a muting error.
1. F3SG-RA is interrupted
2. An input signal of a special sequence is entered three times to the reset input within 2 to 5 s after
power-on. The signal must be entered within a range from 0.1 s to the override input time limit T1 (1
s). (See the timing chart below.)
 Override end conditions
When any one of the following conditions is satisfied, the override state is released.
1. A period of 600 s (configurable) passes in the override state
2. The F3SG-R is unblocked
3. The following signal to cancel the override state is entered:
• When the external device monitoring function is enabled, the reset input is turned ON. (PNP:
Connected to Vs-3 V~Vs; NPN: Connected to 0 V~3 V)
• When the external device monitoring function is disabled, the reset input is turned OFF.
Override state can be also released when the F3SG-RA enters the Lockout state.
74
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
System Operation and Functions
 Timing chart
2 to 5 s
ON
OFF
Power
1 s max.
Beam state
Unblocked
Blocked
OSSD
ON
OFF
1 s max.
T2 max.
Override
Enabled
Disabled
T1
2
Override State
T1 T1 T1 T1 T1
Chapter
ON
OFF
Reset Input
2-13-3. Setting with DIP Switch
The user cannot make any changes to this function by the DIP Switch.
2-13-4. Setting with Configuration Tool
Some settings of functions configurable with the Configuration Tool may increase risks.
Make sure the Responsible Person conduct a thorough risk assessment analysis before
managing and changing the settings. Unintended changes to the settings may cause a
person to go undetected, resulting in serious injury.
The user can make changes to the settings by the Configuration Tool.
Function name
Factory Default Setting
Available Parameters
Override
Enable
Enable/Disable
Override input time limit
1s
0.1 to 5 s in 0.1-s increments
Override time limit
600 s
1 to 600 s in 1-s increments, or infinite
Make sure the Position 8 of the DIP Switch is set to Configuration Tool Enabled to activate the settings by the
Configuration Tool.
Setting the override time limit to infinite may cause a failure of disabling the override state when there is a failure of the
override input signal. Conduct risk assessment analysis thoroughly before enabling this setting.
Refer to Safety Light Curtain Configuration Tool for Model F3SG (SD Manager 2) User’s Manual for more
information on setting this function by the Configuration Tool.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
75
System Operation and Functions
2-14. Fixed Blanking
2
Chapter
Install protective structure for all zones of disabled zone so that a worker should not be able to
approach hazardous zone of a machine without passing through zones disabled by the fixed
blanking function.
Otherwise it may result in serious injury.
Fixed Blanking
If allowable beams are designated for fixed blanking, detection capability gets larger near an
object that interrupts beams. Calculate a safety distance based on the setting. Otherwise, the
machine may not stop before a person reaches the hazardous part, resulting in serious injury.
Responsible Person must ensure that a test rod should be detected in all zones where it should
be detected after setting the fixed blanking function. Failure to do so may result in serious injury.
F3SG-RA Series
X
F3SG-RE Series
2-14-1. Overview
 Fixed Blanking Function
This function disables a part of F3SG-RA detection zone. The safety output stays in the ON state even
if an object exists in the disabled zone.
One zone consists of continuous beams for the fixed blanking setting, and the number of zones can be
configured up to three zones, from fixed blanking zone 1 to 3. Note that you cannot configure fixed
blanking for all beams. In addition, fixed blanking cannot be configured for both beams of the ends
(synchronization beams) of the primary sensor at the same time.
The Fixed Blanking is not available for the F3SG-RE.
 Fixed Blanking Zone Setting
A zone for fixed blanking zone must be configured. It is possible to perform teaching and set the
designated beams manually with the interrupting object placed in the appropriate position. In this
example shown below, the 5th and 10th beams are set as bottom and top beams respectively.
For details of the teach-in setting with the DIP Switch, see 3-3-1. Setting Fixed Blanking by Teach-in.
Upper
Upper
10th beam
Fixed blanking zone
5th beam
Lower
76
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Lower
System Operation and Functions
 Fixed Blanking Monitoring Function
For safety reasons, F3SG-RA transitions to lockout state* if part of a fixed blanking zone is unblocked.
(Factory default setting.)
When the F3SG-RA is set to Blanking Zone Cancelled, the fixed blanking function is cancelled if part of
a fixed blanking zone is unblocked.
In this case, power cycle enables the fixed blanking function again with the same setting as previous
Chapter
one.
Turn off the power and on again while all fixed blanking zones are interrupted.
2
Setting to Monitoring disabled disables the blanking monitoring.
 Allowable Beam
Allowable beam represents a beam out of the target of fixed blanking monitoring. This should be
configured for a fixed blanking beam that is irregularly blocked and unblocked due to an interrupting
Fixed Blanking
* Allowable beams configured on both ends of fixed blanking zone are not monitored.
object's oscillation. An allowable beam can be assigned to the beams on both ends or one end of a
fixed blanking zone.
If a fixed blanking zone is configured by teach-in with DIP Switch, the 2 upper and 2 lower beams of
the fixed blanking zone are configured as allowable beams.
Refer to the user's manual of the Configuration Tool for allowable beam setting with the Configuration Tool.
Safety Light Curtain Configuration Tool for Model F3SG (SD Manager 2) User’s Manual
See below for an example.
In this case, 5th, 6th, and 10th beams are set as allowable beams. These beams is repeatedly blocked
and unblocked due to an interrupting object's oscillation. But because these beams are not the target
of the monitoring, the F3SG-RA keeps the safety outputs in the ON state.
Upper
Upper
10th beam
Fixed blanking zone
6th beam
5th beam
Lower
Lower
Number of allowable beams available for fixed blanking beams
Number of Fixed Blanking Beams
Maximum Number of Allowable Beams
1
Setting not possible
2
1
3
2
4
3
n
n-1
Allowable beams are automatically configured by the setting with the DIP Switch.
Refer to 3-3-1. Setting Fixed Blanking by Teach-in for more information on Teach-in with the DIP Switch.
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
E
77
System Operation and Functions
For detection capability on the border between the blanking zone and normal detection zone when
allowable beam is configured, see next table.
Detection capability on the border between the blanking zone and normal detection zone when
allowable beam is specified.
[mm]
Allowable Beam on One End
F3SG-RA-30
14 (same as nominal)
30 (same as nominal)
1 beam
24
50
2 beams
34
-
2
Chapter
F3SG-RA-14
Disable
Fixed Blanking
 F3SG-R LED indicator status
When fixed blanking is being enabled, the blanking indicator turns on.
 Constraint between Fixed Blanking Zones
More than one fixed blanking zone can be configured adjacently (Figures 1 and 2). But allowable
beams cannot be set adjacently (Figure 3). You cannot overlap fixed blanking zones. (Figure 4)
Upper
Upper
Fixed blanking zone 1
Fixed blanking zone 1
(Allowable beam: 1 lower beam)
Fixed blanking zone 2
Fixed blanking zone 2
Lower
Lower
Figure 2
Figure 1
Upper
Upper
Fixed blanking zone 1
(Lower 1 allowable beam)
Fixed blanking zone 1
Fixed blanking zone 2
(Upper 1 allowable beam)
Lower
Fixed blanking zone 2
Lower
Figure 3
Figure 4
Normal detecting beam
Fixed blanking beam
Allowable beam
 Limitation for Combination with Other Functions
You can use this function in combination with muting, floating blanking, and warning zone functions at
the same time with the setting tool for F3SG-R.
78
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
System Operation and Functions
Settings for respective zone have limitations.
Refer to 2-18. Setting Zone Adjacency Conditions for more information.
Refer to 2-1. Combination of Functions for more information on the use in conjunction with other functions.
Chapter
2-14-2. Factory Default Setting
The factory default setting is Fixed Blanking Disable.
2
Configuring the blanking setting of the DIP switch as Fixed Blanking Enabled enables the fixed
blanking function.
The fixed blanking monitoring function is configured as lockout.
Make sure the Position 8 of the DIP Switch is set to Configuration Tool Enabled to activate the settings by the
Fixed Blanking
2-14-3. Setting with DIP Switch
Configuration Tool.
Refer to Chapter 3 Setting with DIP Switch for more information on setting this function by the DIP Switch.
2-14-4. Setting with Configuration Tool
Some settings of functions configurable with the Configuration Tool may increase risks.
Make sure the Responsible Person conduct a thorough risk assessment analysis before
managing and changing the settings. Unintended changes to the settings may cause a
person to go undetected, resulting in serious injury.
The user can make changes to the settings by the Configuration Tool.
Setting is required for each sensor segment in case of a cascade connection.
Function
Factory Default Setting
Available Parameters
Fixed Blanking
Disable
Enable/Disable
Bottom beam
1
1 to all beams in 1-beam increments
Top beam
1
1 to all beams in 1-beam increments
Fixed Blanking Monitoring
Lockout
Lockout/Cancel blanking zone / Disable monitoring
Number of allowable upper beams
0 beam
0 to 5 beams in 1-beam icrements
Number of allowable lower beams
0 beam
0 to 5 beams (1-beam increments)
Make sure the Position 8 of the DIP Switch is set to Configuration Tool Enabled to activate the settings by the
Configuration Tool.
Setting the Fixed Blanking Monitoring function to Disable Monitoring may create an undetectable area where a person
can interrupt the F3SG-RA without being detected, and it is not compliant with IEC 61496-2. Conduct risk assessment
analysis thoroughly before enabling this setting.
Refer to Safety Light Curtain Configuration Tool for Model F3SG (SD Manager 2) User’s Manual for more
information on setting this function by the Configuration Tool.
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
E
79
System Operation and Functions
2-15. Floating Blanking
2
Chapter
Detection capability gets larger when the floating blanking function is used. When this function is
used, the safety distance calculation must be based on the increased detection capability for this
function.
Otherwise the machine may not stop before a person reaches to the hazardous part, resulting in
serious injury.
Floating Blanking
Responsible person must ensure that the system works as you intended after configuring floating
blanking. Failure to do so may result in serious injury.
If detection capability may get larger and a human body may pass a detection zone to reach a
hazardous source, additional safety protection equipment must be installed such as a safety
fence.
The F3SG-RA must be installed, configured, and incorporated into a machine control system by
a sufficiently trained and qualified person. Unqualified person may not be able to perform these
operations properly, which may cause a person to go undetected, resulting in serious injury
F3SG-RA Series
X
F3SG-RE Series
2-15-1. Overview
 Floating Blanking Function
This function allows a specified number of beams in the detection zone of the F3SG-RA to move freely
while keeping the Safety outputs in the ON state.
Refer to 2-1. Combination of Functions for more information on the use in conjunction with other functions.
The Floating Blanking is not available for the F3SG-RE.
 Floating Blanking Zone
All beams are configured as a floating blanking zone. If the zone overlapped with that of other function
(e.g. fixed blanking, warning zone), the other function is prioritized in the overlapped zone.
 Floating Beam
Setting of the number of floating beams allows setting of the number of beams that do not turn off the
safety output. Setting of the number of floating beams can be configured by specifying the number of
beams manually or by moving an interrupting object in the detection zone. For details of teach-in
setting, see 3-3-2. Setting Floating Blanking by Teach-in.
 Floating Blanking Monitoring Function
F3SG-RA monitors an interrupting object in a floating blanking zone. (If the object is removed or gets
smaller, human entry may not be detected by F3SG-RA, resulting in serious injury.)
F3SG-RA enters lockout when an interrupting object becomes smaller, or removed. (Factory default setting)
It is possible to configure the blanking monitoring function to be disabled when an interrupting object is
smaller or removed.
80
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
System Operation and Functions
In case configured as Blanking Disable, if an interrupting object gets smaller than the setting value, the
floating blanking function is canceled. That is, the entire detection zone of F3SG-RA works as the
normal detection zone.
If Temporalily Disable Monitoring by Wiring is configured, the monitoring function can be temporarily
disabled during operation by hard wiring of muting input A and muting input B. For details, see below.
If Temporarily Disable Monitoring by Wiring is configured, muting function cannot be used.
If Temporarily Disable Monitoring by Wiring is configured, the floating blanking monitoring function can
2
be temporarily disabled during operation by hard wiring of muting input A and muting input B of a
Floating Blanking
Chapter
 Temporarily Disable Monitoring by External Wiring
receiver.
The blanking monitoring function is disabled for a period of T2 by turning muting input A from OFF to
ON and muting input B from ON to OFF within an input time difference T1 (4s) using a limit switch, etc.
Inputs of muting input A and muting input B must be redundant inputs of different kinds such as a
combination of N.O. contact and N.C. contact types.
(In case of a PNP output photoelectric sensor, use one output as Light-ON and the other as Dark-ON
operation)
The user can use this function only when the F3SG-RA is used as a one segment system and the
function is enabled by the Configuration Tool. The function cannot be enabled when the F3SG-RA is in
the cascade connection.
Muting input A
Muting input B
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
T3 (0.1 s) or less
T1 (4 s) or less
T3 (0.1 s) or less
T2 or less
Blanking Monitoring Disabled
Function
Enabled
Beam state
Disabled
Enabled
OSSD
ON
OFF
T1: Muting input limit (fixed to 4 s)
The maximum value of an input time difference between muting input A/B.
Configured as 4 s.
T2: Monitoring Temporarily Disabled Time Limit
A time limit to disable blanking monitoring. When this time period passed, the
blanking monitoring function is enabled, and lockout occurs if the blanked beam is
unblocked. The factory default setting is 10 s (configurable).
T3䠖Maximum allowable muting signal interruption (fixed to 0.1 s)
Maximum duration of a signal interruption allowed in Muting inputs A and B. This is
set at 0.1 s.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
81
System Operation and Functions
Case: PNP Setting
MUTE A
MUTE B
Chapter
Case: NPN Setting
Floating Blanking
MUTE B
2
MUTE A
24 V
Limit Switch 1
(N.O.)
Limit Switch 2
(N.C.)
Limit Switch 1
(N.O.)
Limit Switch 2
(N.C.)
0V
The muting is not enabled when the Temporalily Disable Monitoring by External Wiring is enabled.
 Number of Allowable Beams
Number of beams in the Floating Blanking zone, that are not monitored by the Floating Blanking
Monitoring function.
When the Floating Blanking Monitoring function is enabled and the number of blocked beams
becomes less than "the number of Floating beams - the number of allowable beam(s)", the F3SG-RA
enters the Lockout state.
Setting Example: the F3SG-RA with 14-mm detection capability
When the number of floating beams is configured as 4 beams, the safety output is turned OFF if 5 or
more beams are blocked. (Fig. 1)
If the number of floating beams is configured as 4 beams, the safety outputs are not turned OFF if 4 or
less beams are blocked. (Fig. 2)
If the monitoring function is being enabled and the number of allowable beams is configured as 1
beam, lockout occurs when an interrupting object is lost or 2 or less beams are blocked. (Fig. 3)
When an interrupting object of the size that does not turn off the safety outputs interrupts multiple
locations, the safety outputs are not turned OFF. (Fig. 4)
5 or more beams are blocked
44-mm dia.
82
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
4 or fewer are blocked
33-mm dia.
Safety output OFF
Safety output ON
Fig.1
Fig. 2
System Operation and Functions
2 or fewer are blocked
More than one zone is blocked
Chapter
30-mm dia.
14-mm dia. max.
30-mm dia.
2
Safety output OFF
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
 Detection Capability
Detection capability for F3SG-RA differs based on the number of floating beams as shown below.
Model
F3SG-4RA-14
F3SG-4RA-30
Number of beams configured
Detection capability
Floating Blanking
Lockout
Number of blocked beams to turn safety
outputs OFF
-
14 mm
1 beam
1 beam
24 mm
2 beams
2 beams
34 mm
3 beams
3 beams
44 mm
4 beams
4 beams
54 mm
5 beams
n beams
14+(10×n) mm
(n+1) beams
-
30 mm
1 beam
1 beam
50 mm
2 beams
2 beams
70 mm
3 beams
3 beams
90 mm
4 beams
4 beams
110 mm
5 beams
n beams
30+(20×n) mm
(n+1) beams
 F3SG-R LED Indicator status
When floating blanking is being enabled, the Blanking indicator turns on.
Refer to 2-1. Combination of Functions for more information on the use in conjunction with other functions.
2-15-2. Factory Default Setting
The factory default setting is the Floating Blanking Disabled.
2-15-3. Setting with DIP Switch
Configuring the blanking setting of the DIP switch as Floating Blanking Enabled enables the floating
blanking function.
The floating blanking monitoring function is configured as lockout.
Make sure the Position 8 of the DIP Switch is set to Configuration Tool Enabled to activate the settings by the
Configuration Tool.
Refer to Chapter 3 Setting with DIP Switch for more information on setting this function by the DIP Switch.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
83
System Operation and Functions
2-15-4. Setting with Configuration Tool
2
Chapter
Some settings of functions configurable with the Configuration Tool may increase risks.
Make sure the Responsible Person conduct a thorough risk assessment analysis before
managing and changing the settings. Unintended changes to the settings may cause a
person to go undetected, resulting in serious injury.
The user can make changes to the settings by the Configuration Tool.
Floating Blanking
Setting is required for each sensor segment in case of a cascade connection.
Function
Floating Blanking
Factory Default Setting
Disable
Available Parameters
Enable/Disable
Floating Blanking Monitoring
Lockout
Disable monitoring/Lockout/Cancel blanking zone
Temporarily Disable Monitoring
Function
Disable
Enable/Disable
Monitoring temporarily disabled
time limit
10 s
1 to 200 s (1-s increments), or infinite
Number of floating beams
1
1 to 15 (1-beam increments)
Number of allowable beams
0
0 to 5 (1-beam increments)
Make sure the Position 8 of the DIP Switch is set to Configuration Tool Enabled to activate the settings by the
Configuration Tool.
Setting the Floating Blanking Monitoring function to Disable Monitoring may create an undetectable area where a person
can interrupt the F3SG-RA without being detected, and it is not compliant with IEC 61496-2. Conduct risk assessment
analysis thoroughly before enabling this setting.
Refer to Safety Light Curtain Configuration Tool for Model F3SG (SD Manager 2) User’s Manual for more
information on setting this function by the Configuration Tool.
84
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
System Operation and Functions
2-16. Reduced Resolution
F3SG-RA Series
X
F3SG-RE Series
The reduced resolution function prevents the safety output to turn off by an object moving in a
detection zone. With this function, an object with a size of 1 to 3 beams can be ignored by changing a
2
detection capability size. Unless the number of interrupted continuous beams exceeds the setting (1 to
Reduced Resolution
Chapter
2-16-1. Overview
3 beams), the total number of interrupted beams has no limit. The response time remains the same
even when the detection capability is changed.
The difference from the Floating Blanking is that the Reduced Resolution keeps the safety outputs ON
even when an object is present discontinuously.
Refer to 2-1. Combination of Functions for more information on the use in conjunction with other functions.
The Reduced Resolution is not available for the F3SG-RE.
Detection capability gets larger when the reduced resolution function is used. When this
function is used, the safety distance calculation must be based on the increased detection
capability for this function. Otherwise, the machine may not stop before a person reaches
the hazardous part, resulting in serious injury.
If detection capability may get larger and a human body may pass a detection zone to
reach a hazardous source, additional safety protection equipment must be installed such
as a safety fence.
The F3SG-RA must be installed, configured, and incorporated into a machine control
system by a sufficiently trained and qualified person. Unqualified person may not be able
to perform these operations properly, resulting in failure of human body detection and
heavy injury.
 Detection Capability
Detection capability for F3SG-RA differs based on the number of floating beams as shown below.
Model
F3SG-4RA-14
F3SG-4RA-30
Number of beams
configured
Detection capability
-
14 mm
1 beam
-
1 beam
24 mm
2 beams
6.6 mm
Number of blocked beams
to turn safety outputs OFF
Maximum diameter of
object ignored
2 beams
34 mm
3 beams
16.6 mm
3 beams
44 mm
4 beams
26.6 mm
-
30 mm
1 beam
-
1 beam
50 mm
2 beams
13 mm
2 beams
70 mm
3 beams
33 mm
3 beams
90 mm
4 beams
53 mm
 F3SG-R LED indicator status
When the Reduced Resolution is being enabled, the Blanking indicator turns on.
E
Refer to 2-1. Combination of Functions for more information on the use in conjunction with other functions.
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
85
System Operation and Functions
2-16-2. Factory Default Setting
The factory default setting is the Reduced Resolution Disable.
2-16-3. Setting with DIP Switch
2
Chapter
The user cannot make any changes to this function by the DIP Switch.
Reduced Resolution
2-16-4. Setting with Configuration Tool
Some settings of functions configurable with the Configuration Tool may increase risks.
Make sure the Responsible Person conduct a thorough risk assessment analysis before
managing and changing the settings. Unintended changes to the settings may cause a
person to go undetected, resulting in serious injury.
The user can make changes to the settings by the Configuration Tool.
Function Name
Factory Default Setting
Available Parameters
Reduced Resolution
Disable
Enable*/Disable
Number of beams
1
1 to 3 beams in 1-beam increments
*It is not possible to configure the Reduced Resolution function together with the Muting function. To
enable settings of the Reduced Resolution function, disable the Muting function.
In addition, setting parameters of the following functions are saved according to the states where the
Muting function is enabled and disabled, respectively. After changing the Muting function from Enable
to Disable or from Disable to Enable, also check the settings of these functions again.
Affected functions: External Device Monitoring (EDM), Start Interlock, Restart Interlock, Auxiliary
Output, Lamp Output
Make sure the Position 8 of the DIP Switch is set to Configuration Tool Enabled to activate the settings by the
Configuration Tool.
Refer to Safety Light Curtain Configuration Tool for Model F3SG (SD Manager 2) User’s Manual for more
information on setting this function by the Configuration Tool.
86
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
System Operation and Functions
2-17. Warning Zone
F3SG-RA Series
X
F3SG-RE Series
Chapter
2-17-1. Overview
Part of the detection zone can be set as a warning zone.
2
Example:
The Warning Zone is not available for the F3SG-RE.
Warning Zone
• When a person enters, indicator or buzzer should notify warning without stopping a machine.
When a warning zone is configured, you must attach labels that indicate a border
between normal detection zone and warning zone. Otherwise the machine may not stop
before a person reaches to the hazardous part, resulting in serious injury.
A warning zone must not be used for safety applications. Always install your system so
that a detection zone should be passed before reaching a hazardous part of the machine.
If access to the hazardous part by reaching over the detection zone of a vertically
mounted F3SG-R cannot be excluded, the height of the detection zone and the safety distance shall be determined in consideration of such a risk.
+D]DUG
Detection Zone
Warning Zone
A warning zone must be configured based on a safety distance.
Safety distance (S)
Hazard
Detection Zone
Hazard
Detection
Zone
Warning Zone
Safety
distance (S)
Detection Zone
Warning Zone
Refer to 4-1-2. Safety Distance for more information on safety distance calculations for
orthogonal and parallel approaches.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
87
System Operation and Functions
You can specify beams you want to configure for warning zone. (Fig. 4& 5)
Configuration cannot be executed for cases shown below.
• All beams are configured as a warning zone (Fig. 7).
• A warning zone is specified without including any of end beams (Fig. 8)
for the other F3SG-RA's to have the warning zone for the all beams. (Fig. 6)
For the application as shown in Fig. 6, make sure the primary sensor has the detection zone and the secondary sensor
2
Chapter
When it is configured for the F3SG-RA in cascade connection to have the detection zone, it is possible
has the warning zone.
Warning Zone
Operation Example:
Detection Zone
Warning Zone
Safety output ON
Warning zone output OFF
Fig. 2
Fig. 1
Beam state Unblocked
(Warning zone only)
Blocked
Beam state Unblocked
(Detection zone)
Blocked
88
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Safety output ON
Warning zone output ON
Auxiliary output
(warning zone)
ON
OFF
OSSD
ON
OFF
Safety output OFF
Warning zone output OFF
Fig. 3
System Operation and Functions
Warning Zone
Upper 6 beams
Upper
Detection Zone
Fig. 4
Detection Zone
Upper
Lower
Warning Zone
Lower 4 beams
Fig. 5
Lower
Chapter
All beams are
warning zone
2
Warning Zone
Upper
Upper
Lower
Fig. 7
Detection Zone Warning Zone Detection Zone
All beams are
detection zone
Channel 2
(secondary sensor)
Upper
Lower
Fig. 8
All beams are
warning zone
Lower
Upper
Channel 1
(primary sensor)
Lower
Fig. 6
When a warning zone is configured, you must attach labels that indicate a border between normal
detection zone and warning zone.
<F3SG-RA front surface>
Warning
beam
Normal
beam
Warning Zone Label
<F3SG-RA side surface>
* Attach the Warning Zone Label
to the side surface of the F3SG-RA.
Warning
Zone
Detection
Zone
The Blanking indicator of the F3SG-RA is illuminated when the Warning Zone is enabled.
Refer to 2-1. Combination of Functions for more information on the use in conjunction with other functions.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
89
System Operation and Functions
2-17-2. Factory Default Setting
The factory default setting is Warning Zone Disable.
2-17-3. Setting with DIP Switch
The user cannot make any changes to this function by the DIP Switch.
2
Chapter
2-17-4. Setting with Configuration Tool
Warning Zone
Some settings of functions configurable with the Configuration Tool may increase risks.
Make sure the Responsible Person conduct a thorough risk assessment analysis before
managing and changing the settings. Unintended changes to the settings may cause a
person to go undetected, resulting in serious injury.
The user can make changes to the settings by the Configuration Tool.
Function
Factory Default Setting
Available Parameters
Warning zone
Disable
Disable/Enable from upper/Enable from lower
Zone setting
None
Any beam from top beam/any beam from
bottom beam
If you want to output the light unblocked/blocked states of the warning zone, configure the output
operation mode of the auxiliary output or Lamp as warning zone information.
Make sure the Position 8 of the DIP Switch is set to Configuration Tool Enabled to activate the settings by the
Configuration Tool.
Refer to Safety Light Curtain Configuration Tool for Model F3SG (SD Manager 2) User’s Manual for more
information on setting this function by the Configuration Tool.
90
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
System Operation and Functions
2-18. Setting Zone Adjacency Conditions
If any two functions of muting, fixed blanking or warning zone functions of the F3SG-RA are used at
the same time, the setting zones have limitations.
This section describes the limitations for following points:
1. Zone adjacent condition: If zones for multiple functions are configured adjacently
Chapter
2. Zone overlap condition: If zones for multiple functions are configured as overlapped
The muting, fixed blanking and warning zone functions are not available for the F3SG-RE.
2
The table below describes the conditions to configure setting zones for adjacent beams.
Except for some conditions, setting zones for these 3 functions can be located adjacently. The user can make
the setting by the Configuration Tool.
Zone Adjacency Condition
Function
Muting
Fixed Blanking
Warning Zone
-
Yes
Yes
Fixed Blanking
Yes
*
Yes
Warning Zone
Yes
Yes
-
Muting
Setting Zone Adjacency Conditions
1. Zone Adjacency Condition
Yes: Possible to configure
* For details about setting adjacent fixed blanking zones.
Refer to Constraint between Fixed Blanking Zones under 2-14. Fixed Blanking.
2. Zone Overlap Condition
The table below describes the conditions to configure setting zones for overlapping beams.
Except for combination of muting zone and fixed blanking zone (figure 3), setting zones of these 3 functions
cannot be overlapped. (Figure 4)
The user can make the setting by the Configuration Tool.
Setting zones of Muting and Floating functions can be overlapped only if each zone covers the full detection zone.
Zone overlap condition
Function
Muting
Muting
Fixed Blanking
Warning Zone
-
Yes
No
Fixed Blanking
Yes
No
No
Warning Zone
No
No
-
Yes: Possible to configure
No: Not possible to configure
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
91
System Operation and Functions
Warning zone
Muting zone
Muting zone
Chapter
Fixed blanking zone
2
Setting Zone Adjacency Conditions
92
Figure 3
Figure 4
Even if a muting zone and a fixed blanking zone are configured as overlapped, fixed blanking monitoring function is effective.
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
System Operation and Functions
2-19. Operating Range Selection
F3SG-RA Series
X
F3SG-RE Series
X
The Operating Range Selection function can change the operating range by changing emission light
2
intensity.
Operating Range
Detection Capability
30 mm
Detection Capability
14 mm
Short Mode
0.3 m~7.0 m
0.3 m~3.0 m
Long Mode
0.3 m~20.0 m
0.3 m~10.0 m
 Example
• To set shorter operating range to prevent the F3SG-R from affecting other photoelectric sensors
• To set shorter operating range to prevent mutual interference in a close area
Operating Range Selection
The following two modes in the table below are available for operating range.
Mode
Chapter
2-19-1. Overview
 F3SG-R LED indicator status
When the Operating Range Selection is configured as LONG Mode, the LONG indicator turns on.
2-19-2. Factory Default Setting
 F3SG-RA Series
In the factory default setting, the Operating Range Selection is configured as Short Mode. The
operating range for the short mode setting is from 0.3 to 7 m for 30-mm detection capability and from
0.3 m to 3 m for 14-mm detection capability.
 F3SG-RE Series
The factory default setting is only for the F3SG-RA. For the F3SG-RE, the operating range selection is
possible by wiring.
2-19-3. Setting with DIP Switch
For the F3SG-RA, the user can select the mode of Operating Range Selection by the DIP Switch.
Refer to Chapter 3 Setting with DIP Switch for more information on setting this function by the DIP Switch.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
93
System Operation and Functions
2-19-4. Setting by Wiring
For the F3SG-RE, the user can select the mode of Operating Range Selection by wiring.
Long Mode
Emitter
0 VDC
Operating Range Select Input:
White
0 VDC : Blue
0 VDC : Blue
Operating Range Selection
Power supply
XS2F-M12P_ _4S_M
24 VDC : Brown
2
+24 VDC
Operating Range Select Input:
White
XS2F-M12P_ _4S_M
24 VDC : Brown
Chapter
Short Mode
Emitter
<Basic wiring diagram>
+24 VDC
Power supply
0 VDC
The F3SG-RE enters the Lockout state when the Operating Range Select Input line (white) is open.
2-19-5. Setting with Configuration Tool
The user cannot make any changes to this function by the Configuration Tool.
94
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
System Operation and Functions
2-20. Response Time Adjustment
F3SG-RA Series
X
F3SG-RE Series
The Response Time Adjustment function allows the user to select the longer response time in order to
Response Time Adjustment
environmental factor. Environmental factors include noise, smoke, dust, and bugs.
2
reduce the chance the safety outputs are turned OFF by an accidental block of the F3SG-R due to an
Chapter
2-20-1. Overview
The Response Time Adjustment is not available for the F3SG-RE.
To change the response time, calculate the safety distance based on the setting.
Otherwise, the machine may not stop before a person reaches the hazardous part,
resulting in serious injury.
2-20-2. Factory Default Setting
In the factory default setting, the response time is configured to the normal mode.
For the response time of factory default setting, see 1-6-1. List of Models/Response Time/Current
Consumption/Weight
2-20-3. Setting with DIP Switch
The user cannot make any changes to this function by the DIP Switch.
2-20-4. Setting with Configuration Tool
Some settings of functions configurable with the Configuration Tool may increase risks.
Make sure the Responsible Person conduct a thorough risk assessment analysis before
managing and changing the settings. Unintended changes to the settings may cause a
person to go undetected, resulting in serious injury.
The user can make changes to the settings by the Configuration Tool.
Function
Response Time Adjustment
Factory Default Setting
Normal mode
Available Parameters
Normal mode/Slow mode
The ON-to-OFF response time of the Slow mode is doubled compared to the Normal mode.
Make sure the Position 8 of the DIP Switch is set to Configuration Tool Enabled to activate the settings by the
Configuration Tool.
Refer to Safety Light Curtain Configuration Tool for Model F3SG (SD Manager 2) User’s Manual for more
information on setting this function by the Configuration Tool.
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
E
95
System Operation and Functions
2-21. Lamp
F3SG-RA Series
X
F3SG-RE Series
2
Chapter
2-21-1. Overview
A lamp (F39-LP and F39-BTLP, sold separately) can be connected to a receiver and turned ON based
on the operation of F3SG-RA. The lamp can indicate red, orange, and green colors, to which three
Lamp
different states can be assigned. When there are several illumination conditions, the priority of the
colors to illuminate or blink is red > orange > green.
Usage Example:
• Indicate that F3SG-RA is in muting or override
• Indicate that F3SG-RA is under lockout
Indicate that a machine is stopped (safety output is in the OFF state)
Refer to the instruction sheet of the Lamp for more information.
The lamp is not intended to be used for the emitter. Do not connect the lamp to the emitter.
The Lamp is not available for the F3SG-RE.
2-21-2. Factory Default Setting
The factory default setting is Red as Disable, Orange as Disable and Green as Muting/Override
information. When the F3SG-RA is under a muting or override state, the Lamp blinks once* at a 1-Hz
inverval in green.
* Refer to Output pattern chart below.
2-21-3. Setting with DIP Switch
The user cannot make any changes to this function by the DIP Switch.
2-21-4. Setting with Configuration Tool
Some settings of functions configurable with the Configuration Tool may increase risks.
Make sure the Responsible Person conduct a thorough risk assessment analysis before
managing and changing the settings. Unintended changes to the settings may cause a
person to go undetected, resulting in serious injury.
96
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
System Operation and Functions
The user can make changes to the settings by the Configuration Tool.
Lamp output
Red
(Priority 1)
Available Parameters
Muting function disabled*1
Output operation mode
None
None
*2
Inverted signal output
Disable
Disable
Enable/Disable
Output pattern
Solid-ON
Solid-ON
Solid-ON/ON 1 time/ON 2
times/ON 3 times *3
None
None
*2
Disable
Disable
Enable/Disable
Output pattern
Solid-ON
Solid-ON
Solid-ON/ON 1 time/ON 2
times/ON 3 times *3
Output operation mode
Muting/Override
information
None
*2
Inverted signal output
Disable
Disable
Enable/Disable
Output pattern
ON 1 time *3
Solid-ON
Solid-ON/ON 1 time/ON 2
times/ON 3 times *3
Lamp
Output operation mode
Inverted signal output
2
Green
(Priority 3)
Muting function enabled*1
Chapter
Orange
(Priority 2)
Factory Default Setting
Function
*1. Setting parameters of this function are saved according to the states where the Muting function is
enabled and disabled, respectively. After changing the Muting function from Enable to Disable or
from Disable to Enable, also check the settings of this function again.
Refer to  Considerations for enabling and disabling Muting function under 2-1. Combination of
Functions for more information.
Refer to 2-12. Muting for more information on settings of the Muting function.
*2. Refer to the table of Information (Output operation mode) assigned to Lamp below.
*3. The Lamp illuminates according to the patterns as shown in the output pattern chart below.
 Output pattern chart
1s
ON 1 time
ON 2 times
ON 3 times
Solid-ON
 Information (Output operation mode) assigned to Lamp
Description
(Lamp is turned ON under the following condition)
Information Name
Safety output information
When Safety output is in the ON state.
Reset-input information
When Reset/EDM/Override input is in the ON state
Interlock information
Under Interlock state
Pre-reset Information
Under Pre-reset state
Lockout information
Under error/ Lockout state
Excess power-on time
information
When power-on time exceeds power-on time threshold
Excess load switching
frequency information
When load switching frequency exceeds load switching frequency threshold
Light level diagnosis
information
When the F3SG-R is unblocked and light intensity is within a range from 100% to 170% of ONthreshold for 10 s or longer
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
E
97
System Operation and Functions
Description
(Lamp is turned ON under the following condition)
Information Name
Blanking/Warning-zone
information
When Fixed Blanking, Floating Blanking, Reduced Resolution or Warning Zone function is
enabled
Muting information
Under Muting state
Override information
Under Override state
Muting/Override information
Under either Muting or Override state
Chapter
Sequence error information
Under Muting sequence error state or Interlock sequence error state
Warning Zone Information
When warning zone is interrupted
2
Blanking bream unblocked
information
When Fixed-Blanking or Floating Blanking beams are unblocked
Lamp
Designated beam output
information
When a designated beam is blocked or unblocked
Interference/vibration
information
When the F3SG-R system stops accidentally due to interference or vibration. (In case of
cascade connection, when any of cascaded segments comes under this condition.)
Troubleshooting support
signal
When one of the signals of Muting sequence error, Interference/vibration information and Light
level diagnosis information is in the ON state.
Individual cascaded sensor
output (Channel 1)
When Safety output of Primary sensor in cascade connection is the ON state
Individual Cascaded Sensor
Output (Channel 2)
When Safety output of 1st Secondary sensor in cascade connection is the ON state
Individual Cascaded Sensor
Output (Channel 3)
When Safety output of the 2nd Secondary sensor in cascade connection is the ON state
Make sure the Position 8 of the DIP Switch is set to Configuration Tool Enabled to activate the settings by the
Configuration Tool.
Refer to Safety Light Curtain Configuration Tool for Model F3SG (SD Manager 2) User’s Manual for more
information on setting this function by the Configuration Tool.
98
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
System Operation and Functions
2-22. Designated Beam Output
F3SG-RA Series
X
F3SG-RE Series
Chapter
2-22-1. Overview
This function allows information on unblocked/blocked states of a given beam to be output.
2
Example:
• To output, from the auxiliary output, a signal of information on a specified beam being unblocked
If one or more specified beams are blocked or unblocked, the information on the beam state can be
provided as an auxiliary output or indication of Lamp.
Operation Example
Designated beam state: Dark-ON
Designated Beam Output
• To turn a Lamp ON when a specified beam of F3SG-RA is blocked
Designated
beam
Designated
beam
Safety output ON
Designated beam output OFF
Figure 1
Safety output OFF
Designated beam output ON
Figure 2
Safety output OFF
Designated beam output OFF
Figure 3
Beam state Unblocked
(Designated beam)
Blocked
Beam state Unblocked
(Other than designated beam)
Blocked
Designated beam output
ON
OFF
OSSD
ON
OFF
The Designated Beam Output is not available for the F3SG-RE.
2-22-2. Factory Default Setting
The factory default setting is Designated Beam Output as Disable.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
99
System Operation and Functions
2-22-3. Setting with DIP Switch
The user cannot make any changes to this function by the DIP Switch.
2-22-4. Setting with Configuration Tool
2
Chapter
Designated Beam Output
Some settings of functions configurable with the Configuration Tool may increase risks.
Make sure the Responsible Person conduct a thorough risk assessment analysis before
managing and changing the settings. Unintended changes to the settings may cause a
person to go undetected, resulting in serious injury.
The user can make changes to the settings by the Configuration Tool.
Function
Factory Default Setting
Available Parameters
Designated beam output
Disable
Enable/Disable
Designated beam zone
None
Any beam
Designated beam state
Light-ON
Light-ON/Dark-ON
If you want to output the light unblocked/blocked states of a designated beam, configure any one of the
output operation mode of auxiliary output or Lamp as designated beam output information.
Make sure the Position 8 of the DIP Switch is set to Configuration Tool Enabled to activate the settings by the
Configuration Tool.
Refer to Safety Light Curtain Configuration Tool for Model F3SG (SD Manager 2) User’s Manual for more
information on setting this function by the Configuration Tool.
100
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
System Operation and Functions
2-23. Light Level Monitoring
F3SG-RA Series
X
F3SG-RE Series
2-23-1-1. Overview
screen. This function allows beam adjustment while checking receiving light intensity.
The Light Level Monitoring is not available for the F3SG-RE.
2-23-1-2. Setting with Configuration Tool
The user can enable this function to retrieve incident light level information. Making any changes to the
Light Level Monitoring
The user can use the Configuration Tool to read incident light level of the F3SG-RA and view on a PC
2
Chapter
2-23-1. Incident Light Level Information
function is not possible. (When the F3SG-RA is in the cascade connection, incident light level of each
segment can be retrieved.)
2-23-2. Ambient Light Level Information
2-23-2-1. Overview
The user can use the Configuration Tool to read incident light level of ambient light from a photoelectric
sensor or another F3SG-RA unit in a close area and view it on a PC screen. This function allows the
user to identify a photoelectric sensor radiating ambient light or beams being affected by the light.
2-23-2-2. Setting with Configuration Tool
The user can enable this function to retrieve ambient light level information. Making any changes to the
function is not possible. (When the F3SG-RA is in the cascade connection, ambient light level of each
segment can be retrieved.)
Make sure the Position 8 of the DIP Switch is set to Configuration Tool Enabled to activate the settings by the
Configuration Tool.
Refer to Safety Light Curtain Configuration Tool for Model F3SG (SD Manager 2) User’s Manual for more
information?on setting this function by the Configuration Tool.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
101
System Operation and Functions
2-24. Maintenance Information
2
Chapter
Some settings of functions configurable with the Configuration Tool may increase risks. Make
sure the Responsible Person conduct a thorough risk assessment analysis before managing and
changing the settings. Unintended changes to the settings may cause a person to go
undetected, resulting in serious injury.
F3SG-RA Series
X
Maintenance Information
F3SG-RE Series
2-24-1. Overview
You can use the Configuration Tool to read the maintenance information of F3SG-RA to view on a PC
screen. The maintenance information indicates the following information:
• Error Log
• Warning Log
• Power-On Time
• Load Switching Frequency
• Muting Statistics Information
Refer to Safety Light Curtain Configuration Tool for Model F3SG (SD Manager 2) User’s Manual for more
information on setting this function by the Configuration Tool.
The Maintenance Information is not available for the F3SG-RE.
2-24-2. Error Log
The user can view details of errors occurred in the past. The displayed information can be used for
troubleshooting.
2-24-3. Warning Log
The user can view details of the following warnings occurred in the past. The displayed information can
be used for troubleshooting.
• Muting sequence error
• Interlock sequence error
• Interference/vibration information
2-24-4. Power-ON Time
The user can view the power-on time of F3SG-RA. The power-on time can be used to better
understand when to schedule of F3SG-RA.
It is possible to give an output signal to the auxiliary output or indicate with Lamp (F39-LP and F39BTLP, sold separately) when the power-on time threshold is exceeded. The excess power-on time
information must be assigned to the output operation mode of the auxiliary output or Lamp.
2-11. Auxiliary Output
2-21. Lamp
102
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
System Operation and Functions
The user can make changes to the settings by the Configuration Tool.
Function
Power-on time threshold
Factory Default Setting
30,000 h
Available Parameters
30,000 to 1,000,000 h in 1-h increments/Disable
2-24-5. Load Switching Frequency
operations can be used to understand the switching frequency of relays and contactors connected to
2
F3SG-RA.
Chapter
The user can view the number of operations of the load connected to F3SG-RA. The number of load
BTLP, sold separately) when the number of operations exceeds the switching frequency threshold.
The excess load switching frequency information must be assigned to the output operation mode of
the auxiliary output or Lamp.
2-11. Auxiliary Output
2-21. Lamp
Maintenance Information
It is possible to give an output signal to the auxiliary output or indicate with Lamp (F39-LP and F39-
The user can make changes to the settings by the Configuration Tool.
Function
Load switching frequency threhshold
Factory Default Setting
Available Parameters
100,000 times in 1-time increment 100,000 to 4,000,000 times in 1-time increments/
Disable
2-24-6. Muting Statistics Information
This function calculates parameter data required for the muting system statistically based on the actual
measurement. Man-hour required for muting system construction can be reduced by using parameters
acquired from the statistical calculation.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
103
System Operation and Functions
2-25. Operating Status Monitoring
F3SG-RA Series
X
F3SG-RE Series
2
Chapter
2-25-1. Overview
I/O information and the state of F3SG-RA can be read out with the Configuration Tool. This function is
only for F3SG-RA Configuration Tool.
Operating Status Monitoring
Make sure the Position 8 of the DIP Switch is set to Configuration Tool Enabled to activate the settings by the
Configuration Tool.
Refer to Safety Light Curtain Configuration Tool for Model F3SG (SD Manager 2) User’s Manual for more
information on setting this function by the Configuration Tool.
The Operating Status Monitoring is not available for the F3SG-RE.
2-25-2. Readout Information
The user can view the following information related to a receiver.
The information is displayed in a block in case of a cascade connection.
Information Name
Description
RESET input
Linked to Reset/External Device Monitoring (EDM)/Override Input
Muting A /Pre-Reset Input
Linked to Muting A/Pre-Reset Input
Muting B Input
Linked to Muting B Input
Safety output 1
Linked to safety output 1
Safety output 2
Linked to safety output 2
Auxiliary output
Linked to auxiliary output
Power supply voltage
Indicates supplied source voltage
Interlock information
Linked to Interlock state
Muting information
Linked to Muting state
Override information
Linked to override state
Sequence error information
Linked to Muting sequence error state or Interlock sequence error state
Blanking bream unblocked information Linked to the state where the blanking beam is unblocked
104
DIP-SW input information
Linked to the input signal of DIP Switch
Push-SW input information
Linked to the input signal of Push Switch
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
System Operation and Functions
2-26. Setting Recovery
2
X
F3SG-RE Series
2-26-1. Overview
You can use the Configuration Tool to recover the F3SG-RA setting to the default factory setting.
Setting Recovery
F3SG-RA Series
Chapter
The Setting Recovery function configurable with the Configuration Tool may increase risks. Make
sure the Responsible Person conduct a thorough risk assessment analysis before managing and
changing the settings. Unintended changes to the settings may cause a person to go
undetected, resulting in serious injury.
Make sure the Position 8 of the DIP Switch is set to Configuration Tool Enabled to activate the settings by the
Configuration Tool.
Refer to Safety Light Curtain Configuration Tool for Model F3SG (SD Manager 2) User’s Manual for more
information on setting this function by the Configuration Tool.
The Setting Recovery is not available for the F3SG-RE.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
105
System Operation and Functions
2
Chapter
Setting Recovery
106
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Chapter 3 Setting with DIP Switch
108
3-2. DIP Switch
109
3
3-2-1. DIP Switch on Receiver
110
3-2-2. DIP Switch on Emitter
111
3-2-3. Push Switch
111
Setting with DIP Switch
Chapter
3-1. List of Features Configurable by DIP Switch
3-3. Setting by Teach-in
112
3-3-1. Setting Fixed Blanking by Teach-in
112
3-3-2. Setting Floating Blanking by Teach-in
115
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
107
Setting with DIP Switch
3-1. List of Features Configurable by DIP Switch
For the F3SG-RA, the following functions are configurable by the DIP Switch.
Feature
Chapter
p.26
PNP/NPN Selection
p.27
External Test
p.30
Interlock
p.33
External Device Monitoring (EDM)
p.38
Fixed Blanking
p.76
Floating Blanking
p.80
Operating Range Selection
p.93
The F3SG-RE does not have DIP Switch.
3
List of Features Configurable by DIP Switch
108
page
Scan Code Selection
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Setting with DIP Switch
3-2. DIP Switch
Make sure to test the operation of the F3SG-R after setting with DIP Switch to verify that the
F3SG-R operates as intended. Make sure to stop the machine until the test is complete.
Unintended settings may cause a person to go undetected, resulting in serious injury or death.
F3SG-RA Series
X
as shown below. When the setting the DIP Switch is complete, close the cover and turn the power of the
F3SG-RA on.
Cascaded sensors is operated based on the DIP Switches setting of the primary sensor. The DIP Switch
setting of a secondary sensor does not affect the operation.
Receiver
DIP Switch
(Cover is closed)
DIP Switch
installing F3SG-RA in your site. To set DIP Switches, turn the power of the F3SG-RA off and open the cover
3
F3SG-RA series has DIP Switches to configure functions. Configure functions with the DIP Switches before
Chapter
F3SG-RE Series
Emitter
Factory Default Setting
Screw(M2.5)
Push Switch
Communication Port
When attaching the cover, tightly fasten the screws (M2.5, recommended torque: 0.35N.m). Failure to do so may cause the cover
to come loose, leading to deterioration of the protective functions.
The Spatter Protection Cover (F39-HGA, sold separately) extends over the DIP Switch cover of the F3SG-RA. Be sure to use the
Spatter Protection Cover only after all required settings are made to the DIP Switch.
For F3SG-RA series, the following functional settings are available by DIP Switches and Push Switch.
Receiver
Position
Function
Emitter
Position
Function
1
Scan Code
1
Scan Code
2
External Device Monitoring (EDM)
2
Operating Range Selection
3
Interlock/Pre-Reset
3
4
5
4
External Test
Fixed Blanking/Floating Blanking
6
7
PNP/NPN Selection
8
DIP Switch/Configuration Tool Selection
Operate the DIP Switch before turning the power of the F3SG-RA on.
If the DIP Switch is operated during operation of the F3SG-RA, the F3SG-RA transitions to lockout.
A change of the DIP Switch setting is activated upon power-on or lockout reset.
Note that do not use any tool which may damage F3SG-RA’s body when operating the DIP Switch.
For lockout reset function, see 2-8. Lockout Reset.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
109
Setting with DIP Switch
3-2-1. DIP Switch on Receiver
The following functional settings are available by DIP Switches on the receiver. A receiver has two DIP
Switches, both of which must be configured based on the table below. For functional details, see
respective chapter in the Functional Details column.
If the settings of two DIP Switches are different, when the power is turned on, F3SG-RA transitions to lockout.
: Indicates a switch position.
Chapter
Position
3
1
DIP Switch
2
3, 4
5, 6
7
8
Function
Scan Code
External Device
Monitoring (EDM)
Setting
DIP-SW1
Scan Code A (factory default
setting)
2-4
Scan Code B
2-4
㻻㻺
External Device Monitoring (EDM)
Disabled (factory default setting)
2-11
㻞
㻻㻺
External Device Monitoring (EDM)
Enabled
2-11
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻟
㻠
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻟
㻠
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻟
㻠
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻟
㻠
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻟
㻠
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻟
㻠
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻟
㻠
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻡
㻢
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻡
㻢
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻡
㻢
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻡
㻢
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻡
㻢
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻡
㻢
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻡
㻢
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻡
㻢
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻣
㻻㻺
㻣
㻻㻺
㻣
㻻㻺
㻣
㻻㻺
㻤
㻻㻺
㻤
㻻㻺
㻤
㻻㻺
㻤
㻻㻺
㻝
㻻㻺
㻝
㻻㻺
㻝
㻻㻺
㻝
㻻㻺
㻞
㻻㻺
㻞
㻞
㻻㻺
㻟
㻠
Interlock/Pre-Reset
Fixed Blanking/
Floating Blanking
PNP/NPN Selection
DIP Switch/
Configuration Tool
Selection
Functional
Details
Description
DIP-SW2
Auto Reset (factory default setting)
Manual Reset
(Start/Restart Interlock)
Pre-Reset
2-9
2-9
2-10
Auto Reset (same as factory default
setting)
2-9
Blanking Disabled (factory default
setting)
Fixed Blanking Enabled
Floating Blanking Enabled
-
2-15
2-16
Blanking Disabled
(Same as Blanking Disabled
(factory default setting))
-
PNP (factory default setting)
2-5
NPN
2-5
DIP Switch Enabled (factory default
setting)
See below.
Configuration Tool Enabled
See below.
You can configure the receiver's DIP Switch position 8 whether the setting of the DIP Switch or the
Configuration Tool should be enabled. If you want to use the Configuration Tool to change the setting,
configure the Position 8 setting as Configuration Tool Enabled. This setting ignores the DIP Switch
setting.
Settings changed with the Configuration Tool are stored in the internal memory of the F3SG-RA. When
any change is made to the settings and then the Position 8 is set to OFF, the F3SG-RA operates
110
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Setting with DIP Switch
according to the settings of the DIP Switch. When the Position 8 is switched back to ON, the F3SG-RA
operates according to the settings stored in the internal memory.
Note that Scan Code and PNP/NPN Selection are not affected by the Position 8 but by the DIP Switch
setting.
3-2-2. DIP Switch on Emitter
The following functional settings are available by DIP Switches on the emitter. For functional details,
see respective chapter in the Functional Details column.
: Indicates a switch position.
4
Operating Range
Selection
External Test
㻝
㻻㻺
㻝
㻻㻺
㻞
㻟
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻞
㻟
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻞
㻟
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻞
㻟
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻠
㻻㻺
㻠
㻻㻺
Functional
Details
Description
Scan Code A (factory default
setting)
2-4
Scan Code B
2-4
Short Mode (factory default setting)
Setting Inhibited
Setting Inhibited
Long Mode
DIP Switch
2, 3
Scan Code
Setting
3
1
Function
Chapter
Position
2-21
-
-
2-21
24 V Active (factory default setting)
2-7
0 V Active
2-7
If the power is turned on while the switch is configured as Setting Inhibited, F3SG-RA transitions to lockout.
3-2-3. Push Switch
The F3SG-RA has a Push Switch between the two DIP Switches on the receiver. There is no Push
Switch on the emitter. The Push Switch is used to make the settings to the Fixed Blanking and Floating
Blanking by the Teach-in.
Refer to 3-3. Setting by Teach-in for more information.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
111
Setting with DIP Switch
3-3. Setting by Teach-in
3-3-1. Setting Fixed Blanking by Teach-in
 Overview
You can teach-in the fixed blanking setting by interrupting the target area of the fixed blanking. The
teach-in task is performed using the Push Switch.
Chapter
After completion of teach-in, check that the configuration have been properly done.
3
Setting by Teach-in
 Teach-In Steps
Perform the teach-in setting of fixed blanking based on the following steps.
(1) Beam Adjustment
(2) DIP Switch Setting
(3) Transition to Teach-in Mode
(4) Teach-In and Check Processes
(5) Restart
(1) Beam Adjustment
Adjust the beams of the emitter and receiver for synchronization.
For detailed beam adjustment steps, see 4-4-4. Beam Alignment Procedure.
Misalignment during teach-in may result in an unintended setting or a failure of teach-in.
(2) DIP Switch Setting
When the power of the F3SG-RA is turned OFF, set the Blanking setting (Positions 5 and 6) of the DIP
Switch as "Fixed Blanking Enabled" and the DIP Switch/Configuration Tool Selection setting (Position
8) as "DIP Switch Enabled". And then turn the power of the F3SG-RA on.
Block the target Fixed Blanking zone by an object. Do not remove the object until the Step (4) is complete.
Refer to 3-2-1. DIP Switch on Receiver for more information.
(3) Transition to Teach-in Mode
Press and hold the Push Switch (for 3 s or longer) to make the F3SG-RA transition to Teach-in Mode.
When the F3SG-RA transitioned to Teach-in Mode, "CFG" and "BLANK" indicators blink.
(The mode transition to Teach-in Mode does not occur if the setting of the DIP Switch is configured as
"Fixed Blanking Disabled" or "Configuration Tool Enabled")
LED Indicator
SEQ
112
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Status
OFF
BLANK
Blink
CFG
Blink
Setting with DIP Switch
(4) Teach-In and Check Processes
When it is ensured that the F3SG-RA is in the Teach-in Mode, press the Push Switch (for within 1 s) to
activate the scanning of the blocked area and automatically configure the setting related to the Fixed
Blanking.*1
The F3SG-RA judges if the setting is valid or not.
If the setting is valid, "BLANK" indicator changes to solid ON state.
If the setting is invalid *2, "SEQ" indicator blinks. In this case, try the steps again from (3).
*1 The Fixed Blanking zone is configured to include one additional beam outside the actually blocked
Upper
Chapter
beams. Two beams on both ends are configured as allowable beams.
Upper
3
Setting by Teach-in
11th beam
10th beam
Allowable beam (10th and 11th beams)
Fixed Blanking zone (4th to 11th beams)
5th beam
4th beam
Allowable beam (4th and 5the beams)
Lower
Lower
*2 If the setting value is not an allowable one, the setting is invalid. The following cases are judged as
invalid.
• All beams have been configured as a fixed blanking zone (including allowable beams).(Fig. 1)
• All beams except the beams at both ends have been configured as a fixed blanking zone. (Fig. 2)
• Both beams of the ends have been configured as a fixed blanking zone at the same time.
(Primary sensor only) (Fig. 3)
• The teach-in must be performed with at least 3 beams being blocked.(Fig. 4)
• When the teach-in is performed for more than one Fixed Blanking zones, there must be at least 3
beams between the blocking objects.(Fig. 5)
• Four or more areas have been configured as fixed blanking zones for one channel.
Upper
Upper
Lower
Upper
Lower
Lower
Fig. 1
SEQ
BLANK
Upper
Lower
Upper
Lower
Fig. 2
Teach-in setting is valid
LED Indicator
Upper
Lower
Fig. 3
Upper
Upper
Lower
Lower
Fig. 4
Upper
Upper
Lower
Lower
Fig. 5
Teach-in setting is invalid
Status
OFF
ON
LED Indicator
SEQ
BLANK
Status
Blink
OFF
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
113
Setting with DIP Switch
Teach-in setting is valid
LED Indicator
Teach-in setting is invalid
Status
CFG
LED Indicator
Blink
Status
CFG
Blink
(5) Restart
Press and hold the reset switch (for 1 s or longer) or power cycle the F3SG-RA to enable and activate
the setting. Check if the Fixed Blanking zone is properly configured.
 Others
Chapter
• When the teach-in is performed with the all Fixed Blanking zone being unblocked, the Fixed Blanking
is configured as Disabled. Teach-in is available under cascade connection as well. In such a case,
3
use the primary sensor's Push Switch to perform teach-in with the similar steps.
Setting by Teach-in
• When the F3SG-RA is in the cascade connection, the teach-in setting is performed for each channel
independently. This allows different F3SG-RA's to have different teach-in settings depending on the
position or size of the blocking object. For example, when the F3SG-RA at Channel 1 is blocked, that
F3SG-RA only has the Fixed Blanking setting.
Upper
Upper
Upper
11th beam
10th beam
Upper
11th beam
10th beam
Fixed Blanking zone
5th beam
4th beam
Fixed Blanking zone
5th beam
4th beam
Lower
Upper
Lower
Fixed Blanking zone:
4th to 11th beams
Allowable beam:
2 lower beams/2 upper beams
4th & 5th beams
10th & 11th beams
Upper
Lower
Upper
Lower
Fixed Blanking zone:
4th to 11th beams
Allowable beam:
2 lower beams/2 upper beams
4th & 5th beams
10th & 11th beams
Upper
13th beam
12th beam
Fixed Blanking zone
7th beam
6th beam
Lower
Lower
Fixed Blanking zone:
6th to 13th beams
Allowable beam:
2 lower beams/2 upper beams
6th & 7th beams
12th & 13th beams
Fixed Blanking: Disabled
Lower
Lower
• The teach-in result for Fixed Blanking and Floating Blanking cannot be saved together. When the
Teach-in is ferformed for Floating Blanking, the result of the teach-in for Fixed Blanking is cleared.
114
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Setting with DIP Switch
3-3-2. Setting Floating Blanking by Teach-in
 Overview
You can teach-in the floating blanking setting by interrupting with an object to monitor by floating
blanking. The teach-in task is performed using the Push Switch.
After completion of teach-in, check that the configuration have been properly done.
Chapter
 Teach-In Steps
Perform the teach-in setting of floating blanking based on the following steps.
3
(1) Beam Adjustment
Setting by Teach-in
(2) DIP Switch Setting
(3) Transition to Teach-in Mode
(4) Result Check Process
(5) Restart
(1) Beam Adjustment
Adjust the beams of the emitter and receiver for synchronization.
For detailed beam adjustment steps, see 4-4-4. Beam Alignment Procedure.
Misalignment during teach-in may result in an unintended setting or a failure of teach-in.
(2) DIP Switch Setting
When the power of the F3SG-RA is turned OFF, set the Blanking setting (Position 5 and 6) of the DIP
Switch as "Floating Blanking Enabled" and the DIP Switch/Configuration Tool Selection setting
(Position 8) as "DIP Switch Enabled". And then turn the power of the F3SG-RA on.
Block the target Floating Blanking zone by an object. Do not remove the object until the Step (4) is
complete.
The object must be no smaller than the object resolution.
Rfer to 3-2-1. DIP Switch on Receiver for more information.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
115
Setting with DIP Switch
(3) Transition to Teach-in Mode
Press and hold the Push Switch (for 3 s or longer) to make the F3SG-RA transition to Teach-in Mode.
Upon transition the scan is started for the blocked location. Move the blocking object in parallel with the
F3SG-RA.
The object of the size of at least 3 beams must be moved. Failure to do so will result in a failure of
allowable beam setting.
Chapter
3
Setting by Teach-in
When transitioned to Teach-in Mode, "CFG" and "BLANK" indicators blink.
(The mode transition to Teach-in Mode does not occur if the setting of the DIP Switch is configured as
"Floating Blanking Disabled" or "Configuration Tool Enabled")
LED Indicator
SEQ
Status
OFF
BLANK
Blink
CFG
Blink
(4) Result Check Process
Press the Push Switch (for within 1 s) automatically configures the floating blanking setting based on
the scan result.*1
The determined setting is processed for valid/invalid judgment process in the sensor.
If the setting is valid, "BLANK" indicator stays on.
If the setting is invalid*2, "SEQ" indicator blinks. In this case, try the steps again from (3).
Teach-in setting is valid
LED Indicator
SEQ
116
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Teach-in setting is invalid
Status
OFF
LED Indicator
SEQ
BLANK
ON
BLANK
CFG
Blink
CFG
Status
Blink
OFF
Blink
Setting with DIP Switch
*1 The number of blanked beams is configured with the maximum number of interrupted beams in the
teach-in process (steps (3) to (4)).
Allowable beams are is configured with (Maximum interrupted beams - Minimum interrupted beams)
in the teach-in process.
The blanking monitoring function is configured as lockout.
*2 If the setting value is not an allowable one, the setting is invalid. The following cases are judged as
invalid.
• The number of blanked beams is configured as one (1), or nine (9) or more.
Chapter
• The number of allowable beams is configured as three (3) or more.
• The number of blanked beams is the same as that of sensor beams.
• Number of allowable beams >= Number of blanked beams
• Teach-in is started when an object does not exist.
3
• Beam-blocked state is detected discontinuously in the teach-in process.
Setting by Teach-in
• The blocking object is removed until the steps (3) to (4) are completed.
(5) Restart
Pressing and holding the reset switch (for 1 s or longer) or restarting the power enables and activates
the setting. Check if the setting has been properly configured.
 Others
• Be sure to perform the teach-in setting of floating blanking while moving the interrupting object.
• If teach-in is performed with all areas receiving light, floating blanking is configured as invalid.
• Teach-in is available under cascade connection as well. In such a case, use the primary sensor's
Push Switch to perform teach-in with the similar steps.
• If teach-in is performed with a cascade connection, teach-in setting is configured for each channel
independently. If sizes of blocking objects are different, settings are configured differently for sensors
as well. For example, if only the Channel 1 sensor is interrupted, the blanking setting is configured for
the Channel 1 only. Other sensors than the Channel 1 work as normal detection zone.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
117
Setting with DIP Switch
Floating Blanking
Disabled
Blanked Beams
5 beams
Blanked Beams
5 beams
Chapter
Blanked Beams
4 beams
3
Setting by Teach-in
118
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Chapter 4 Wiring/Installation
4-1. Installation Considerations
121
122
4-1-3. Distance from Reflective Surfaces
126
4-1-4. Mutual Interference Prevention
127
4-2. Cascade Connection
129
4-2-1. Overview
129
4-2-2. Connection Procedure
131
4-3. Dimensions
4-3-1. Mounted with Standard Fixed Brackets (F39-LGF)
132
Wiring/Installation
4-1-2. Safety Distance
4
121
Chapter
4-1-1. Detection Zone and Approach
132
4-3-1-1. F3SG-RA Series
132
4-3-1-2. F3SG-RE Series
134
4-3-1-3. Standard Fixed Bracket
136
4-3-2. Mounted with Standard Adjustable Brackets (F39-LGA)137
4-3-2-1. F3SG-RA Series
137
4-3-2-2. F3SG-RE Series
139
4-3-2-3. Standard Adjustable Bracket
141
4-3-3. Mounted with Top/Bottom Adjustable Brackets (F39-LGTB)
and Standard Adjustable Brackets (F39-LGA)
142
4-3-3-1. F3SG-RA Series
142
4-3-3-2. F3SG-RE Series
148
4-3-3-3. Top/Bottom Adjustable Bracket (F39-LGTB)
152
4-3-3-4. Top/Bottom Adjustable Bracket (F39-LGTB-1)
152
4-4. Mounting
153
4-4-1. Mounting Method
153
4-4-2. Number of Brackets Required
153
4-4-3. Mounting Procedure
154
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
119
Wiring/Installation
4-4-3-1. Mounting with Standard Fixed Brackets (F39-LGF)154
4-4-3-2. Mounting with Standard Adjustable Brackets (F39-LGA) 155
4-4-3-3. Mounting with Top/Bottom Adjustable Brackets (F39LGTB)
159
4-4-4. Beam Alignment Procedure
4-5. Wiring
162
163
4-5-1. Wiring Precautions
163
4-5-2. Power Supply Unit
164
4-5-3. Cable Connections(F3SG-RA Series)
165
Chapter
4-5-3-1. Single-Ended Cable
165
4-5-3-2. Double-Ended Cable
166
4-5-3-3. Cascading Cable
168
4
4-5-3-4. Extending Cable Length with Commercially Available Cable 169
4-5-3-5. Reduced Wiring Connector System with Y-Joint Plug/
Socket Connector
169
4-5-4. Cable Connections(F3SG-RE Series)
4-5-4-1. Recommended Cable
173
173
4-5-4-2. Extending Cable Length with Commercially Available Cable 174
4-5-4-3. Reduced Wiring Connector System
4-5-5. Functional Earth Connection
120
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
174
175
Wiring/Installation
4-1. Installation Considerations
4-1-1. Detection Zone and Approach
Install a protective structure so that the hazardous part of a machine can only be reached by
passing through the sensor's detection zone. If access to the hazardous part by reaching over
the detection zone of a vertically mounted F3SG-R cannot be excluded, the height of the
detection zone and the safety distance shall be determined in consideration of such a risk.
Install the sensors so that part of the person is always present in the detection zone when
working in a machine's hazardous zones. If a person is able to step into the hazardous zone of
a machine and remain behind the F3SG-R's detection zone, configure the system with Restart
Interlock function. Failure to do so may result in serious injury due to unexpected startup.
Chapter
Do not use this sensor for machines that cannot be stopped by electrical control. For
example, do not use it for a pressing machine that uses a full-rotation clutch. Otherwise,
the machine may not stop before a person reaches the hazardous part, resulting in
serious injury.
4
Installation Considerations
To use the F3SG-R in PSDI mode (Reinitiation of cyclic operation by the protective equipment), you
must configure an appropriate circuit between the F3SG-R and the machine. For details about
PSDI, refer to OSHA1910.217, IEC61496-1, and other relevant standards and regulations.
Install the reset switch in a location that provides a clear view of the entire hazardous
zone and where it cannot be activated from within the hazardous zone.
Do not use the F3SG-R in environments where flammable or explosive gases are present. Doing so may cause an explosion.
The F3SG-R cannot protect a person from an object flying from a hazardous zone. Install protective
cover(s) or fence(s).
Correct installation
The hazardous zone of a machine can be reached
only by passing through the sensor's detection zone.
While working, a person is inside
the sensor's detection zone.
Safety distance reflects the possible access to the
hazardous zone by reaching over the detection zone.
A person is between the sensor's detection
zone and the hazardous zone of a machine.
It is possible to access the hazardous zone
by reaching over the detection zone.
Incorrect installation
It is possible to reach the hazardous zone of a machine
without passing through the sensor's detection zone.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
121
Wiring/Installation
4-1-2. Safety Distance
The safety distance is the distance that must be set between the F3SG-R and a machine's hazardous
part to stop the hazardous part before a person or object reaches it. The safety distance varies
according to the standards of each country and the individual specifications of each machine. Always
refer to the relevant standards.
Make sure to secure the safety distance (S) between the F3SG-R and the hazardous part.
Otherwise, the machine may not stop before a person reaches the hazardous part, resulting in serious injury.
The response time of a machine is the time period from when the machine receives a stop signal to when the machine's
hazardous part stops. Measure the response time on the actual system. Also, periodically check that the response time
of the machine has not changed.
4
Detection Zone Orthogonal to Direction of Approach
Installation Considerations
Chapter
4-1-2-1. Safety Distance Formulas according to ISO 13855/EN ISO 13855
S = K x T + C . . . Formula (1)
Safety distance (S)
•S: Safety distance
•K: Approach speed to the detection zone
•T: Total response time of the machine and F3SG-R
•C: Additional distance calculated by the detection capability
(or object resolution) of the F3SG-R
Hazard
Calculation Example for Systems with a Resolution of 
30 mm
Use K = 2,000 mm/s and C = 8 x (d - 14 mm) in formula (1)
for the calculation.
S = 2,000 mm/s x (Tm + Ts) + 8 x (d - 14 mm)
•S = Safety distance (mm)
•Tm = Machine's response time (s)
•Ts = Response time of the F3SG-R from ON to OFF (s)
•d = Detection capability (or object resolution) of the F3SG-R (mm)
[Calculation example]
When Tm = 0.05 s, Ts = 0.08 s, and d = 14 mm:
S=2,000 mm/s x (0.05 s + 0.08 s) + 8 x (14 mm - 14 mm)
= 116 mm . . . Formula (2)
If the result < 100 mm, use S = 100 mm.
If the result exceeds 500 mm, use the following expression where K = 1,600 mm/s.
S=1,600 mm/s x (Tm + Ts) + 8 x (d - 14 mm) . . . Formula (3)
If the result of this formula (3) < 500 mm, use S = 500 mm.
Possible Circumventing by Reaching Over the Detection Zone
If access to the hazardous zone by reaching over the detection zone of vertically mounted F3SG-R
cannot be excluded, the height and the safety distance, S, of the F3SG-R shall be determined. S shall
122
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Wiring/Installation
be determined by comparison of the calculated values in Detection Zone Orthogonal to Direction of
Approach. The greater value resulting from this comparison shall be applied.
S=(K × T) + Cro . . . Formula (4)
• S: Safety distance
• K: Approach speed to the detection zone
• T: Total response time of the machine and FSG-R
Hazard
• Cro: Approach distance based on the distance which
personnel can move towards the hazardous zone of a
machine by reaching over the detection zone. The distance
Safety
distance (S)
b
a
is determined in the table below based on the height of the
300 mm max.
hazardous zone, a, and the height of the upper edge of the
detection zone, b.
Chapter
Reference plane
Note: Lower edge of the detection zone above 300 mm in
4
relation to the reference plane does not offer sufficient
First, use K = 2,000 mm/s in formula (4) for the calculation. If the result of this calculation is less than
100 mm, use S = 100 mm.
If the result exceeds 500 mm, use K = 1,600 mm/s to recalculate it. If the result of the recalculation is
less than 500 mm, use S = 500 mm.
Height of
hazardou
s zone, a
Height of upper edge of detection zone, b
900
1000
1100
1200
1300
1400
1600
1800
2000
2200
2400
2600
Additional distance to hazardous zone, Cro
2600
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2500
400
400
350
300
300
300
300
300
250
150
100
0
2400
550
550
550
500
450
450
400
400
300
250
100
0
2200
800
750
750
700
650
650
600
550
400
250
0
0
2000
950
950
850
850
800
750
700
550
400
0
0
0
1800
1100
1100
950
950
850
800
750
550
0
0
0
0
1600
1150
1150
1100
1000
900
850
750
450
0
0
0
0
1400
1200
1200
1100
1000
900
850
650
0
0
0
0
0
1200
1200
1200
1100
1000
850
800
0
0
0
0
0
0
1000
1200
1150
1050
950
750
700
0
0
0
0
0
0
800
1150
1050
950
800
500
450
0
0
0
0
0
0
600
1050
950
750
550
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
400
900
700
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
200
600
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Installation Considerations
protection against crawling below.
Note 1. Upper edge of the detection zone below 900 mm is not included since they do not offer
sufficient protection against circumventing or stepping over.
Note 2. When determining the values of this table, it shall not be interpolated. If the known values a, b
or Cro are between two values of this table, the greater safety distance shall be used.
[Calculation example]
• T: Tm + Ts (s)
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
123
Wiring/Installation
• Tm: Machine's response time (s)
• Ts: Response time of the F3SG-R from ON to OFF (s)
• a: Height of machine hazardous zone (mm)
• b: Height of upper edge of detection zone (mm)
When Tm = 0.05 s, Ts = 0.008 s, a = 1,400 mm, b = 1,500 m:
From the table above, Cro = 850 mm. Since b is between 1,400 mm and 1,600 mm, b = 1,400
mm which has the greater Cro value, shall be used.
S = 2,000 mm/s × (0.05 s + 0.008 s) + 850 mm
= 966 mm
Since 966 mm is greater than 500 mm, use K = 1,600 mm/s and recalculate it.
S = 1,600 m/s × (0.05 s + 0.008 s) + 850 mm
= 942.8 mm
Chapter
Since S = 942.8 mm is greater than S = 116 mm calculated by the calculation example of
Detection Zone Orthogonal to Direction of Approach, the required safety distance S is 942.9 mm.
4
Installation Considerations
Refer to Detection Zone Orthogonal to Direction of Approach under 4-1-2-1. Safety Distance
Formulas according to ISO 13855/EN ISO 13855.
Detection Zone Parallel to Direction of Approach
Use K = 1,600 mm/s and C = (1200 - 0.4 x H) in
formula (1) for calculation. Note that C must not be
less than 850 mm.
S = 1,600 mm/s x (Tm + Ts) + 1200 - 0.4 x H
Hazard
Safety distance (S)
• S = Safety distance (mm)
• Tm = Machine's response time (s)
• Ts = Response time of F3SG-R from ON to OFF
(s)
+
• H = Installation height (mm)
Note that H must satisfy:
1000 >= H >= 15 (d - 50 mm)
Also, you must include a hazardous condition under which a person may go through under a detection
zone if H exceeds 300 mm (200 mm for other purpose than industrial use) into risk assessment.
[Calculation example]
When Tm = 0.05 s, Ts = 0.08 s, and d = 14 mm:
S = 1,600 mm/s x (0.05 s + 0.08 s) + 1200 - 0.4 x 500 mm
= 1092.8 mm
When a warning zone is configured as in the figure, you must calculate L, a distance from an end of
casing to a detection zone, using a formula below:
L = (Total number of F3SG-R beams - number of warning zone beams - 1) x P + 10
124
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Wiring/Installation
• P: Beam Gap (mm)
F3SG-RA-14 . . . 10 mm
F3SG-RA-30 . . . 20 mm
Hazard
Refer to 1-6-1. List of Models/Response Time/
Current Consumption/Weight for total number of
F3SG-R beams.
Safety
distance (S)
Detection
zone
Warning
zone
H
Distance L from casing end
to detection zone
If a person approaches the detection zone of the F3SG-R orthogonally, calculate the safety distance as
shown below.
4
S = K x (Ts + Tc + Tr + Tbm) + Dpf
Installation Considerations
Chapter
4-1-2-2. Safety Distance Formulas according to ANSI B11.19
• S: Safety distance
• K: Approach speed to the detection zone (the value recommended by OSHA standard is 1,600 mm/
s)
Approach speed K is not specified in the ANSI B.11.19 standard. To determine the value of K to apply,
consider all factors, including the operator's physical ability.
• Ts = Machine's stopping time (s)
• Tr = Response time of the F3SG-R from ON to OFF (s)
• Tc = Machine control circuit's maximum response time required to activate its brake (s)
• Tbm = Additional time (s)
If a machine has a brake monitor, "Tbm= Brake monitor setting time - (Ts + Tc)". If it has no brake
monitor, we recommend using 20% or more of (Ts + Tc) as additional time.
• Dpf = Additional distance
According to ANSI's formula, Dpf is calculated as shown below:
Dpf = 3.4 x (d - 7.0): Where d is the detection capability (or object resolution) of the F3SG-R (unit: mm)
[Calculation example]
When K = 1,600 mm/s, Ts + Tc = 0.06 s, brake monitor setting time = 0.1 s,
Tr = 0.008 s, and d = 14 mm:
Tbm = 0.1 - 0.06 = 0.04 s
Dpf = 3.4 x (14 - 7.0) = 23.8 mm
S = 1,600 x (0.06 + 0.008 + 0.04) + 23.8 = 196.6 mm
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
125
Wiring/Installation
4-1-3. Distance from Reflective Surfaces
Install the sensor system so that it is not affected by reflective surfaces. Failure to do so
may hinder detection, resulting in serious injury.
Install the sensor system at distance D or further from highly reflective surfaces such as metallic walls,
floors, ceilings, or workpieces, as shown below.
4-1-3-1. F3SG-4R (Type 4 ESPE)
Chapter
Reflective ceiling
4
Emitter
Installation Considerations
126
D
Reflective surface
Receiver
Emitter
Detection zone
L
D
Reflective floor
Distance between an emitter and a
receiver (operating range L)
Allowable installation distance
D
0.3 to less than 3 m
0.13 m
3 m or more
L/2 x tan5 ° = L x 0.044 m
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
5
D
L
5
Receiver
Wiring/Installation
4-1-4. Mutual Interference Prevention
Do not use the sensor system with mirrors in a retro-reflective configuration. Doing so
may hinder detection. It is possible to use mirrors to alter the detection zone to a 90degree angle.
When using more than 1 set of F3SG-R in adjacent areas, the emitter of one F3SG-R
may interfere with the receiver of the other, causing the safety functions to stop working
properly. Install and configure them so that mutual interference does not occur.
When two or more F3SG-RA or F3SG-RE systems are mounted in close proximity to each other,
back-to-back configuration, physical barrier, Scan Code Selection (for F3SG-RA only) or Operating
Range Selection.
4
 Example
Chapter
precautions should be taken to avoid one system interfering with another, such as by beam alignment,
Machine 1
Machine 2
Code A*
Code A*
Machine 1
Machine 2
Code A*
Back-to-back configuration
Receiver
Emitter
Emitter
Receiver
PREFERRED INSTALLATION 2
Emitter
Receiver
Receiver
Emitter
Installation Considerations
PREFERRED INSTALLATION 1
Code A*
Physical barrier between systems
Machine 1
Receiver
Emitter
Emitter
Receiver
NOT RECOMMENDED INSTALLATION
Machine 2
Code A*
Code A*
The scan code feature* of the F3SG-RA system allows for placement of systems in close proximity and
in line with each other. The distinctive coding of the beams provide for unique operation of a system
while in view of another system with a different scan code. Two unique codes are available on the
Machine 1
Receiver
Emitter
Receiver
Emitter
F3SG-RA.
Machine 2
Code B*
Code A*
Scan code setting when two or more systems are mounted
The emitter and receiver units must be set to the same scan code for the receiver to enter the Machine
Run state. The scan code is selectable by the DIP Switch on the emitter and receiver units.
E
* The scan code feature is not available for the F3SG-RE series.
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
127
Wiring/Installation
Refer to 2-4. Scan Code Selection for more information on the scan code feature.
Refer to 3-2. DIP Switch for more information on setting the scan code by the DIP Switch.
Chapter
4
Installation Considerations
128
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Wiring/Installation
4-2. Cascade Connection
F3SG-RA Series
X
F3SG-RE Series
The F3SG-RE cannot be used in cascade connection.
4-2-1. Overview
Up to 3 sets of F3SG-RA can be series-connected. Cascade connection allows them to be used as a a
safety light curtain, requiring only 1 set to be wired to a controller and preventing mutual interference.
• Total number of beams: Up to 255 beams
Chapter
• Cable length between sensors: Up to 10 m
4
If any 1 set of series-connected F3SG-RA is blocked, both of the safety outputs turn OFF.
• Number of connections: Up to 3 sets
Cascade Connection
Example: Configuring an U-shaped detection zone
The sensor segments in a cascade connection are called as follows:
Secondary
sensor 2 (Channel 3)
Secondary
sensor 1 (Channel 2)
Primary
sensor (Channel 1)
The cascaded segments operate according to the DIP Switch settings of the primary sensor. The DIP Switch settings of
the primary sensor do not affect the operation.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
129
Wiring/Installation
Properly connect an emitter to another emitter, and a receiver to another receiver, as shown below.
Do not series-connect an emitter and receiver.
They will enter lockout state.
Chapter
Secondary
sensor 1
(Emitter)
Secondary
sensor 1
(Receiver)
Secondary
sensor 1
(Emitter)
Secondary
sensor 1
(Receiver)
Primary
sensor
(Emitter)
Primary
sensor
(Emitter)
Primary
sensor
(Receiver)
Primary
sensor
(Receiver)
Primary
sensor
(Emitter)
Secondary
sensor 1
(Emitter)
4
Cascade Connection
130
Do not face different models of emitters and
receivers toward each other. They will enter
lockout state or will be unable to detect objects
Secondary
sensor 1
(Receiver)
Primary
sensor
(Receiver)
If caps and Cascading Cables are not connected properly, the F3SG-RA enters lockout (when power is turned ON).
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Wiring/Installation
4-2-2. Connection Procedure
1. Remove the caps from the primary sensor. Loosen the screw (M3 cross-shaped) to remove the cap.
2. Connect the the the primary sensor and the secondary sensor with the F39-JGR2W Cascading Cable
(sold separately).
3. If the length of the Cascading Cable is insufficient, connect the F39-JGB- Double-Ended Cable
(sold separately) between the Cascading Cable and the power cable of the secondary sensor, as
required. (Cable length between sensors: 10 m max.)
<Secondary sensor>
Chapter
4
Emitter power cable
Cascade Connection
Receiver power cable
3.
Double-Ended Cable F39-JGB-L
2.
Cascading Cable F39-JGR2W-L
1.
End Cap
<Primary sensor>
3.
Double-Ended Cable F39-JGB-D
2.
Cascading Cable F39-JGR2W-D
1.
End Cap
Emitter power cable
Receiver power cable
- When attaching a cable or cap, securely fasten the screws (M2.5, recommended torque: 0.35 N•m).
Failure to do so may cause the cable/cap to come loose, leading to deterioration of the protective functions.
- Attaching/detaching of the cap and the Cascading Cable may cause misalignment of rubber grommet in the connector
assembly. Press the grommet to the bottom of the connector and attach the connector to the sensor again.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
131
Wiring/Installation
4-3. Dimensions
4-3-1. Mounted with Standard Fixed Brackets (F39-LGF)
4-3-1-1. F3SG-RA Series
50.35
 Backside Mounting
40
Chapter
Standard Fixed
Bracket
(F39-LGF)
150 max
35
150 max
35
2-M5 or M6
F
A
A
C1 (Protective height for 30 mm)
6.4
51
66
51
D
F
Dimensions
C2 (Protective height for 14 mm)
51
4
Standard Fixed
Bracket
(F39-LGF)
18
33
P
43
150 max
24.85
24.85
150 max
2-M5 or M6
9.2
< Screw: M5 or M6 >
[ Unit : mm ]
F3SG-RA-30 Series
Dimension A
F3SG-RA-14 Series
C1+18
Dimension A
C2+48
Dimension C1
4-digit number of the type name
(Protective height)
Dimension C2
4-digit number of the type name
(Protective height)
Dimension D
C1-50
Dimension D
C2-20
Dimension P
20
Dimension P
10
Protective height
(C1)
Number of Standard
Fixed Brackets *
Dimension F
Protective height
(C2)
Number of Standard
Fixed Brackets *
Dimension F
0190 to 1230
2
1000 mm max.
0160 to 1200
2
1000 mm max.
1310 to 2270
3
1000 mm max.
1280 to 2080
3
1000 mm max.
2350 to 2510
4
1000 mm max.
* The number of brackets required to mount either one of emitter and receiver.
4-4-3-1. Mounting with Standard Fixed Brackets (F39-LGF)
- Use the brackets of specified quantities and locations according to the dimensions. The other brackets than described
above may not meet the specified ratings and performance.
- When you use the sensor in a situation where the sensor is under a load, increase the number of the brackets used.
- The Standard Fixed Bracket does not allow beam alignment.
132
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Wiring/Installation
50.35
 Side Mounting
40
150 max
150 max
35
35
2-M5 or M6
F
F
A
A
6.4
51
66
51
Dimensions
C1 (Protective height for 30 mm)
4
D
Chapter
Standard Fixed
Bracket
(F39-LGF)
C2 (Protective height for 14 mm)
51
Standard Fixed
Bracket
(F39-LGF)
18
33
150 max
P
43
42.35
150 max
2-M5 or M6
9.2
< Screw: M5 or M6 >
[ Unit : mm ]
F3SG-RA-30 Series
Dimension A
F3SG-RA-14 Series
C1+18
Dimension A
C2+48
Dimension C1
4-digit number of the type name
(Protective height)
Dimension C2
4-digit number of the type name
(Protective height)
Dimension D
C1-50
Dimension D
C2-20
Dimension P
20
Dimension P
10
Protective height
(C1)
Number of Standard
Fixed Brackets *
Dimension F
Protective height
(C2)
Number of Standard
Fixed Brackets *
Dimension F
0190 to 1230
2
1000 mm max.
0160 to 1200
2
1000 mm max.
1310 to 2270
3
1000 mm max.
1280 to 2080
3
1000 mm max.
2350 to 2510
4
1000 mm max.
* The number of brackets required to mount either one of emitter and receiver.
4-4-3-1. Mounting with Standard Fixed Brackets (F39-LGF)
- Use the brackets of specified quantities and locations according to the dimensions. The other brackets than described
above may not meet the specified ratings and performance.
- When you use the sensor in a situation where the sensor is under a load, increase the number of the brackets used.
- The Standard Fixed Bracket does not allow beam alignment.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
133
Wiring/Installation
4-3-1-2. F3SG-RE Series
50.35
 Backside Mounting
150 max
2-M5 or M6
F
150 max
2-M5 or M6
9.2
24.85
24.85
25
15
P
150 max
6.4
Dimensions
66
51
A
4
Standard Fixed
Bracket
(F39-LGF)
51
F
Chapter
D
C2 (Protective height for 14 mm)
C1 (Protective height for 30 mm)
A
51
Standard Fixed
Bracket
(F39-LGF)
150 max
35
40
35
< Screw: M5 or M6 >
[ Unit : mm ]
F3SG-RE30 Series
Dimension A
F3SG-RE14 Series
C1
Dimension A
C2+30
Dimension C1
4-digit number of the type name
(Protective height)
Dimension C2
4-digit number of the type name
(Protective height)
Dimension D
C1-50
Dimension D
C2-20
Dimension P
20
Dimension P
10
Protective height
(C1)
Number of Standard
Fixed Brackets *
Dimension F
Protective height
(C2)
Number of Standard
Fixed Brackets *
Dimension F
0190 to 1230
2
1000 mm max.
0160 to 1200
2
1000 mm max.
1310 to 2270
3
1000 mm max.
1280 to 2080
3
1000 mm max.
2350 to 2510
4
1000 mm max.
* The number of brackets required to mount either one of emitter and receiver.
4-4-3-1. Mounting with Standard Fixed Brackets (F39-LGF)
- Use the brackets of specified quantities and locations according to the dimensions. The other brackets than described
above may not meet the specified ratings and performance.
- When you use the sensor in a situation where the sensor is under a load, increase the number of the brackets used.
- The Standard Fixed Bracket does not allow beam alignment.
134
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Wiring/Installation
50.35
 Side Mounting
40
35
2-M5 or M6
F
A
F
25
15
P
9.2
42.35
2-M5 or M6
150 max
150 max
6.4
51
Dimensions
51
66
4
Standard Fixed
Bracket
(F39-LGF)
Chapter
D
C2 (Protective height for 14 mm)
C1 (Protective height for 30 mm)
A
51
Standard Fixed
Bracket
(F39-LGF)
150 max
150 max
35
< Screw: M5 or M6 >
[ Unit : mm ]
F3SG-RE30 Series
Dimension A
F3SG-RE14 Series
C1
Dimension A
C2+30
Dimension C1
4-digit number of the type name
(Protective height)
Dimension C2
4-digit number of the type name
(Protective height)
Dimension D
C1-50
Dimension D
C2-20
Dimension P
20
Dimension P
10
Protective height
(C1)
Number of Standard
Fixed Brackets *
Dimension F
Protective height
(C2)
Number of Standard
Fixed Brackets *
Dimension F
0190 to 1230
2
1000 mm max.
0160 to 1200
2
1000 mm max.
1310 to 2270
3
1000 mm max.
1280 to 2080
3
1000 mm max.
2350 to 2510
4
1000 mm max.
* The number of brackets required to mount either one of emitter and receiver.
4-4-3-1. Mounting with Standard Fixed Brackets (F39-LGF)
- Use the brackets of specified quantities and locations according to the dimensions. The other brackets than described
above may not meet the specified ratings and performance.
- When you use the sensor in a situation where the sensor is under a load, increase the number of the brackets used.
- The Standard Fixed Bracket does not allow beam alignment.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
135
Wiring/Installation
4-3-1-3. Standard Fixed Bracket
36
(25.8)
(23.1)
8
Chapter
6.4
51
4
[ Unit : mm ]
Material: ZDC2
Dimensions
136
9.2
32.1
66
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Wiring/Installation
4-3-2. Mounted with Standard Adjustable Brackets (F39-LGA)
4-3-2-1. F3SG-RA Series
50.35
 Backside Mounting
48.6
35
35
150 max
2-M5 or M6
150 max
Chapter
F
A
A
C1 (Protective height for 30 mm)
D
C2 (Protective height for 14 mm)
2-M5 or M6
24.85
18
33
P
24.85
150 max
9.2
43
150 max
6.4
72
72
84
Dimensions
Standard Adjustable
Bracket
(F39-LGA)
4
F
72
Standard Adjustable
Bracket
(F39-LGA)
< Screw: M5 or M6 >
[ Unit : mm ]
F3SG-RA-30 Series
Dimension A
F3SG-RA-14 Series
C1+18
Dimension A
C2+48
Dimension C1
4-digit number of the type name
(Protective height)
Dimension C2
4-digit number of the type name
(Protective height)
Dimension D
C1-50
Dimension D
C2-20
Dimension P
20
Dimension P
10
Protective height
(C1)
Number of Standard
Adjustable Brackets *
Dimension F
Protective height
(C2)
Number of Standard
Adjustable Brackets *
Dimension F
0190 to 1230
2
1000 mm max.
0160 to 1200
2
1000 mm max.
1310 to 2270
3
1000 mm max.
1280 to 2080
3
1000 mm max.
2350 to 2510
4
1000 mm max.
* The number of brackets required to mount either one of emitter and receiver.
4-4-3-2. Mounting with Standard Adjustable Brackets (F39-LGA)
- Use the brackets of specified quantities and locations according to the dimensions. The other brackets than described
above may not meet the specified ratings and performance.
- When you use the sensor in a situation where the sensor is under a load, increase the number of the brackets used.
- The Standard Adjustable Bracket allows beam alignment after fixing the bracket to a wall surface. The angle adjustment
E
range of the Standard Adjustable Brackets is ±15°.
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
137
Wiring/Installation
50.35
 Side Mounting
48.6
35
2-M5 or M6
150 max
150 max
35
A
F
F
18
33
43
42.35
2-M5 or M6
150 max
P
9.2
150 max
6.4
72
72
Dimensions
84
A
C1 (Protective height for 30mm)
4
D
Chapter
Standard Adjustable
Bracket
(F39-LGA)
C2 (Protective height for 14mm)
72
Standard Adjustable
Bracket
(F39-LGA)
< Screw: M5 or M6 >
[ Unit : mm ]
F3SG-RA-30 Series
Dimension A
F3SG-RA-14 Series
C1+18
Dimension A
C2+48
Dimension C1
4-digit number of the type name
(Protective height)
Dimension C2
4-digit number of the type name
(Protective height)
Dimension D
C1-50
Dimension D
C2-20
Dimension P
20
Dimension P
10
Protective height
(C1)
Number of Standard
Adjustable Brackets *
Dimension F
Protective height
(C2)
Number of Standard
Adjustable Brackets *
Dimension F
0190 to 1230
2
1000 mm max.
0160 to 1200
2
1000 mm max.
1310 to 2270
3
1000 mm max.
1280 to 2080
3
1000 mm max.
2350 to 2510
4
1000 mm max.
* The number of brackets required to mount either one of emitter and receiver.
4-4-3-2. Mounting with Standard Adjustable Brackets (F39-LGA)
- Use the brackets of specified quantities and locations according to the dimensions. The other brackets than described
above may not meet the specified ratings and performance.
- When you use the sensor in a situation where the sensor is under a load, increase the number of the brackets used.
- The Standard Adjustable Bracket allows beam alignment after fixing the bracket to a wall surface. The angle adjustment
range of the Standard Adjustable Brackets is ±15°.
138
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Wiring/Installation
4-3-2-2. F3SG-RE Series
50.35
 Backside Mounting
48.6
35
2-M5 or M6
F
A
F
2-M5 or M6
24.85
150 max
9.2
24.85
25
15
P
150 max
6.4
72
Dimensions
84
72
4
Standard Adjustable
Bracket
(F39-LGA)
Chapter
D
C2 (Protective height for 14 mm)
C1 (Protective height for 30 mm)
A
72
Standard Adjustable
Bracket
(F39-LGA)
150 max
150 max
35
< Screw: M5 or M6 >
[ Unit : mm ]
F3SG-RE30 Series
Dimension A
F3SG-RE14 Series
C1
Dimension A
C2+30
Dimension C1
4-digit number of the type name
(Protective height)
Dimension C2
4-digit number of the type name
(Protective height)
Dimension D
C1-50
Dimension D
C2-20
Dimension P
20
Dimension P
10
Protective height
(C1)
Number of Standard
Adjustable Brackets *
Dimension F
Protective height
(C2)
Number of Standard
Adjustable Brackets *
Dimension F
0190 to 1230
2
1000 mm max.
0160 to 1200
2
1000 mm max.
1310 to 2270
3
1000 mm max.
1280 to 2080
3
1000 mm max.
2350 to 2510
4
1000 mm max.
* The number of brackets required to mount either one of emitter and receiver.
4-4-3-2. Mounting with Standard Adjustable Brackets (F39-LGA)
- Use the brackets of specified quantities and locations according to the dimensions. The other brackets than described
above may not meet the specified ratings and performance.
- When you use the sensor in a situation where the sensor is under a load, increase the number of the brackets used.
- The Standard Adjustable Bracket allows beam alignment after fixing the bracket to a wall surface. The angle adjustment
E
range of the Standard Adjustable Brackets is ±15°.
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
139
Wiring/Installation
50.35
 Side Mounting
48.6
35
F
A
F
150 max
2-M5 or M6
25
15
P
9.2
42.35
150 max
6.4
Dimensions
72
4
Standard Adjustable
Bracket
(F39-LGA)
72
84
Chapter
D
C2 (Protective height for 14 mm)
C1 (Protective height for 30 mm)
A
72
Standard Adjustable
Bracket
(F39-LGA)
2-M5 or M6
150 max
150 max
35
< Screw: M5 or M6 >
[ Unit : mm ]
F3SG-RE30 Series
Dimension A
F3SG-RE14 Series
C1
Dimension A
C2+30
Dimension C1
4-digit number of the type name
(Protective height)
Dimension C2
4-digit number of the type name
(Protective height)
Dimension D
C1-50
Dimension D
C2-20
Dimension P
20
Dimension P
10
Protective height
(C1)
Number of Standard
Adjustable Brackets *
Dimension F
Protective height
(C2)
Number of Standard
Adjustable Brackets *
Dimension F
0190 to 1230
2
1000 mm max.
0160 to 1200
2
1000 mm max.
1310 to 2270
3
1000 mm max.
1280 to 2080
3
1000 mm max.
2350 to 2510
4
1000 mm max.
* The number of brackets required to mount either one of emitter and receiver.
4-4-3-2. Mounting with Standard Adjustable Brackets (F39-LGA)
- Use the brackets of specified quantities and locations according to the dimensions. The other brackets than described
above may not meet the specified ratings and performance.
- When you use the sensor in a situation where the sensor is under a load, increase the number of the brackets used.
- The Standard Adjustable Bracket allows beam alignment after fixing the bracket to a wall surface. The angle adjustment
range of the Standard Adjustable Brackets is ±15°.
140
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Wiring/Installation
4-3-2-3. Standard Adjustable Bracket
42
45.1
34.5
31.8
9.2
8
32.9
84
6.4
[ Unit : mm ]
4
Material: ZDC2, Fluorochemical lubricant oil
Chapter
72
Dimensions
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
141
Wiring/Installation
4-3-3. Mounted with Top/Bottom Adjustable Brackets (F39-LGTB)
and Standard Adjustable Brackets (F39-LGA)
4-3-3-1. F3SG-RA Series
 F3SG-RA Series Except F3SG-4RA0190-30 and F3SG-4RA0160-14
[Backside Mounting]
35
38.5
2-M5 or M6
2-M8
4
4
25.75
26.5
23.2
48.6
8.2
Top/Bottom
Adjustable Bracket
(F39-LGTB)
6.5
53.25
2-S3
Backside : 2-S3
40.8
4
35
72
F
72
H
G
2-M5 or M6
2-M5 or M6
24.85
24.85
P
24.85
A
D
6.4
I
9.2
C1 (Protective height for 30 mm)
Dimensions
84
72
S2.5
G
4
Standard Adjustable
Bracket
(F39-LGA)
C2 (Protective height for 14 mm)
F
35
H
Chapter
13.6
46.5
33.75
18
33
43
12
Top/Bottom
Adjustable Bracket
(F39-LGTB)
<Screw for Top/Bottom Adjustable
Bracket: M5 or M6>
F3SG-RA-30 Series
Dimension A
Dimension C1
Dimension D
Dimension G
Dimension H
Dimension I
Dimension P
Optional
accessory not
connected
C1+18
4-digit number of the type
name (Protective height)
C1-50
C1+77.5
C1+103
C1+122
20
<Screw for Top/Bottom Adjustable
Bracket: M8>
[ Unit : mm ]
F3SG-RA-14 Series
Optional accessory connected*
F39-LP
F39-JGR2W
F39-BT
F39-BTLP
Same as on the left
Same as on the left
Same as on the left
C1+80.5
C1+91
C1+102.5
C1+106
C1+116.5
C1+128
C1+125
C1+135.5
C1+147
Same as on the left
Dimension A
Dimension C2
Dimension D
Dimension G
Dimension H
Dimension I
Dimension P
Optional
accessory not
connected
C2+48
4-digit number of the type
name (Protective height)
C2-20
C2+107.5
C2+133
C2+152
10
Optional accessory connected*
F39-LP
F39-BT
F39-BTLP
Same as on the left
F39-JGR2W
Same as on the left
Same as on the left
C2+110.5
C2+121
C2+132.5
C2+136
C2+146.5
C2+158
C2+155
C2+165.5
C2+177
Same as on the left
* Refer to  Connected with Optional Accessories under 4-3-3-1. F3SG-RA Series for more information on the dimensions when optional accessories are connected to the F3SG-RA.
Protective height
(C1)
0270 to 1070
1150 to 1950
2030 to 2510
Number of Top/Bottom
Adjustable Brackets*1
2
2
2
Number of Standard
Dimension F
Adjustable Brackets *1 *2
0
1
1000 mm max.
2
1000 mm max.
Protective height
(C2)
0240 to 1040
1120 to 1920
2000 to 2080
Number of Top/Bottom
Adjustable Brackets*1
2
2
2
Number of Standard
Dimension F
Adjustable Brackets *1 *2
0
1
1000 mm max.
2
1000 mm max.
*1. The number of brackets required to mount either one of emitter and receiver.
*2. The Top/Bottom Adjustable Bracket is not useable together with the Standard Fixed Bracket. When it is necessary to use it with another bracket, only
the combination with the Standard Adjustable Bracket is possible.
4-4-3-3. Mounting with Top/Bottom Adjustable Brackets (F39-LGTB)
- Use the brackets of specified quantities and locations according to the dimensions. The other brackets than described above may not meet the specified ratings and performance.
- When you use the sensor in a situation where the sensor is under a load, increase the number of the brackets used.
- The Top/Bottom Adjustable Bracket and Standard Adjustable Bracket allow beam alignment after fixing the bracket to a wall surface. The angle
adjustment range of the Top/Bottom Adjustable Brackets is ±22.5°. The angle adjustment range of the Standard Adjustable Brackets is ±15°.
142
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Wiring/Installation
[Side Mounting]
2-S3
50.35
35
Top/Bottom
Adjustable Bracket
(F39-LGTB)
4
38.5
25.75
8.2
51.65
2-M5 or M6
2-M8
6.5
4
26.5
23.2
Backside : 2-S3
40.8
F
72
H
72
G
C1 (Protective height for 30 mm)
18
A
D
C2 (Protective height for 14 mm)
33
I
H
G
9.2
Dimensions
6.4
S2.5
2-M5 or M6
2-M5 or M6
4
84
72
Standard
Adjustable Bracket
(F39-LGA)
Chapter
43
F
35
35
F
9.6
P
42.35
46.5
33.75
12
Top/Bottom
Adjustable Bracket
(F39-LGTB)
<Screw for Top/Bottom Adjustable
Bracket: M5 or M6>
F3SG-RA-30 Series
Dimension A
Dimension C1
Dimension D
Dimension G
Dimension H
Dimension I
Dimension P
Optional
accessory not
connected
C1+18
4-digit number of the type
name (Protective height)
C1-50
C1+77.5
C1+103
C1+122
20
<Screw for Top/Bottom Adjustable
Bracket: M8>
[ Unit : mm ]
F3SG-RA-14 Series
Optional accessory connected*
F39-LP
F39-JGR2W
F39-BT
F39-BTLP
Same as on the left
Same as on the left
Same as on the left
C1+80.5
C1+91
C1+102.5
C1+106
C1+116.5
C1+128
C1+125
C1+135.5
C1+147
Same as on the left
Dimension A
Dimension C2
Dimension D
Dimension G
Dimension H
Dimension I
Dimension P
Optional
accessory not
connected
C2+48
4-digit number of the type
name (Protective height)
C2-20
C2+107.5
C2+133
C2+152
10
Optional accessory connected*
F39-LP
F39-JGR2W
F39-BT
F39-BTLP
Same as on the left
Same as on the left
Same as on the left
C2+110.5
C2+121
C2+132.5
C2+136
C2+146.5
C2+158
C2+155
C2+165.5
C2+177
Same as on the left
* Refer to  Connected with Optional Accessories under 4-3-3-1. F3SG-RA Series for more information on the dimensions when optional accessories are connected to the F3SG-RA.
Protective height
(C1)
0270 to 1070
1150 to 1950
2030 to 2510
Number of Top/Bottom
Adjustable Brackets*1
2
2
2
Number of Standard
Dimension F
Adjustable Brackets *1 *2
0
1
1000 mm max.
2
1000 mm max.
Protective height
(C2)
0240 to 1040
1120 to 1920
2000 to 2080
Number of Top/Bottom
Adjustable Brackets*1
2
2
2
Number of Standard
Dimension F
Adjustable Brackets *1 *2
0
1
1000 mm max.
2
1000 mm max.
*1. The number of brackets required to mount either one of emitter and receiver.
*2. The Top/Bottom Adjustable Bracket is not useable together with the Standard Fixed Bracket. When it is necessary to use it with another bracket, only
the combination with the Standard Adjustable Bracket is possible.
4-4-3-3. Mounting with Top/Bottom Adjustable Brackets (F39-LGTB)
- Use the brackets of specified quantities and locations according to the dimensions. The other brackets than described
above may not meet the specified ratings and performance.
- When you use the sensor in a situation where the sensor is under a load, increase the number of the brackets used.
- The Top/Bottom Adjustable Bracket and Standard Adjustable Bracket allow beam alignment after fixing the bracket to a
wall surface. The angle adjustment range of the Top/Bottom Adjustable Brackets is ±22.5°. The angle adjustment range
of the Standard Adjustable Brackets is ±15°.
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
E
143
Wiring/Installation
 F3SG-4RA0190-30 and F3SG-4RA0160-14
[Backside Mounting]
40.8
2-S3
48.5
2-M5 or M6
2-M8
Chapter
P
H
G
I
H
4
G
C1 (Protective height for 30 mm)
18
35
40.8
208
C2 (Protective height for 14 mm)
33
35
D
13.6
Backside : 2-S3
43
14
4
35.75
35
8.2
26.5
23.2
48.6
6.5
Top/Bottom
Adjustable Bracket
(F39-LGTB)
4
46.5
33.75
12
Dimensions
Top/Bottom
Adjustable Bracket
(F39-LGTB)
<Screw for Top/Bottom Adjustable <Screw for Top/Bottom Adjustable
Bracket: M5 or M6>
Bracket: M8>
[ Unit : mm ]
F3SG-4RA0190-30
F3SG-4RA0160-14
Optional
accessory not
connected
Optional accessory connected*1
F39-JGR2W
F39-BT
Optional
accessory not
connected
F39-LP
F39-BTLP
Optional accessory connected*1
F39-JGR2W
F39-BT
F39-LP
F39-BTLP
Dimension C1
190
Same as on the left
Dimension C2
160
Dimension D
140
Same as on the left
Dimension D
140
Dimension G
277.5
277.5
281
292.5
Dimension G
277.5
277.5
281
292.5
Dimension H
303
303
306.5
318
Dimension H
303
303
306.5
318
Dimension I
322
322
325.5
337
Dimension I
322
322
325.5
337
Dimension P
20
Same as on the left
Dimension P
10
Same as on the left
Same as on the left
Number of
Top/Bottom
Adjustable
Brackets*2
2
Same as on the left
Number of
Top/Bottom
Adjustable
Brackets*2
2
Same as on the left
Same as on the left
*1. Refer to  Connected with Optional Accessories under 4-3-3-1. F3SG-RA Series for more information on the dimensions when optional accessories are connected to the F3SGRA.
*2. The number of brackets required to mount either one of emitter and receiver.
4-4-3-3. Mounting with Top/Bottom Adjustable Brackets (F39-LGTB)
- Use the brackets of specified quantities and locations according to the dimensions. The other brackets than described
above may not meet the specified ratings and performance.
- When you use the sensor in a situation where the sensor is under a load, increase the number of the brackets used.
- The Top/Bottom Adjustable Bracket and Standard Adjustable Bracket allow beam alignment after fixing the bracket to a
wall surface. The angle adjustment range of the Top/Bottom Adjustable Brackets is ±22.5°. The angle adjustment range
of the Standard Adjustable Brackets is ±15°.
144
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Wiring/Installation
[Side Mounting]
2-S3
44.6
35
48.5
35.75
H
G
18
208
C2 (Protective height for 14 mm)
C1 (Protective height for 30 mm)
33
46.5
33.75
12
<Screw for Top/Bottom Adjustable
Bracket: M5 or M6>
<Screw for Top/Bottom Adjustable
Bracket: M8>
Dimensions
Top/Bottom
Adjustable Bracket
(F39-LGTB)
2-M8
4
D
P
I
35
40.8
2-M5 or M6
Chapter
43
35
H
9.6
G
Backside : 2-S3
4
14
8.2
51.65
6.5
26.5
Top/Bottom
23.2
Adjustable Bracket
(F39-LGTB)
[ Unit : mm ]
F3SG-4RA0190-30
F3SG-4RA0160-14
Optional
accessory not
connected
Optional accessory connected*1
F39-JGR2W
F39-BT
Optional
accessory not
connected
F39-LP
F39-BTLP
Optional accessory connected*1
F39-JGR2W
F39-BT
F39-LP
F39-BTLP
Dimension C1
190
Same as on the left
Dimension C2
160
Dimension D
140
Same as on the left
Dimension D
140
Dimension G
277.5
277.5
281
292.5
Dimension G
277.5
277.5
281
292.5
Dimension H
303
303
306.5
318
Dimension H
303
303
306.5
318
Dimension I
322
322
325.5
337
Dimension I
322
322
325.5
337
Dimension P
20
Same as on the left
Dimension P
10
Same as on the left
Same as on the left
Number of
Top/Bottom
Adjustable
Brackets*2
2
Same as on the left
Number of
Top/Bottom
Adjustable
Brackets*2
2
Same as on the left
Same as on the left
*1. Refer to  Connected with Optional Accessories under 4-3-3-1. F3SG-RA Series for more information on the dimensions when optional accessories are connected to the F3SGRA.
*2. The number of brackets required to mount either one of emitter and receiver.
4-4-3-3. Mounting with Top/Bottom Adjustable Brackets (F39-LGTB)
- Use the brackets of specified quantities and locations according to the dimensions. The other brackets than described
above may not meet the specified ratings and performance.
- When you use the sensor in a situation where the sensor is under a load, increase the number of the brackets used.
- The Top/Bottom Adjustable Bracket and Standard Adjustable Bracket allow beam alignment after fixing the bracket to a
wall surface. The angle adjustment range of the Top/Bottom Adjustable Brackets is ±22.5°. The angle adjustment range
of the Standard Adjustable Brackets is ±15°.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
145
Wiring/Installation
 Connected with Optional Accessories
• Connected with Cascading Cable (F39-JGR2W) (Enlarged view of connected area)
Cascading Cable
(F39-JGR2W)
Top/Bottom
Adjustable Bracket
(F39-LGTB)
7
Chapter
Cascading Cable
(F39-JGR2W)
4
Dimensions
Top/Bottom
Adjustable Bracket
(F39-LGTB)
7
• Connected with Bluetooth® Communication Unit (F39-BT) (Enlarged view of connected area)
Receiver
Bluetooth®Communication Unit
(F39-BT)
Top/Bottom
Adjustable Bracket
(F39-LGTB)
1
17.5
Bluetooth®Communication Unit
(F39-BT)
Top/Bottom
Adjustable Bracket
(F39-LGTB)
146
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
1
17.5
Wiring/Installation
• Connected with Lamp (F39-LP) or Lamp and Bluetooth® Communication Unit (F39-BTLP)
(Enlarged view of connected area)
Receiver
Lamp(F39-LP)/
Lamp and Bluetooth® Communication
Unit (F39-BTLP)
Top/Bottom
Adjustable Bracket
(F39-LGTB)
1
29
Chapter
Lamp(F39-LP)/
Lamp and Bluetooth® Communication
Unit (F39-BTLP)
4
Dimensions
Top/Bottom
Adjustable Bracket
(F39-LGTB)
1
29
• DIP Switch cover opened (Enlarged view of connected area)
DIP Switch cover
12
Top/Bottom
Adjustable Bracket
(F39-LGTB)
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
147
Wiring/Installation
4-3-3-2. F3SG-RE Series
 F3SG-RE Series Except F3SG-4RE019030 and F3SG-4RE016014
[Backside Mounting]
53.25
2-S3
2-M5 or M6
21.75
4
34.5
35
8.2
26.5
23.2
48.6
6.5
Top/Bottom
Adjustable Bracket
(F39-LGTB)
2-M8
Backside : 2-S3
40.8
4
35
Dimensions
9.2
24.85
72
F
72
H
A
G
2-M5 or M6
2-M5 or M6
24.85
24.85
34.5
21.75
15
25
P
Top/Bottom
Adjustable Bracket
(F39-LGTB)
C1 (Protective height for 30 mm)
D
6.4
G
I
4
84
72
S2.5
H
Chapter
Standard
Adjustable Bracket
(F39-LGA)
C2 (Protective height for 14 mm)
F
35
F
13.6
<Screw for Top/Bottom Adjustable
Bracket: M5 or M6>
<Screw for Top/Bottom Adjustable
Bracket: M8>
[ Unit : mm ]
F3SG-RE30 Series
Dimension A
Dimension C1
F3SG-RE14 Series
C1
Dimension A
C2+30
4-digit number of the type name
(Protective height)
Dimension C2
Dimension D
C1-50
Dimension D
C2-20
Dimension G
C1+43.5
Dimension G
C2+73.5
Dimension H
C1+69
Dimension H
C2+99
Dimension I
C1+88
Dimension I
C2+118
Dimension P
20
Dimension P
10
Protective height
(C1)
Number of Top/Bottom
Adjustable Brackets*1
Number of Standard
Adjustable Brackets *1*2
4-digit number of the type name
(Protective height)
Dimension F
Protective height
(C2)
Number of Top/Bottom
Adjustable Brackets*1
Number of Standard
Adjustable Brackets *1*2
Dimension F
0270 to 1070
2
0
-
0240 to 1040
2
0
-
1150 to 1950
2
1
1000 mm max.
1120 to 1920
2
1
1000 mm max.
2030 to 2510
2
2
1000 mm max.
2000 to 2080
2
2
1000 mm max.
*1. The number of brackets required to mount either one of emitter and receiver.
*2. The Top/Bottom Adjustable Bracket is not useable together with the Standard Fixed Bracket. When it is necessary to use it with another bracket, only
the combination with the Standard Adjustable Bracket is possible.
4-4-3-3. Mounting with Top/Bottom Adjustable Brackets (F39-LGTB)
- Use the brackets of specified quantities and locations according to the dimensions. The other brackets than described
above may not meet the specified ratings and performance.
- When you use the sensor in a situation where the sensor is under a load, increase the number of the brackets used.
- The Top/Bottom Adjustable Bracket and Standard Adjustable Bracket allow beam alignment after fixing the bracket to a
wall surface. The angle adjustment range of the Top/Bottom Adjustable Brackets is ±22.5°. The angle adjustment range
of the Standard Adjustable Brackets is ±15°.
148
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Wiring/Installation
[Side Mounting]
2-S3
50.35
35
26.5
23.2
2-M5 or M6
2-M8
6.5
4
34.5
8.2
51.65
21.75
Top/Bottom
Adjustable Bracket
(F39-LGTB)
Backside : 2-S3
F
35
72
72
H
G
15
A
D
C2 (Protective height for 14 mm)
25
I
H
G
6.4
84
72
34.5
21.75
P
Top/Bottom
Adjustable Bracket
(F39-LGTB)
Dimensions
9.2
42.35
2-M5 or M6
4
S2.5
2-M5 or M6
Chapter
Standard
Adjustable Bracket
(F39-LGA)
C1 (Protective height for 30 mm)
F
35
F
40.8
<Screw for Top/Bottom Adjustable
Bracket: M5 or M6>
<Screw for Top/Bottom
Adjustable Bracket: M8>
[ Unit : mm ]
F3SG-RE30 Series
Dimension A
Dimension C1
F3SG-RE14 Series
C1
Dimension A
C2+30
4-digit number of the type name
(Protective height)
Dimension C2
Dimension D
C1-50
Dimension D
C2-20
Dimension G
C1+43.5
Dimension G
C2+73.5
Dimension H
C1+69
Dimension H
C2+99
Dimension I
C1+88
Dimension I
C2+118
Dimension P
20
Dimension P
10
Protective height
(C1)
Number of Top/Bottom
Adjustable Brackets*1
Number of Standard
Adjustable Brackets *1*2
4-digit number of the type name
(Protective height)
Dimension F
Protective height
(C2)
Number of Top/Bottom
Adjustable Brackets*1
Number of Standard
Adjustable Brackets *1*2
Dimension F
0270 to 1070
2
0
-
0240 to 1040
2
0
-
1150 to 1950
2
1
1000 mm max.
1120 to 1920
2
1
1000 mm max.
2030 to 2510
2
2
1000 mm max.
2000 to 2080
2
2
1000 mm max.
*1. The number of brackets required to mount either one of emitter and receiver.
*2. The Top/Bottom Adjustable Bracket is not useable together with the Standard Fixed Bracket. When it is necessary to use it with another bracket, only
the combination with the Standard Adjustable Bracket is possible.
4-4-3-3. Mounting with Top/Bottom Adjustable Brackets (F39-LGTB)
- Use the brackets of specified quantities and locations according to the dimensions. The other brackets than described
above may not meet the specified ratings and performance.
- When you use the sensor in a situation where the sensor is under a load, increase the number of the brackets used.
- The Top/Bottom Adjustable Bracket and Standard Adjustable Bracket allow beam alignment after fixing the bracket to a
wall surface. The angle adjustment range of the Top/Bottom Adjustable Brackets is ±22.5°. The angle adjustment range
E
of the Standard Adjustable Brackets is ±15°.
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
149
Wiring/Installation
 F3SG-4RE019030 and F3SG-4RE016014
[Backside Mounting]
40.8
2-S3
4
30
Chapter
P
48.5
2-M5 or M6
64.5
51.75
Dimensions
Top/Bottom
Adjustable Bracket
(F39-LGTB)
2-M8
H
G
G
I
H
4
190
C2 (Protective height for 14 mm)
15
35
40.8
C1 (Protective height for 30 mm)
35
D
13.6
Backside : 2-S3
14
4
35.75
8.2
35
6.5
26.5
23.2
48.6
25
Top/Bottom
Adjustable Bracket
(F39-LGTB)
<Screw for Top/Bottom Adjustable
Bracket: M5 or M6>
<Screw for Top/Bottom
Adjustable Bracket: M8>
[ Unit : mm ]
F3SG-4RE019030
F3SG-4RE016014
Dimension C1
190
Dimension C2
Dimension D
140
Dimension D
140
Dimension G
277.5
Dimension G
277.5
Dimension H
303
Dimension H
303
Dimension I
322
Dimension I
322
Dimension P
20
Dimension P
10
2
Number of Top/Bottom
Adjustable Brackets*
2
Number of Top/Bottom
Adjustable Brackets*
160
* The number of brackets required to mount either one of emitter and receiver.
4-4-3-3. Mounting with Top/Bottom Adjustable Brackets (F39-LGTB)
- Use the brackets of specified quantities and locations according to the dimensions. The other brackets than described
above may not meet the specified ratings and performance.
- When you use the sensor in a situation where the sensor is under a load, increase the number of the brackets used.
- The Top/Bottom Adjustable Bracket and Standard Adjustable Bracket allow beam alignment after fixing the bracket to a
wall surface. The angle adjustment range of the Top/Bottom Adjustable Brackets is ±22.5°. The angle adjustment range
of the Standard Adjustable Brackets is ±15°.
150
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Wiring/Installation
[Side Mounting]
2-S3
44.6
35
35.75
2-M8
H
G
190
D
C2 (Protective height for 14 mm)
15
4
30
P
I
H
G
Chapter
25
35
40.8
35
Backside : 2-S3
C1 (Protective height for 30 mm)
6.5
9.6
2-M5 or M6
14
4
48.5
51.65
51.75
<Screw for Top/Bottom Adjustable
Bracket: M5 or M6>
<Screw for Top/Bottom
Adjustable Bracket: M8>
Dimensions
Top/Bottom
Adjustable Bracket
(F39-LGTB)
64.5
26.5
23.2
8.2
Top/Bottom
Adjustable Bracket
(F39-LGTB)
[ Unit : mm ]
F3SG-4RE019030
F3SG-4RE016014
Dimension C1
190
Dimension C2
Dimension D
140
Dimension D
140
Dimension G
277.5
Dimension G
277.5
Dimension H
303
Dimension H
303
Dimension I
322
Dimension I
322
Dimension P
20
Dimension P
10
2
Number of Top/Bottom
Adjustable Brackets*
2
Number of Top/Bottom
Adjustable Brackets*
160
* The number of brackets required to mount either one of emitter and receiver.
4-4-3-3. Mounting with Top/Bottom Adjustable Brackets (F39-LGTB)
- Use the brackets of specified quantities and locations according to the dimensions. The other brackets than described
above may not meet the specified ratings and performance.
- When you use the sensor in a situation where the sensor is under a load, increase the number of the brackets used.
- The Top/Bottom Adjustable Bracket and Standard Adjustable Bracket allow beam alignment after fixing the bracket to a
wall surface. The angle adjustment range of the Top/Bottom Adjustable Brackets is ±22.5°. The angle adjustment range
of the Standard Adjustable Brackets is ±15°.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
151
Wiring/Installation
4-3-3-3. Top/Bottom Adjustable Bracket (F39-LGTB)
31
26
Top/Bottom
Bracket (1)
18
67
23.5
4
Screw (2)
161
Top/Bottom
Bracket (2)
20
44
4
5
5
23.2
Chapter
48.25
26.5
22.25
6.5
4
9.5
8.2
Top/Bottom
Bracket (3)
Screw(1)
4
Dimensions
[ Unit : mm ]
35
Material: SUS304
40.8
4-3-3-4. Top/Bottom Adjustable Bracket (F39-LGTB-1)
26
Top/Bottom
Bracket (1)
18
Screw (2)
122
67
23.5
[Reference information]
Top/Bottom
Bracket (2)
When you design the joint part with the Top/
below.
4-47°
3
R
dia
0
45°
.2
4- M4
45°
dia
8-R2
17
.15
.4
.6
dia. 6
.2
R
0)
1
30
44.25
ia
22.65
Bottom Bracket (2), refer to the drawing
20
5
5
Note: F39-LGTB-1 does not come with Top/
Bottom Bracket (3) and Screw (1). Refer to
4-4-3-3.
Mounting
with
Top/Bottom
Adjustable Brackets (F39-LGTB) for more
information on parts names of this bracket.
(d
27
dia
.15
.7
4-4.3
B*
40.8
* When you use this bracket with the
152
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
[ Unit : mm ]
Standard Adjustable Bracket (F39-LGA),
Material: SUS304
the Dimension B must be 27.25 mm.
Wiring/Installation
4-4. Mounting
4-4-1. Mounting Method
You can mount the F3SG-R with Standard Fixed Brackets and Standard Adjustable Brackets. Any of
these mounting methods allows the user to use the same bracket for the backside mounting and side
mounting.
4-4-2. Number of Brackets Required
The numbers of brackets required according to the protective heights of the sensor are as follows:
• Mounting with Standard Fixed Brackets Only
0160 to 1200
2
1310 to 2270
1280 to 2080
3
2350 to 2510
-
4
Mounting
F3SG-R14
0190 to 1230
4
F3SG-R30
Number of Standard Fixed
Brackets*
Chapter
Protective height
• Mounting with Standard Adjustable Brackets Only
Protective height
F3SG-R30
F3SG-R14
Number of Standard
Adjustable Brackets*
0190 to 1230
0160 to 1200
2
1310 to 2270
1280 to 2080
3
2350 to 2510
-
4
• Mounting with Top/Bottom Adjustable Brackets and Standard Adjustable Brackets
Protective height
F3SG-R30
F3SG-R14
Number of Top/Bottom
Adjustable Brackets*
Number of Standard
Adjustable Brackets*
0190 to 1070
0160 to 1040
2
0
1150 to 1950
1120 to 1920
2
1
2030 to 2510
2000 to 2080
2
2
* The number of brackets required to mount either one of emitter and receiver.
Make sure that the F3SG-R is securely mounted and its cables and connectors are properly connected.
The required number of brackets is the same between F3SG-RA and F3SG-RE series.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
153
Wiring/Installation
4-4-3. Mounting Procedure
 Before mounting (in case of F3SG-RA)
When it is required to configure functions with DIP Switch, do so before installing the F3SG-RA in your
site, according to the procedure described in 3-2. DIP Switch.
The mounting procedure is the same between F3SG-RA and F3SG-RE series.
4-4-3-1. Mounting with Standard Fixed Brackets (F39-LGF)
1. Loosen the hexagon socket head cap screws (M3 x 15). (Fig.1)
Hexagon socket head
cap screw (M3 x 15)
Fixed Bracket
Chapter
hook
Loosen this
4
Fig. 1
Mounting
2. Slide the hook of the Fixed Bracket (1) in the groove of the F3SG-R housing. Lightly tighten the
hexagon socket head cap screw (M3 x 15). (Fig. 2)
<Backside mounting>
Loosen this
<Side mounting>
Optical surface
of F3SG-R
Optical surface
of F3SG-R
Slide the hook
in the groove
Fixed Bracket
Fixed Bracket
Slide the hook
in the groove
Lightly
tighten this
Fig. 2
3. Adjust the Standard Fixed Bracket to the mounting position of the wall surface. Securely tighten the
hexagon socket head cap screw (M3 x 15) to fix the Standard Fixed Bracket to the housing of the
F3SG-R. The recommended torque to tighten the hexagon socket head cap screw (M3 x 15) is 2.0
N•m. (Fig. 3)
<Backside mounting>
<Side mounting>
Securely
tighten this
Securely
tighten this
Adjust the bracket
to mounting position
Adjust the bracket
to mounting position
Fig. 3
Tightening screws with a torque that considerably exceeds the recommended torque may cause failure.
154
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Wiring/Installation
4. Securely tighten the screws to fix the Standard Fixed Bracket to the mounting position of the wall
surface. (Fig. 4)
<Backside mounting>
Fix the Standard
Fixed Bracket to the
wall surface with screws
Chapter
Fix the Standard
Fixed Bracket to the
wall surface with screws
<Side mounting>
4
Fig. 4
Mounting
Screws to mount the brackets to the wall are not included.
4-4-3-2. Mounting with Standard Adjustable Brackets (F39-LGA)
1. Loosen the Screw (1) (hexagon socket head cap screw (M3 x 15)) and change the angle of the
Adjustable Bracket (1) according to its mounting direction. (Fig. 1)
2. Loosen the Screw (2) (hexagon socket head cap screw (M3 x 15)).
Screw (2)
(hexagon socket head
cap screw (M3 x 15))
(Fig. 1)
Adjustable Bracket (2)
Adjustable Bracket (1)
Screw (1)
(hexagon socket head
cap screw (M3 x 15))
hook
2. Loosen this
Adjustable Bracket (3)
1. Loosen this
Fig. 1
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
155
Wiring/Installation
3. Slide the hooks of the Adjustable Bracket (1) and the Adjustable Bracket (2) in the grooves of the
F3SG-R housing. Lightly tighten the Screw (2). (Fig. 2)
<Backside mounting>
Screw(2)
Loosen this
<Side mounting>
Optical surface
of F3SG-R
Adjustable
Bracket(2)
Optical surface
of F3SG-R
Adjustable
Bracket(3)
Slide the hook
in the groove
Screw(1)
Loosen this
Adjustable
Bracket(1)
Slide the hook
in the groove
Screw(2)
Screw(1)
Adjustable
Bracket(2)
Adjustable
Bracket(3)
Adjustable
Bracket(1)
Fig. 2
Chapter
4. Adjust the Standard Adjustable Bracket to the mounting position of the wall surface. Securely tighten
the Screw (2) to fix the Standard Adjustable Bracket to the housing of the F3SG-R. The recommended
4
torque to tighten the Screw (2) is 2.0 N•m. (Fig. 3)
Mounting
<Backside mounting>
<Side mounting>
Securely
tighten this
Securely
tighten this
Adjust the bracket
to mounting position
Adjust the bracket
to mounting position
Fig. 3
Tightening screws with a torque that considerably exceeds the recommended torque may cause failure.
156
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Wiring/Installation
5. Securely tighten screws to fix the Standard Adjustable Bracket to the mounting position of the wall
surface. (Fig. 4)
<Backside mounting>
Fix the Standard
Adjustable Bracket
to the wall surface
with screws
Chapter
Fix the Standard
Adjustable Bracket
to the wall surface
with screws
<Side mounting>
4
Fig. 4
Mounting
Screws to mount the brackets to the wall are not included.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
157
Wiring/Installation
6. Power the F3SG-R on to perform beam alignment.
Move the emitter from side to side (Fig. 5) to align it to a center position where the Stable-state
indicator (STB, green) of the receiver is illuminated while checking the state of the top and bottom
beams with the Top-beam-state indicator (TOP, blue) and Bottom-beam-state indicator (BTM, blue) of
the receiver. (Fig. 6)
Next, move the receiver from side to side to align it to a center position where the Stable-state indicator
(STB, green) of the receiver is illuminated while checking the state of the top and bottom beams with
the Top-beam-state indicator (TOP, blue) and Bottom-beam-state indicator (BTM, blue) of the receiver.
<Emitter>
<Receiver>
TOP(Blue)
Chapter
4
Mounting
STB(Green)
BTM(Blue)
Fig. 6
Fig. 5
The angle adjustment range of the Standard Adjustable Brackets is ±15°.
7. Securely tighten the Screw (1) to fix the Standard Adjustable Bracket to the housing of the F3SG-R.
The recommended torque to tighten the Screw (1) is 2.0 N•m. (Fig. 7)
<Backside mounting>
Securely
tighten this
<Side mounting>
Securely
tighten this
<Enlarged view>
Securely
tighten this
Securely
tighten this
Fig. 7
Securely
tighten this
Screw(1)
(Hexagon socket head
cap screw (M3x15))
Tightening screws with a torque that considerably exceeds the recommended torque may cause failure.
158
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Wiring/Installation
4-4-3-3. Mounting with Top/Bottom Adjustable Brackets (F39-LGTB)
1. Loosen the Screw (1) (hexagon socket head cap screw (M4×10)) of Top/Bottom Bracket (3) and
change the angle of the Top/Bottom Bracket (3) according to its mounting direction. Then loosen the
Screw (2) (low head hexagon socket head cap screw (M5×10)) of Top/Bottom Bracket (2). (Fig. 1)
Screw (2)
(Low head hexagon socket head
cap screw (M5×10))
Adjust the angle
Screw (1)
(Hexagon socket head
cap screw (M4×10))
Top/Bottom
Bracket (1)
1. Loosen
these
Top/Bottom
Bracket (2)
Top/Bottom
Bracket (3)
Fig. 1
Top/Bottom
Bracket (2)
Top/Bottom
Bracket (1)
The width across flat of the hexagon socket of the Screws (1) and (2) is S=3.
Chapter
Top/Bottom
Bracket (3)
2. Loosen these
4
Adjustable Bracket to the mounting position of the wall surface. Make sure to position the whole body
Mounting
2. Slide the Top/Bottom Bracket (1) in the grooves of the F3SG-R housing. Adjust the Top/Bottom
of the Top/Bottom Bracket (1) within the yellow area of the housing. Securely tighten the Screw (2) to
fix the Top/Bottom Adjustable Bracket to the housing of the F3SG-R. The recommended torque to
tighten the Screw (2) is 3.0 N•m. (Fig. 2)
<Backside mounting>
<Side mounting>
Top/Bottom
Bracket (1)
Top/Bottom
Bracket (1)
Slide into the housing
Top/Bottom
Bracket (2)
Slide into the housing
Top/Bottom
Bracket (2)
Securely tighten these
Securely tighten these
Fig. 2
Tightening screws with a torque that considerably exceeds the recommended torque may cause failure.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
159
Wiring/Installation
3. Securely tighten screws to fix the Top/Bottom Adjustable Bracket to the mounting position of the wall
surface. (Fig. 3)
<Backside mounting>
<Side mounting>
Fix the Top/Bottom
Adjustable Bracket to the
wall surface with screws
Chapter
4
Fix the Top/Bottom
Adjustable Bracket to the
wall surface with screws
Mounting
Fig. 3
One screw at upper and lower positions, respectively, is sufficient to fix the F3SG-R to the wall surface. Screws to mount
the brackets to the wall are not included.
4. Power the F3SG-R on to perform beam alignment.
Move the emitter from side to side (Fig. 4) to align it to a center position where the Stable-state
indicator (STB, green) of the receiver is illuminated while checking the state of the top and bottom
beams with the Top-beam-state indicator (TOP, blue) and Bottom-beam-state indicator (BTM, blue) of
the receiver. (Fig. 5)
Next, move the receiver from side to side to align it to a center position where the Stable-state indicator
(STB, green) of the receiver is illuminated while checking the state of the top and bottom beams with
the Top-beam-state indicator (TOP, blue) and Bottom-beam-state indicator (BTM, blue) of the receiver.
<Emitter>
<Receiver>
TOP(Blue)
STB(Green)
BTM(Blue)
Fig. 4
Fig. 5
The angle adjustment range of the Top/Bottom Adjustable Brackets is ±22.5°.
160
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Wiring/Installation
5. Securely tighten the Screw (1) to fix the Top/Bottom Adjustable Bracket to the housing of the F3SG-R.
The recommended torque to tighten the Screw (1) is 3.0 N•m. (Fig. 6)
<Backside mounting >
Screw (1)
<Side mounting>
Screw (1)
Securely
tighten these
Securely
tighten these
Screw (1)
Securely
tighten these
4
Securely
tighten these
Chapter
Screw (1)
Mounting
Fig. 6
Tightening screws with a torque that considerably exceeds the recommended torque may cause failure.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
161
Wiring/Installation
4-4-4. Beam Alignment Procedure
The Standard Adjustable Bracket and Top/Bottom Adjustable Bracket allow beam alignment after fixing the bracket to a
wall surface. The Standard Fixed Bracket does not allow beam alignment.
1. Verify the following points:
- The optical surfaces of the emitter and receiver are clean.
- There is no interrupting object in the detection zone of the F3SG-R.
2. Align the beams of the emitter and receiver:
Move the emitter from side to side to align it to a center position where the Stable-state indicator (STB,
green) of the receiver is illuminated while checking the state of the top and bottom beams with the Topbeam-state indicator (TOP, blue) and Bottom-beam-state indicator (BTM, blue) of the receiver.
Chapter
Next, move the receiver from side to side to align it to a center position where the Stable-state indicator
(STB, green) of the receiver is illuminated while checking the state of the top and bottom beams with
4
the Top-beam-state indicator (TOP, blue) and Bottom-beam-state indicator (BTM, blue) of the receiver.
Mounting
1-4. LED Indicators
Perform beam alignment to the primary sensor first, when using the F3SG-R in a cascade conection.
3. Verify that all the three indicators of the receiver, Top-beam-state (TOP, blue), Bottom-beam-state
(BTM, blue) and Stable-state (STB, green) indicators are illuminated.
4. Make sure to keep the beams aligned and tightly fasten all screws.
The table below shows the recommended tightening torques for the included screws.
Mounting bracket type
Standard Fixed Bracket
Standard Adjustable Bracket
Top/Bottom Adjustable Bracket
Nominal diameter
x length of screw (mm)
Tightening torque
(recommended)
M3 x 15
2.0 N•m
M4 × 10
M5 × 10
3.0 N•m
- If any of the Top-beam-state (TOP, blue), Bottom-beam-state (BTM, blue) and Stable-state (STB, green) indicators are
not illuminated, check if the emitter and receiver are mounted parallel and at the same height.
- Tightening screws with a torque that considerably exceeds the recommended torque may cause failure.
162
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Wiring/Installation
4-5. Wiring
4-5-1. Wiring Precautions
Double or reinforced insulation from hazardous voltage must be applied to all input and
output lines. Failure to do so may result in electric shock.
Chapter
When using PNP output, connect the load between the output and 0 V line. When using
NPN output, connect the load between the output and +24 VDC line.
Connecting between the output and a different power supply line from the above line will
result in dangerous condition because the operation mode of safety output is reversed to
"Dark-ON".
4
When using the PNP output, do not ground +24 VDC line. When using the NPN output,
do not ground 0 V line. Otherwise, a ground fault may turn the safety output ON, resulting
in a failure of stopping the machine.
Wiring
Configure the system by using the optimal number of safety outputs that satisfy the
requirements of the necessary safety category.
Do not connect each line of F3SG-R to a DC power supply higher than 24 VDC+20%.
Also, do not connect it to an AC power supply.
Failure to do so may result in electric shock.
Make sure to perform wiring while the power supply is OFF.
[PNP Output]
Brown
Black, White
F3SG
Receiver
[NPN Output]
Black, White
0 VDC
0 VDC
Black, White
F3SG
Receiver
Black, White
Blue
Load
Brown
+24 VDC
Load
+24 VDC
Blue
0 VDC
Brown
F3SG
Receiver
F3SG
Receiver
Load
Blue
Brown
+24 VDC
+24 VDC
Load
Blue
0 VDC
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
163
Wiring/Installation
4-5-2. Power Supply Unit
For the F3SG-R to comply with IEC 61496-1 and UL 508, the DC power supply unit must
satisfy all of the following conditions:
• Must be within the rated power voltage (24 V DC ± 20%)
• Must have tolerance against the total rated current of devices if it is connected to
multiple devices
• Must comply with EMC directives (industrial environment)
• Double or reinforced insulation must be applied between the primary and secondary
circuits
• Automatic recovery of overcurrent protection characteristics
4
• Must comply with laws and regulations, regarding EMC and electrical equipment
Wiring
Chapter
• Output holding time must be 20ms or longer
• Must satisfy output characteristic requirements for class 2 circuit or limited voltage
current circuit defined by UL508 (Refer to Note below.)
safety, of the country or region where the F3SG-R is used (For example, in EU, the
power supply must comply with the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive.)
Note:
To prevent a fire, the secondary circuit of the power supply must satisfy either of the following
conditions in accordance with UL 508:
•As with secondary winding of isolation transformer, there must be a limited current voltage circuit to
which isolated power supply provides power, and the "current is limited to 8 A max. (including shortcircuit)" or "circuit protection such as a fuse is used to limit the current, which has a rating of 4.2A
max." (24 VDC power supply).
Recommended power supply: OMRON S8VS (30 W or 60 W) or S8VK-G (15W, 30W or 60W)
These products are UL-Listed (UL508, class 2 power supply), CE marking compatible (EMC/Low
Voltage Directive).
•Class 2 power supply unit complying with UL 1310, or a circuit using 2 transformers complying with
UL 1585 as a power supply.
164
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Wiring/Installation
4-5-3. Cable Connections(F3SG-RA Series)
Extension of the cable must be within a specified length. If it isn't, safety function may not
work properly, resulting in danger.
Perform wiring according to the following procedure.
1. Connect an emitter cable (F39-JG-L, gray, sold separately) to the emitter-side power cable (gray).
2. Connect a receiver cable (F39-JG-D, black, sold separately) to the receiver-side power cable (black).
4-5-3-1. Single-Ended Cable
Chapter
 Single-Ended Cable for Emitter (F39-JGA-L, sold separately)
(Unit: mm)
4
L
dia.14.9
Wiring
40.7
M12 IP67 connector
Insulated vinyl round cable dia. 6.6, 5-wire
(Cross section of conductor: 0.38 mm2/insulator diameter: dia. 1.2 mm)
 Single-Ended Cable for Receiver (F39-JGA-D, sold separately)
(Unit: mm)
L
dia.14.9
40.7
M12 IP67 connector
Emitter cable (Gray)
Insulated vinyl round cable dia. 6.6, 8-wire
(Cross section of conductor: 0.38 mm2/insulator diameter: dia. 1.2 mm)
Receiver cable (Black)
L (m)
F39-JG3A-L
F39-JG3A-D
3
F39-JG7A-L
F39-JG7A-D
7
F39-JG10A-L
F39-JG10A-D
10
F39-JG15A-L
F39-JG15A-D
15
F39-JG20A-L
F39-JG20A-D
20
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
165
Wiring/Installation
<Internal wiring diagram> (F39-JGA-L)
Connect to Power Cable
or Double-Ended Cable
1
1
2
3
4
5
2
5
4
3
Female
Brown
Black
Blue
White
Yellow
1
2
3
4
5
Brown
Black
Blue
White
Yellow
2
7
5
6
1
8
3
4
Brown
Blue
Black
White
Yellow
Red
Gray
Pink
+24 VDC
TEST
0 VDC
Not used
Not used
<Internal wiring diagram> (F39-JGA-D)
2
1
7
Chapter
6
2
7
5
6
1
8
3
4
8
5
3
4
Female
4
Brown
Blue
Black
White
Yellow
Red
Gray
Pink
+24 VDC
0 VDC
OSSD 1
OSSD 2
RESET
AUX
MUTE A
MUTE B
Wiring
4-5-3-2. Double-Ended Cable
 Double-Ended Cable for Emitter: Cable for extension (F39-JGB-L, sold separately)
(Unit: mm)
L
44.7
dia.14.9
dia.14.9
40.7
M12 IP67 connector
M12 IP67 connector
Insulated vinyl round cable dia. 6.6, 5-wire (2-pair + 1)
(Cross section of conductor: 0.38 mm2/insulator diameter: dia. 1.2 mm)
 Double-Ended Cable for Receiver: Cable for extension (F39-JGB-D, sold separately)
(Unit: mm)
L
40.7
dia.14.9
dia.14.9
44.7
M12 IP67 connector
M12 IP67 connector
Insulated vinyl round cable dia. 6.6, 8-wire (4-pair)
(Cross section of conductor: 0.38 mm2/insulator diameter: dia. 1.2 mm)
166
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Wiring/Installation
Emitter cable (Gray)
Receiver cable (Black)
L (m)
F39-JGR5B-L
F39-JGR15B-D
F39-JG1B-L
F39-JG1B-D
0.5
1
F39-JG3B-L
F39-JG3B-D
3
F39-JG5B-L
F39-JG5B-D
5
F39-JG7B-L
F39-JG7B-D
7
F39-JG10B-L
F39-JG10B-D
10
F39-JG15B-L
F39-JG15B-D
15
F39-JG20B-L
F39-JG20B-D
20
<Internal wiring diagram> (F39-JGB-L)
Connected to Power Cable
or Double-Ended Cable
2
5
4
3
1
3
2
4
5
Brown
Blue
Black
White
Yellow
Brown
Blue
Black
White
Yellow
2
1
5
3
4
4
Male
Wiring
Female
1
3
2
4
5
Chapter
1
Connected to Single-Ended Cable, or
Double-Ended cable
Twisted pair wires are brown and blue, and white and yellow.
<Internal wiring diagram> (F39-JGB-D)
Connected to Power Cable
or Double-Ended Cable
2
1
7
6
8
5
3
4
Female
2
7
5
6
1
8
3
4
Connected to Single-Ended Cable, or
Double-Ended cable
Brown
Blue
Black
White
Yellow
Red
Gray
Pink
2
7
5
6
1
8
3
4
Brown
Blue
Black
White
Yellow
Red
Gray
Pink
1
2
3
4
8
5
7
6
Male
Twisted pair wires are brown and blue, black and white, yellow and red, and gray and pink.
If the length of the F39-JGA Single-Ended Cable is insufficient, use 1 or more F39-JGB DoubleEnded Cables to extend the length, as required. The total cable extension length of the power cable
must be 100 m max.
<Connection example>
Emitter
Cable is gray
Model F39-JGB-L(Gray)
Double-Ended Cable
Model F39-JGB
Receiver
Cable is black
Model F39-JGA-L(Gray)
Single-Ended Cable
Model F39-JGA
Model F39-JGB-D(Black)
Model F39-JGA-D(Black)
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
167
Wiring/Installation
4-5-3-3. Cascading Cable
24.2
 Cascading Cable for Emitter (F39-JGR2W-L, sold separately)
200
40.7
M12 IP67 Connector
M2.5 screw
10
dia. 14.9
dia. 6
23.4
Connector
Insulated vinyl round cable dia. 6 mm, 5-wire
(Cross section of conductor: 0.15 mm2/Insulator diameter: dia. 1 mm)
Chapter
 Cascading Cable for Receiver (F39-JGR2W-D, sold separately)
4
24.2
Wiring
200
40.7
M12 IP67 Connector
M2.5 screw
10
dia. 14.9
dia. 6
23.4
Connector
Insulated vinyl round cable dia. 6 mm, 8-wire
(Cross section of conductor: 0.15 mm2/Insulator diameter: dia. 1 mm)
Set model name
F39-JGR2W
Emitter cable (Gray)
F39-JGR2W-L
Receiver cable (Black)
F39-JGR2W-D
L (m)
0.2
If the length of the Cascading Cable is insufficient, connect the F39-JGB Double-Ended Cable
between the power cable of the F3SG-RA and the F39-JGR2W Cascading Cable, as required. (Cable
length between sensors: 10 m max.)
Remove the cap
F3SG-RA Emitter
Cable is gray
Double-Ended Cable
Model F39-JGB
F3SG-RA Receiver
Cable is black
F3SG-RA Emitter
Model F39-JGB-L(Gray)
Model F39-JGB-D(Black)
Cascading Cable
Model F39-JGR2W
F3SG-RA Receiver
Remove the cap
168
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Cable is gray
Cable is black
Wiring/Installation
4-5-3-4. Extending Cable Length with Commercially Available Cable
When you need to use a cable that is not specified by OMRON, use a cable that satisfies the following
specifications.
1. Emitter: 5-wire Receiver: 8-wire
2. 0.3 mm2 or larger, conductor resistance 0.058 ohms/m max.
3. Mute A and Mute B lines, and 24 VDC and 0 VDC lines must be used as twisted-pair lines.
Do not use cables in the same conduit as high voltage or electric power lines.
4-5-3-5. Reduced Wiring Connector System with Y-Joint Plug/Socket
Connector
separately).
4
When using the reduced wiring connector system, the External Test cannot be used.
Chapter
Reduced wiring can be achieved by using a Y-Joint Plug/Socket Connector (F39-GCNY2, sold
Wiring
Make sure the Position 4 of the emitter's DIP Switch is set to 24 V Active.
 Y-Joint Plug/Socket Connector (F39-GCNY2, sold separately)
15.0
Plug marked with ● (blue circle): Connect to control panel side
Socket marked with ○ (open circle): Connect to emitter
17.7
45.5
35.0
CN2
To control
panel side
4.6
dia
.
40.7
To receiver
To emitter
CN1
M12 x 1
500
<Internal wiring diagram>
Connected to Single-Ended Cable or
Double-Ended Cable of F3SG-RA Receiver
1
2
3
4
8
5
Yellow
Brown
Gray
Pink
Black
White
Blue
Red
RESET
+24 VDC
MUTE A
MUTE B
7
6
OSSD 1
OSSD 2
Male
0V
AUX
Connected to Power Cable or
Double-Ended Cable of F3SG-RA Receiver
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
1
7
6
8
5
3
4
Female
Connected to Power Cable or
Double-Ended Cable of F3SG-RA Emitter
1
2
5
4
3
1
2
3
4
Female
Model
L (m)
F39-GCNY2
0.5
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
169
Wiring/Installation
4-5-3-6. Reduced Wiring Connector System with 4-Joint Plug/Socket
Connector
Reduced wiring can be achieved by connecting the F3SG-RA (PNP output) and a Smart Muting
Actuator (F3W-MA, sold separately) with a 4-Joint Plug/Socket Connector (F39-GCN4-, sold
separately).
The cable connection of the connector is as follows.
Chapter
Description
MA1
Connect an F3W-MA to this socket. The
sensor connected here serves as a primary
sensor.
For the Exit-Only Muting Mode (or L-shaped
configuration), also connect an F3W-MA here.
SLC
Connect an F3SG-RA to this socket.
MA2
Connect an F3W-MA to this socket. The
sensor connected here serves as a secondary
sensor.
㻯㻺
CN
4
Wiring
170
Plug/Socket
Connect a Single-Ended or Double-Ended
Connector Cable to this plug. (Control-panel
side)
This connector cannot be used for the Position Detection Muting Mode.
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Wiring/Installation
 4-Joint Plug/Socket Connector for Emitter (F39-GCN4-L, gray, sold separately)
4
5
CN
. 5.5
4
1
5
2
3
2-dia
SLC
M12 x 1
M12 x 1
2-dia
MA1
.10
28
3
28
2
1
28
78
MA2
24.4
58.3
13.6
17
Chapter
7
27
<Internal wiring diagram>
5
4
3
Female
1
2
3
4
5
Brown
Black
Blue
White
Yellow
+24 VDC
CFG In
0 VDC
COM+
COM-
Connected to Power Cable or
Double-Ended Cable of F3W-MA Emitter
1
2
5
4
3
Female
2
3
Brown
Black
Blue
White
Yellow
+24 VDC
TEST
0 VDC
Not used
Not used
Connected to Power Cable or
Double-Ended Cable of F3SG-RA Emitter
MA1
1
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
5
4
3
Female
5
1
2
1
2
+24 VDC
CFG In
0 VDC
COM+
COM-
MA2
3
4
5
3
4
5
CN
Brown
Black
Blue
White
Yellow
Connected to Power Cable or
Double-Ended Cable of F3W-MA Emitter
SLC
4
1
2
3
4
5
Wiring
2
4
1
1
2
3
4
5
Connected to Single-Ended Cable or
Double-Ended Cable for Emitter
2
1
5
3
4
Male
1
2
3
4
5
Brown
Black
Blue
White
Yellow
+24 VDC
TEST
0 VDC
Not used
Not used
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
171
Wiring/Installation
 4-Joint Plug/Socket Connector for Receiver (F39-GCN4-D, black, sold separately)
58.3
13.6
28
3
7
6
8
5
CN
1
. 5.5
2-dia
SLC
4
5
8
4
2
3
M12 x 1
M12 x 1
2-dia
MA1
.10
7
Chapter
27
<Internal wiring diagram>
4
Wiring
7
6
1 Yellow Muting Enable
2 Brown +24 VDC
3 Gray COM+
4 Pink COM5 Black Muting Output A
6 White Muting Output B
7 Blue 0 VDC
CFG Out
8 Red
2
1
8
5
3
4
Female
Connected to Power Cable or
Double-Ended Cable of F3W-MA Receiver
7
3
8
6
1 Yellow RESET
2 Brown +24 VDC
3 Gray MUTE A
4 Pink
MUTE B
5 Black OSSD 1
6 White OSSD 2
0 VDC
7 Blue
AUX
8 Red
2
1
4
5
Female
2
3
4
5
7
6
SLC
6
7
8
MA2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
8
5
7
6
Male
Set model name
User’s Manual
5
3
4
1 Yellow CFG In
2 Brown +24 VDC
3 Gray COM+
4 Pink
COM5 Black Muting Output A
6 White Muting Output B
0 VDC
7 Blue
CFG Out
8 Red
Connected to Power Cable or
Double-Ended Cable of F3W-MA Receiver
Connected to Single-Ended Cable or
Double-Ended Cable for Receiver
F3SG-R
8
Female
CN
F39-GCN4
2
1
Connected to Power Cable or
Double-Ended Cable of F3SG-RA Receiver
MA1
1
172
6
7
28
2
1
28
78
MA2
24.4
17
1 Yellow RESET
2 Brown +24 VDC
3 Gray
Muting Enable
4 Pink
Not used
5 Black OSSD 1
6 White OSSD 2
0 VDC
7 Blue
AUX
8 Red
Emitter
Receiver
F39-GCN4-L
F39-GCN4-D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Wiring/Installation
4-5-4. Cable Connections(F3SG-RE Series)
Extension of the cable must be within a specified length. If it isn't, safety function may not
work properly, resulting in danger.
There are no dedicated cables for the F3SG-RE series. You can use the cables that satisfy the
following requirements:
1. Emitter: 4-wire Receiver: 4-wire4
2. 0.3 mm2 or larger, conductor resistance 0.058 ohms/m max.
Do not use cables in the same conduit as high voltage or electric power lines.
Chapter
4
4-5-4-1. Recommended Cable
Wiring
 Single-Ended Cable (Round Water-resistant Connector: Connector Connected to
Cable, Socket on One Cable End) (XS2F-M124SM, sold separately)
(Unit: mm)
Cable color of
core sheath
Brown
White
Blue
Black
Terminal No.
1
2
3
4
Appearance
Sheath material
Cable length
PVC
PVC
PVC
PUR
PUR
PUR
2m
5m
10 m
2m
5m
10 m
Model
XS2F-M12PVC4S2M
XS2F-M12PVC4S5M
XS2F-M12PVC4S10M
XS2F-M12PUR4S2M
XS2F-M12PUR4S5M
XS2F-M12PUR4S10M
Specifications
M12 connector (4-pin),
4 wires
 Double-Ended Cable (Round Water-resistant Connector: Connectors Connected to
Cable, Socket and Plug on Cable Ends) (XS2W-M124SSM, sold separately)
(Unit: mm)
Appearance
Sheath material
Cable length
PVC
PVC
PVC
PUR
PUR
PUR
2m
5m
10 m
2m
5m
10 m
Terminal No.
1
2
3
4
Model
XS2W-M12PVC4SS2M
XS2W-M12PVC4SS5M
XS2W-M12PVC4SS10M
XS2W-M12PUR4SS2M
XS2W-M12PUR4SS5M
XS2W-M12PUR4SS10M
Specifications
M12 connector (4-pin),
on both ends
Cable Color
of core
sheath
1 Brown
2 White
3 Blue
4 Black
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
173
Wiring/Installation
If the length of the Connector Cable, Socket on One Cable End (XS2F-M124SM) is
insufficient, use 1 or more Two Connector Cable, Socket and Plug on Cable Ends (XS2W-M12
4SSM) to extend the length, as required. The total cable extension length of the power cable
must be 100 m max.
<Connection example>
Emitter
Cable is gray
Connectors Connected to Cable, Connector Connected to Cable,
Socket and Plug on Cable Ends Socket on One Cable End
(XS2W-M124SSM)
(XS2F-M124SM)
Receiver
Cable is black
4-5-4-2. Extending Cable Length with Commercially Available Cable
Chapter
When you need to use a cable that is not specified by OMRON, use a cable that satisfies the following specifications.
1. Emitter: 4-wire Receiver: 4-wire
2. 0.3 mm2 or larger, conductor resistance 0.058 ohms/m max.
4
Do not use cables in the same conduit as high voltage or electric power lines.
Wiring
4-5-4-3. Reduced Wiring Connector System
Reduced wiring can be achieved by using a Y-Joint Plug/Socket Connector (F39-GCNY1, sold separately).
When using the reduced wiring connector system, the Operating Range Selection is fixed to Long Mode.
 Y-Joint Plug/Socket Connector (F39-GCNY1, sold separately)
15.0
Plug marked with ● (blue circle): Connect to control panel side
Socket marked with ○ (open circle): Connect to emitter
45.5
17.7
CN2
4.6
35.0
To control
panel side
dia
.
40.7
To receiver
To emitter
CN1
M12 x 1
500
<Internal wiring diagram>
Connected to Single-Ended Cable or
Double-Ended cable
2
1
3
4
Brown
White
Blue
Black
+24 VDC
OSSD 2
0V
OSSD 1
Connected to Power Cable or
Double-Ended Cable of F3SG-RE Receiver
㻝
㻞
㻟
㻠
Male
1
2
3
4
1
2
4
3
Female
Connected to Power Cable or
Double-Ended Cable of F3SG-RE Emitter
1
2
4
3
1
2
3
4
Female
Wrong wiring causes the F3SG-RE to go to the Lockout state due to Operating Range Selection Setting error.
174
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Model
L (m)
F39-GCNY1
0.5
Wiring/Installation
4-5-5. Functional Earth Connection
The F3SG-R operates properly without functional earth connection in a general industrial environment.
If the F3SG-R fails due to electrical noise, connecting the F3SG-R to the functional earth may work to
prevent the noise. It is recommended the functional earth terminal of the F3SG-R be connected to
functional earth cables. Connection with protective earth cables may cause the F3SG-R to fail due to a
noise level of the environment.
When you connect the F3SG-R with the functional earth, connect an earth cable to the functional earth
terminals, as shown below.
The size of the screws of the terminals is M3. Make sure to use crimp terminals that fits the size.
The earth cable must have a cross section of 1 mm2 or more with conductor resistance of 0.058 ohms/
m or less and a length of 20 m or less.
Bottom view of F3SG-RE
Chapter
Bottom view of F3SG-RA
4
Wiring
Power Cable
Functional earth terminal (M3)
Connect an earth cable to either of
these screws. *
Do not loosen these screws.
Do not loosen these screws.
* Select either of the terminals of the emitter and receiver according to your environment.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
175
Wiring/Installation
Chapter
4
Wiring
176
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Chapter 5
Input/Output Circuit and Applications
5-1. Input/Output Circuit
179
5-1-1. Entire Circuit Diagram
179
5-1-1-1. F3SG-RA Series
179
5-1-1-2. F3SG-RE Series
181
183
5-1-2-1. F3SG-RA Series
183
5-1-2-2. F3SG-RE Series
183
5
184
Input/Output Circuit and Applications
Chapter
5-1-2. Input Circuit Diagram by Function
5-2. Wiring Examples(F3SG-RA Series)
5-2-1. Standalone F3SG-RA using PNP Outputs
184
5-2-2. Standalone F3SG-RA using NPN Outputs
185
5-2-3. Standard Muting Mode/Exit-Only Muting Mode using PNP
Outputs
186
5-2-4. Standard Muting Mode/Exit-Only Muting Mode using NPN
Outputs
187
5-2-5. Standard Muting Mode/Exit-Only Muting Mode with two
Muting Sensors using PNP Outputs
188
5-2-6. Standard Muting Mode/Exit-Only Muting Mode with two
Muting Sensors using NPN Outputs
189
5-2-7. Standard Muting Mode with four Muting Sensors using PNP
Outputs
190
5-2-8. Standard Muting Mode with four Muting Sensors using NPN
Outputs
191
5-2-9. Standard Muting Mode with F3W-MA
Configuration with 4-Joint Plug/Socket Connector)
(T-Shaped
192
5-2-10. Exit-Only Muting Mode with F3W-MA
Configuration with 4-Joint Plug/Socket Connector)
(L-Shaped
193
5-2-11. Pre-Resest Mode using PNP Output
194
5-2-12. Pre-Resest Mode using NPN Output
195
5-2-13. Standalone F3SG-RA with Y-Joint Plug/Socket Connector
using PNP outputs
196
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
177
Input/Output Circuit and Applications
5-2-14. Standalone F3SG-RA with Y-Joint Plug/Socket Connector
using NPN outputs
197
5-2-15. F3SG-RA with Y-Joint Plug/Socket Connector in Standard
Muting Mode/Exit-Only Muting Mode using PNP outputs
198
5-3. Wiring Examples (F3SG-RE Series)
199
5-3-1. Short Mode
199
5-3-2. Long Mode
200
5-3-3. Standalone F3SG-RE with Y-Joint Plug/Socket Connector
201
5-4. Connectable Safety Control Units
Chapter
5
178
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
202
Input/Output Circuit and Applications
5-1. Input/Output Circuit
5-1-1. Entire Circuit Diagram
The entire circuit diagram of the F3SG-R is shown below.
The numbers in the circles indicate the connector's pin numbers.
5-1-1-1. F3SG-RA Series
 PNP Output
Indicator
1
Test Input
Circuit
Emitter
Main Circuit
2
4
Receiver
Main Circuit 2
Reset input
circuit
1
Muting input
circuit B
4
Muting input
circuit A
3
6
White
Not used
Yellow Not used
Blue
Input/Output Circuit
2
TEST
5
3
Black
Chapter
5
+24 VDC
Brown
Brown
Yellow RESET
Pink
MUTE B
Gray
MUTE A
White
OSSD 2
Load
Receiver
Main Circuit 1
Indicator
5
Black
OSSD 1
Load
8
7
Red
Blue
AUX
Load
0 VDC
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
179
Input/Output Circuit and Applications
 NPN Output
Indicator
1
Test Input
Circuit
Emitter
Main Circuit
2
4
5
3
2
Chapter
Reset input
circuit
1
Muting input
circuit B
4
5
Muting input
circuit A
Input/Output Circuit
Receiver
Main Circuit 2
3
6
Black
TEST
White
Not used
Yellow
Not used
Blue
Brown
RESET
Yellow
Pink
MUTE B
Gray
MUTE A
Load
White OSSD 2
Load
Receiver
Main Circuit 1
Indicator
5
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Black
OSSD 1
Load
8
7
180
+24 VDC
Brown
Red
Blue
AUX
0 VDC
Input/Output Circuit and Applications
5-1-1-2. F3SG-RE Series
 PNP Output
Indicator
+24 V
1 Brown
Operating Range
Select Input circuit
Emitter
Main Circuit
2
4
3
1
2
Black
Operating Range
Select Input
Not used
Blue
Brown
White
Chapter
Receiver
Main Circuit 2
White
OSSD 2
Black
Receiver
Main Circuit 1
Input/Output Circuit
4
5
Load
OSSD 1
Load
Indicator
3
Blue
0V
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
181
Input/Output Circuit and Applications
 NPN Output
Indicator
1
Emitter
Main Circuit
Operating Range
Select Input circuit
2
4
3
1
+24 V
Brown
White
Operating Range
Select Input
Black
Not used
Blue
Brown
Load
Chapter
Receiver
Main Circuit 2
2
OSSD 2
Load
5
Input/Output Circuit
182
White
Receiver
Main Circuit 1
4
Black
OSSD 1
Indicator
3
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Blue
0V
Input/Output Circuit and Applications
5-1-2. Input Circuit Diagram by Function
The input circuit diagrams of by function are shown below.
5-1-2-1. F3SG-RA Series
 PNP Output
<Input circuit (Reset input, Muting inputs A/B)>
<Input circuit (Test input)>
+24 VDC
5V
Short circuit current:
3 mA
Emitter
Main
Circuit
+24 VDC
Receiver
Main
Circuit
0 VDC
Short circuit current *
0 VDC
 NPN Output
<Input circuit (Reset, Muting inputs A/B)>
0 VDC
Short circuit current *
0 VDC
*Short circuit current: 5mA (Reset input), 3mA㸦Muting inputs A/B㸧
5-1-2-2. F3SG-RE Series
Input/Output Circuit
Short circuit current:
3 mA
Receiver
Main
Circuit
5
Emitter
Main
Circuit
+24 VDC
+24 VDC
5V
Chapter
<Input circuit (Test input)>
 PNP Output
<Input circuit (Operating Range Select Input)>
+24 VDC
5V
Short circuit current:
3 mA
Emitter
Main
Circuit
0 VDC
 NPN Output
<Input circuit (Operating Range Select Input)>
5V
Emitter
Main
Circuit
+24 VDC
Short circuit current:
3 mA
0 VDC
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
183
Input/Output Circuit and Applications
5-2. Wiring Examples(F3SG-RA Series)
Examples of a motor control system using the F3SG-RA are shown below. This chapter shows examples
equivalent to up to PLe, Category 4 (ISO13849-1).
5-2-1. Standalone F3SG-RA using PNP Outputs
The following is the example of Muting not used, External Device Monitoring enabled, Manual Reset
mode, PNP output and External Test in 24 V Active.
[DIP Switch settings] *2
Function
DIP-SW1
EDM Enabled
Receiver
Manual Reset
PNP (factory default setting)
Emitter
DIP-SW2
㻞
㻻㻺
㻞
㻻㻺
㻟
㻻㻺
㻟
㻻㻺
㻠
㻻㻺
㻠
㻻㻺
㻣
㻻㻺
㻣
㻻㻺
External Test: 24 V Active (factory default setting)
㻠
㻻㻺
: Indicates a switch position.
Configure functions with the DIP Switches before wiring.
Receiver
Emitter
KM1
24 VDC : Brown
OSSD2 : White
OSSD1 : Black
AUX : Red
RESET : Yellow *1
0 VDC : Blue
24 VDC : Brown
TEST : Black
Not used : White
0 VDC : Blue
S2
MUTE B : Pink
Wiring Examples(F3SG-RA Series)
F39-JGA-D
MUTE A : Gray
5
F39-JGA-L
Not used : Yellow
Chapter
[Wiring Example]
KM2
S1
KM1
KM2
KM1
KM2
+24 VDC
M
Functional Earth
S1: Test Switch (Connect the line to 0 V
if this switch is not required)
S2: Lockout/Interlock Reset Switch
KM1, KM2: Safety relay with forcibly guided contacts (G7SA)
or magnetic contactor
M: 3-phase motor
*1. Also used as EDM input line.
*2. The functions are configurable with DIP Switch. Refer to
Chapter 3 Setting with DIP Switch for more information on
setting the functions by the DIP Switch.
Power Supply
0 VDC
Beam state
Unblocked
Blocked
Test Switch (S1)
Reset Switch (S2)
OSSD
The wiring examples in later pages do not indicate functional earth. To use functional earth, wire an earth cable
according to the example above. Refer to 4-5-5. Functional Earth Connection for more information.
184
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Input/Output Circuit and Applications
5-2-2. Standalone F3SG-RA using NPN Outputs
The following is the example of Muting not used, External Device Monitoring enabled, Manual Reset
mode, NPN output and External Test in 0 V Active.
[DIP Switch settings] *2
Function
DIP-SW1
EDM Enabled
Receiver
Manual Reset
NPN
Emitter
DIP-SW2
㻞
㻻㻺
㻞
㻻㻺
㻟
㻻㻺
㻟
㻻㻺
㻠
㻻㻺
㻠
㻻㻺
㻣
㻻㻺
㻣
㻻㻺
External Test: 0 V Active
㻠
㻻㻺
: Indicates a switch position.
Configure functions with the DIP Switches before wiring.
Emitter
24 VDC : Brown
OSSD2 : White
OSSD1 : Black
AUX : Red
MUTE B : Pink
MUTE A : Gray
RESET : Yellow *1
0 VDC : Blue
24 VDC : Brown
TEST : Black
Not used : Yellow
KM1
Wiring Examples(F3SG-RA Series)
Not used : White
F39-JGA-D
5
0 VDC : Blue
F39-JGA-L
Chapter
Receiver
[Wiring Example]
KM2
KM1
S2
S1
KM2
KM1
KM2
+24 VDC
M
S1: Test Switch (Connect the line to 24 V if this switch is not required)
S2: Lockout/Interlock Reset Switch
KM1, KM2: Safety relay with forcibly guided contacts (G7SA)
or magnetic contactor
M: 3-phase motor
*1. Also used as EDM input line.
*2. The functions are configurable with DIP Switch. Refer to
Chapter 3 Setting with DIP Switch for more information on
setting the functions by the DIP Switch.
Power Supply
0 VDC
Beam state
Unblocked
Blocked
Test Switch (S1)
Reset Switch (S2)
OSSD
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
185
Input/Output Circuit and Applications
5-2-3. Standard Muting Mode/Exit-Only Muting Mode using PNP Outputs
The following is the example of External Device Monitoring disabled, Auto Reset mode, PNP output
and External Test in 24 V Active.
[DIP Switch settings] *6
Function
DIP-SW1
EDM Disabled (factory default setting)
Receiver
Auto Reset (factory default setting)
PNP (factory default setting)
Emitter
DIP-SW2
㻞
㻻㻺
㻞
㻻㻺
㻟
㻻㻺
㻟
㻻㻺
㻠
㻻㻺
㻠
㻻㻺
㻣
㻻㻺
㻣
㻻㻺
External Test: 24 V Active (factory default setting)
㻠
㻻㻺
: Indicates a switch position.
Configure functions with the DIP Switches before wiring.
S1
24 VDC : Brown
ML
S2
*2
+24 VDC
Power Supply
0 VDC
S1: Test Switch (Connect the line to 0 V if this switch
is not required)
S2: Lockout/Interlock Reset Switch,
Override Switch
or Override Cancel Switch
ML: Muting lamp
Muting
Actuator *5
IN1
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
IN2
Safety
Controller *3 *4
*1. Also used as Override input line.
*2. Make sure to connect an override cancel switch to Beam state Unblocked
Blocked
the Reset line when using the override function.
Otherwise the override state may not be released by
Test Switch (S1)
the override cancel switch, resulting in serious injury.
*3. Refer to 5-4. Connectable Safety Control Units for
MUTE A
more information.
*4. The safety controller and the F3SG-R must share
MUTE B
the power supply or be connected to the common
terminal of the power supply.
OSSD
*5. Refer to Smart Muting Actuator F3W-MA Series
User's Manual for more information.
*6. The functions are configurable with DIP Switch.
Refer to Chapter 3 Setting with DIP Switch for more
information on setting the functions by the DIP
Switch.
186
OSSD2 : White
OSSD1 : Black
AUX : Red
MUTE B : Pink
RESET : Yellow *1
F39-JGA-D
0 VDC : Blue
24 VDC : Brown
TEST : Black
0 VDC : Blue
Wiring Examples(F3SG-RA Series)
Not used : Yellow
5
Not used : White
F39-JGA-L
MUTE A : Gray
Chapter
Emitter
Receiver
[Wiring Example]
Input/Output Circuit and Applications
5-2-4. Standard Muting Mode/Exit-Only Muting Mode using NPN Outputs
The following is the example of External Device Monitoring enabled, Auto Reset mode, NPN output
and External Test in 0 V Active.
[DIP Switch settings] *3
Function
DIP-SW1
EDM Enabled
Receiver
Auto Reset (factory default setting)
NPN
Emitter
DIP-SW2
㻞
㻻㻺
㻞
㻻㻺
㻟
㻻㻺
㻟
㻻㻺
㻠
㻻㻺
㻠
㻻㻺
㻣
㻻㻺
㻣
㻻㻺
External Test: 0 V Active
㻠
㻻㻺
: Indicates a switch position.
Configure functions with the DIP Switches before wiring.
Emitter
KM1
24 VDC : Brown
OSSD2 : White
OSSD1 : Black
AUX : Red
MUTE B : Pink
MUTE A : Gray
RESET : Yellow *1
0 VDC : Blue
24 VDC : Brown
TEST : Black
Not used : Yellow
ML
KM1
KM2
KM2
+24 VDC
S1
S3
S2
*2
S4
S5
Power Supply
M
0 VDC
KM1
KM2
S1: Test Switch (Connect the line to 24 V if this switch is not required)
S2: Override Cancel Switch
S3: Lockout/Interlock Reset Switch or Override Switch
S4, S5: Muting sensor
KM1, KM2: Safety relay with forcibly guided
contacts (G7SA) or magnetic contactor
M: 3-phase motor
ML: Muting lamp
Beam state
Wiring Examples(F3SG-RA Series)
Not used : White
F39-JGA-D
5
0 VDC : Blue
F39-JGA-L
Chapter
Receiver
[Wiring Example]
*1. Also used as Override input line.
*2. Make sure to connect an override cancel switch to the Reset line
when using the override function. Otherwise the override state may
not be released by the override cancel switch, resulting in serious
injury.
*3. The functions are configurable with DIP Switch. Refer to Chapter 3
Setting with DIP Switch for more information on setting the
functions by the DIP Switch.
Unblocked
Blocked
Test Switch (S1)
MUTE A
MUTE B
OSSD
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
187
Input/Output Circuit and Applications
5-2-5. Standard Muting Mode/Exit-Only Muting Mode with two
Muting Sensors using PNP Outputs
The following is the example of External Device Monitoring disabled, Auto Reset mode, PNP output
and External Test in 24 V Active.
[DIP Switch settings] *5
Function
DIP-SW1
EDM Disabled (factory default setting)
Receiver
Auto Reset (factory default setting)
PNP (factory default setting)
Emitter
DIP-SW2
㻞
㻻㻺
㻞
㻻㻺
㻟
㻻㻺
㻟
㻻㻺
㻠
㻻㻺
㻠
㻻㻺
㻣
㻻㻺
㻣
㻻㻺
External Test: 24 V Active (factory default setting)
㻠
㻻㻺
: Indicates a switch position.
Configure functions with the DIP Switches before wiring.
Emitter
24 VDC : Brown
OSSD2 : White
ML
S2
*2
S1
OSSD1 : Black
AUX : Red
RESET : Yellow *1
0 VDC : Blue
24 VDC : Brown
TEST : Black
Not used : Yellow
Not used : White
Wiring Examples(F3SG-RA Series)
0 VDC : Blue
F39-JGA-D
MUTE A : Gray
5
F39-JGA-L
MUTE B : Pink
Chapter
Receiver
[Wiring Example]
IN1
IN2
Safety
Controller *3 *4
A1
Muting
Sensor
(PNP
output)
B1
+24 VDC
Power Supply
0 VDC
Reflector
S1: Test Switch (Connect the line to 0 V if this switch is not required)
S2: Lockout/Interlock Reset Switch,Override Switch or Override Cancel Switch
ML: Muting lamp
A1, B1: Muting sensor
Beam state
Unblocked
Blocked
Test Switch (S1)
MUTE A
MUTE B
OSSD
188
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
*1. Also used as Override input line.
*2. Make sure to connect an override cancel switch to the
Reset line when using the override function. Otherwise
the override state may not be released by the override
cancel switch, resulting in serious injury.
*3. Refer to 5-4. Connectable Safety Control Units for
more information.
*4. The safety controller and the F3SG-R must share the
power supply or be connected to the common terminal
of the power supply.
*5. The functions are configurable with DIP Switch. Refer
to Chapter 3 Setting with DIP Switch for more
information on setting the functions by the DIP Switch.
Input/Output Circuit and Applications
5-2-6. Standard Muting Mode/Exit-Only Muting Mode with two
Muting Sensors using NPN Outputs
The following is the example of External Device Monitoring enabled, Auto Reset mode, NPN output
and External Test in 0 V Active.
[DIP Switch settings] *3
Function
DIP-SW1
EDM Enabled
Receiver
Auto Reset (factory default setting)
NPN
Emitter
DIP-SW2
㻞
㻻㻺
㻞
㻻㻺
㻟
㻻㻺
㻟
㻻㻺
㻠
㻻㻺
㻠
㻻㻺
㻣
㻻㻺
㻣
㻻㻺
External Test: 0 V Active
㻠
㻻㻺
: Indicates a switch position.
Emitter
Receiver
Configure functions with the DIP Switches before wiring.
[Wiring Example]
S2
*2
24 VDC : Brown
OSSD2 : White
OSSD1 : Black
AUX : Red
MUTE B : Pink
MUTE A : Gray
RESET : Yellow *1
0 VDC : Blue
24 VDC : Brown
TEST : Black
Not used : Yellow
S1
KM1
Wiring Examples(F3SG-RA Series)
ML
5
Not used : White
F39-JGA-D
Chapter
0 VDC : Blue
F39-JGA-L
KM2
S3
KM1
KM2
KM1
KM2
A1
Muting
Sensor
(NPN
output)
+24 VDC
M
Power Supply
B1
0 VDC
Reflector
S1: Test Switch (Connect the line to 24 V if this switch is
not required)
S2: Override Cancel Switch
S3: Lockout/Interlock Reset Switch or Override Switch
KM1, KM2: Safety relay with forcibly guided contacts (G7SA)
or magnetic contactor
M: 3-phase motor
ML: Muting lamp
A1, B1: Muting sensor
Unblocked
Beam state Blocked
*1. Also used as Override input line.
*2. Make sure to connect an override cancel switch to the Reset line
when using the override function. Otherwise the override state
may not be released by the override cancel switch, resulting in
serious injury.
*3. The functions are configurable with DIP Switch. Refer to
Chapter 3 Setting with DIP Switch for more information on
setting the functions by the DIP Switch.
Test Switch (S1)
MUTE A
MUTE B
E
OSSD
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
189
Input/Output Circuit and Applications
5-2-7. Standard Muting Mode with four Muting Sensors using
PNP Outputs
The following is the example of External Device Monitoring disabled, Auto Reset mode, PNP output
and External Test in 24 V Active.
[DIP Switch settings] *5
Function
DIP-SW1
EDM Disabled (factory default setting)
Receiver
Auto Reset (factory default setting)
PNP (factory default setting)
Emitter
DIP-SW2
㻞
㻻㻺
㻞
㻻㻺
㻟
㻻㻺
㻟
㻻㻺
㻠
㻻㻺
㻠
㻻㻺
㻣
㻻㻺
㻣
㻻㻺
External Test: 24 V Active (factory default setting)
㻠
㻻㻺
: Indicates a switch position.
Emitter
Receiver
Configure functions with the DIP Switches before wiring.
[Wiring Example]
S2
*2
S1
24 VDC : Brown
OSSD2 : White
OSSD1 : Black
AUX : Red
MUTE B : Pink
MUTE A : Gray
0 VDC : Blue
RESET : Yellow *1
F39-JGA-D
24 VDC : Brown
TEST : Black
Wiring Examples(F3SG-RA Series)
Not used : Yellow
5
0 VDC : Blue
Chapter
Not used : White
F39-JGA-L
ML
IN1
IN2
Reflector
B1
F3SG
Safety
Controller *3 *4
B2
+24 VDC
Power Supply
A1
F3SG
Muting
Sensor
(PNP
output)
A2
*1. Also used as Override input line.
*2. Make sure to connect an override cancel switch to the Reset line
when using the override function. Otherwise the override state may
not be released by the override cancel switch, resulting in serious
injury.
*3.Refer to 5-4. Connectable Safety Control Units for more information.
*4.The safety controller and the F3SG-R must share the power supply
or be connected to the common terminal of the power supply.
*5. The functions are configurable with DIP Switch. Refer to Chapter 3
Setting with DIP Switch for more information on setting the functions
by the DIP Switch.
190
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
0 VDC
S1: Test Switch (Connect the line to 0 V if this
switch is not required)
S2: Lockout/Interlock Reset Switch,
Override Switch or Override Cancel Switch
ML: Muting lamp
A1, A2, B1, B2: Muting sensor
Beam state Unblocked
Blocked
Test Switch (S1)
MUTE A
MUTE B
OSSD
Input/Output Circuit and Applications
5-2-8. Standard Muting Mode with four Muting Sensors using
NPN Outputs
The following is the example of External Device Monitoring enabled, Auto Reset mode, NPN output
and External Test in 0 V Active.
[DIP Switch settings] *3
Function
DIP-SW1
EDM Enabled
Receiver
Auto Reset (factory default setting)
NPN
Emitter
DIP-SW2
㻞
㻻㻺
㻞
㻻㻺
㻟
㻻㻺
㻟
㻻㻺
㻠
㻻㻺
㻠
㻻㻺
㻣
㻻㻺
㻣
㻻㻺
External Test: 0 V Active
㻠
㻻㻺
: Indicates a switch position.
Emitter
Receiver
Configure functions with the DIP Switches before wiring.
[Wiring Example]
S2
*2
24 VDC : Brown
OSSD2 : White
OSSD1 : Black
AUX : Red
MUTE B : Pink
MUTE A : Gray
RESET : Yellow *1
0 VDC : Blue
24 VDC : Brown
TEST : Black
Not used : Yellow
S1
KM1
Wiring Examples(F3SG-RA Series)
ML
5
Not used : White
F39-JGA-D
Chapter
0 VDC : Blue
F39-JGA-L
KM2
S3
KM1
KM2
KM1
Reflector
B1
F3SG
KM2
M
B2
+24 VDC
Power Supply
Muting
Sensor
(NPN
output)
A1
F3SG
0 VDC
A2
*1. Also used as Override input line.
*2. Make sure to connect an override cancel switch to the Reset line when
using the override function. Otherwise the override state maynot be
released by the override cancel switch, resulting in serious injury.
*3. The functions are configurable with DIP Switch. Refer to Chapter 3
Setting with DIP Switch for more information on setting the functions by
the DIP Switch.
S1: Test Switch (Connect the line to 24 V if this switch is
not required)
S2: Override Cancel Switch
S3: Lockout/Interlock Reset Switch or Override Switch
KM1, KM2: Safety relay with forcibly guided contacts (G7SA)
or magnetic contactor
M: 3-phase motor
ML: Muting lamp
A1, A2, B1, B2: Muting sensor
Beam state
Unblocked
Blocked
Test Switch (S1)
MUTE A
MUTE B
E
OSSD
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
191
Input/Output Circuit and Applications
5-2-9. Standard Muting Mode with F3W-MA (T-Shaped
Configuration with 4-Joint Plug/Socket Connector)
The following is the example of F3SG-RA with Scan Code B, External Device Monitoring disabled,
Auto Reset mode, PNP output and External Test in 24 V Active, and F3W-MA with Scan Code A,
Chattering and Void Space Prevention 1, Off-Delay 100 ms and Muting Enable disabled.
[DIP Switch settings]*1
Function
DIP-SW1
Scan Code B
EDM Disabled (factory default setting)
Receiver
Auto Reset (factory default setting)
F3SG-RA
PNP (factory default setting)
Scan Code B
Emitter
External Test: 24 V Active (factory default setting)
Scan Code A
Chattering and Void Space Prevention 1
Receiver
F3W-MA
Primary
Off-Delay 100 ms
Scan Code A
Receiver
Emitter
-
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻝
㻞
㻟
㻠
㻣
-
㻝
㻞
㻟
㻠
㻡
㻢
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
No setting
required
F3W-MA Receiver
(Primary)
F39-GCN4-L
F3SG-RA Receiver
F3W-MA Emitter
(Secondary)
F3W-MA Receiver
(Secondary)
F39-GCN4-D
S2
*4
24 VDC:
Brown
OSSD 2:
White
OSSD 1:
Black
AUX:
Red
Not used:
Pink
Reset:
Yellow *3
0 VDC:
Blue
24 VDC:
Brown
F39-JG□A-D
TEST:
Black
F39-JG□A-L
Muting Enable:
Gray
F3W-MA Emitter
(Primary)
F3SG-RA Emitter
[Wiring Example]
0 VDC:
Blue
Wiring Examples(F3SG-RA Series)
: Indicates a switch position.
S1
ML
+24 VDC
Power Supply
0 VDC
S1: Test Switch (Connect the line to 0 V if this switch is not required)
S2: Lockout/Interlock Reset Switch, Override Switch or Override Cancel Switch
ML: Muting lamp
IN1
IN2
Safety
Controller *5 *6
*1. The functions are configurable with DIP Switch. For the DIP Switch of the F3SG-RA, refer to the Chapter 3 Setting with DIP
Switch. For the DIP Switch of the F3W-MA, refer to the Smart Muting Actuator F3W-MA Series User's Manual.
*2. DIP Switch Bank 2 of F3W-MA receiver is not used.
*3. Also used as Override input line.
*4. Make sure to connect an override cancel switch to the Reset line when using the override function. Otherwise the override state
may not be released by the override cancel switch, resulting in serious injury.
*5. Refer to 5-4. Connectable Safety Control Units for more information.
*6. The safety controller and the F3SG-R must share the power supply or be connected to the common terminal of the power
supply.
192
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
-
Configure functions with the DIP Switches before wiring.
Not used:
Yellow
5
F3W-MA
Secondary
Not used:
White
Chapter
Muting Enable Disabled (factory default setting)
Emitter
㻝
㻞
㻟
㻠
㻣
㻝
㻠
㻝
㻞
㻟
㻠
㻡
㻢
㻝
No setting
required
DIP-SW2
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Input/Output Circuit and Applications
5-2-10. Exit-Only Muting Mode with F3W-MA (L-Shaped
Configuration with 4-Joint Plug/Socket Connector)
The following is the example of F3SG-RA with Scan Code A, External Device Monitoring disabled,
Auto Reset mode, PNP output and External Test in 24 V Active, and F3W-MA with Scan Code B,
Chattering and Void Space Prevention 1, Off-Delay 100 ms and Muting Enable enabled.
[DIP Switch settings]*1
Function
Scan Code A (factory default setting)
EDM Disabled (factory default setting)
Auto Reset (factory default setting)
Receiver
DIP-SW1
F3SG-RA
PNP (factory default setting)
Scan Code A (factory default setting)
External Test: 24 V Active (factory default setting)
Scan Code B (factory default setting)
Chattering and Void Space Prevention 1
Emitter
F3W-MA
Receiver
Off-Delay 100 ms
Muting Enable Enabled
Scan Code B (factory default setting)
Emitter
DIP-SW2
Wiring Examples(F3SG-RA Series)
Configure functions with the DIP Switches before wiring.
F3W-MA Receiver
(Primary)
F39-GCN4-L
F39-GCN4-D
S1
S2
*4
S3
24 VDC:
Brown
OSSD 2:
White
OSSD 1:
Black
AUX:
Red
Not used:
Pink
Muting Enable:
Gray
Reset:
Yellow *3
0 VDC:
Blue
24 VDC:
Brown
F39-JG□A-D
TEST:
Black
Not used:
Yellow
Not used:
White
F39-JG□A-L
0 VDC:
Blue
F3SG-RA Receiver
F3SG-RA Emitter
[Wiring Example]
F3W-MA Emitter
(Primary)
5
㻻㻺
㻝
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻞
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻟
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻠
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻣
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻻㻺
㻝
㻻㻺 *2
㻻㻺
㻞
㻻㻺 *2
㻻㻺
㻟
㻻㻺 *2
㻻㻺
㻠
㻻㻺 *2
㻻㻺
㻡
㻻㻺 *2
㻻㻺
㻢
㻻㻺 *2
㻻㻺
: Indicates a switch position.
Chapter
㻝
㻞
㻟
㻠
㻣
㻝
㻠
㻝
㻞
㻟
㻠
㻡
㻢
㻝
ML
+24 VDC
Power Supply
0 VDC
S1: Test Switch (Connect the line to 0 V if this switch is not required)
S2: Lockout/Interlock Reset Switch, Override Switch or Override Cancel Switch
S3: Muting Enable Switch
ML: Muting lamp
IN1
IN2
Safety
Controller *5 *6
*1. The functions are configurable with DIP Switch. For the DIP Switch of the F3SG-RA, refer to the Chapter 3 Setting with DIP
Switch. For the DIP Switch of the F3W-MA, refer to the Smart Muting Actuator F3W-MA Series User's Manual.
*2. DIP Switch Bank 2 of F3W-MA receiver is not used.
*3. Also used as Override input line.
*4. Make sure to connect an override cancel switch to the Reset line when using the override function. Otherwise the override
state may not be released by the override cancel switch, resulting in serious injury.
*5. Refer to 5-4. Connectable Safety Control Units for more information.
*6. The safety controller and the F3SG-R must share the power supply or be connected to the common terminal of the power
supply.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
193
Input/Output Circuit and Applications
5-2-11. Pre-Resest Mode using PNP Output
The following is the example of External Device Monitoring disabled, Pre-Reset mode, PNP output and
External Test in 24 V Active.
[DIP Switch settings] *4
Function
DIP-SW1
EDM Disabled (factory default setting)
Receiver
Pre-Reset
PNP (factory default setting)
Emitter
DIP-SW2
㻞
㻻㻺
㻞
㻻㻺
㻟
㻻㻺
㻟
㻻㻺
㻠
㻻㻺
㻠
㻻㻺
㻣
㻻㻺
㻣
㻻㻺
External Test: 24 V Active (factory default setting)
㻠
㻻㻺
: Indicates a switch position.
Configure functions with the DIP Switches before wiring.
Emitter
Receiver
[Wiring Example]
S2
S1
24 VDC : Brown
S3
+24 VDC
Power Supply
0 VDC
S1: Test Switch (Connect the line to 0 V if this switch is
not required)
S2: Lockout/Interlock Reset Switch
S3: Pre-Reset Switch
PLC: Programmable controller
(Used for monitoring only. NOT related to safety system.)
IN1
IN
PLC *3
Pre-Reset Switch (S3)
Beam state
Unblocked
Blocked
Reset Switch (S2)
OSSD
T1
T2
T3
T1: Push time: must be T1 >= 300ms
T2: Pre-reset limit time between Pre-reset and Reset: must be T2 <= 60s
T3: Push time: must be T3 >= 300ms
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
IN2
Safety
Controller *1 *2
*1. Refer to 5-4. Connectable Safety Control Units for
more information.
*2. The safety controller and the F3SG-R must share the
power supply or be connected to the common terminal
of the power supply.
*3. When connecting to the PLC, the output mode must
be changed with the Configuration Tool.
*4. The functions are configurable with DIP Switch. Refer
to Chapter 3 Setting with DIP Switch for more
information on setting the functions by the DIP Switch.
194
OSSD2 : White
OSSD1 : Black
AUX : Red
Not used : Pink
PRE-RESET : Gray
0 VDC : Blue
RESET : Yellow
F39-JGA-D
24 VDC : Brown
TEST : Black
Not used : Yellow
Wiring Examples(F3SG-RA Series)
0 VDC : Blue
5
Not used : White
Chapter
F39-JGA-L
Input/Output Circuit and Applications
5-2-12. Pre-Reset Mode using NPN Output
The following is the example of External Device Monitoring enabled, Pre-Reset mode, NPN output and
External Test in 0 V Active.
[DIP Switch settings] *2
Function
DIP-SW1
EDM Enabled
Receiver
Pre-Reset
NPN
Emitter
DIP-SW2
㻞
㻻㻺
㻞
㻻㻺
㻟
㻻㻺
㻟
㻻㻺
㻠
㻻㻺
㻠
㻻㻺
㻣
㻻㻺
㻣
㻻㻺
External Test: 0 V Active
㻠
㻻㻺
: Indicates a switch position.
Configure functions with the DIP Switches before wiring.
Emitter
Receiver
[Wiring Example]
24 VDC : Brown
OSSD2 : White
OSSD1 : Black
AUX : Red
Not used : Pink
PRE-RESET : Gray
RESET : Yellow
0 VDC : Blue
24 VDC : Brown
TEST : Black
Not used : Yellow
KM1
KM1
KM2
KM2
+24 VDC
S2
S1
S3
Power Supply
0 VDC
M
KM1
KM2
S1: Test Switch (Connect the line to 24 V if this switch is not
required)
S2: Lockout/Interlock Reset Switch
S3: Pre-Reset Switch
KM1, KM2: External device feedback
M: 3-phase motor
PLC: Programmable controller
(Used for monitoring only. NOT related to safety system.)
IN
Wiring Examples(F3SG-RA Series)
Not used : White
F39-JGA-D
5
0 VDC : Blue
Chapter
F39-JGA-L
PLC *1
*1. When connecting to the PLC, the output mode must be
changed with the Configuration Tool.
*2. The functions are configurable with DIP Switch. Refer to
Chapter 3 Setting with DIP Switch for more information on
setting the functions by the DIP Switch.
Pre-Reset Switch(S3)
Beam state
Unblocked
Blocked
Reset Switch (S2)
OSSD
T1
T2
T3
T1: Push time: must be T1 >= 300ms
T2: Pre-reset limit time between Pre-reset and Reset: must be T2 <= 60s
T3: Push time: must be T3 >= 300ms
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
195
Input/Output Circuit and Applications
5-2-13. Standalone F3SG-RA with Y-Joint Plug/Socket
Connector using PNP outputs
The following is the example of Muting not used, External Device Monitoring enabled, Manual Reset
mode, PNP output and External Test in 24 V Active.
[DIP Switch settings] *3
Function
DIP-SW1
EDM Enabled
Receiver
Manual Reset
PNP (factory default setting)
Emitter
DIP-SW2
㻞
㻻㻺
㻞
㻻㻺
㻟
㻻㻺
㻟
㻻㻺
㻠
㻻㻺
㻠
㻻㻺
㻣
㻻㻺
㻣
㻻㻺
External Test: 24 V Active (factory default setting)
㻠
㻻㻺
: Indicates a switch position.
Configure functions with the DIP Switches before wiring.
[Wiring Example]
Chapter
5
Wiring Examples(F3SG-RA Series)
F39-GCNY2
F39-JGB-L
S1
KM1
24 VDC: Brown
OSSD2: White
KM1
KM2
KM2
+24 VDC
M
Power supply
0 VDC
KM1
IN
KM2
PLC *2
S1: Lockout/Interlock Reset Switch
KM1,KM2: External device feedback
M: 3-phase motor
PLC: Programmable controller
(Used for monitoring only. NOT related to safety system.)
Beam state
Unblocked
Blocked
Reset Switch (S1)
OSSD
196
OSSD1: Black
AUX: Red
MUTE B: Pink
MUTE A: Gray
RESET:
Yellow *1
0 VDC: Blue
F39-JGA-D
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
*1. Also used as EDM input line.
*2. When connecting to the PLC, the output mode must be
changed with the Configuration Tool.
*3. The functions are configurable with DIP Switch. Refer to
Chapter 3 Setting with DIP Switch for more information on
setting the functions by the DIP Switch.
Input/Output Circuit and Applications
5-2-14. Standalone F3SG-RA with Y-Joint Plug/Socket
Connector using NPN outputs
The following is the example of Muting not used, External Device Monitoring enabled, Manual Reset
mode, NPN output and External Test in 24 V Active.
[DIP Switch settings] *3
Function
DIP-SW1
EDM Enabled
Receiver
Manual Reset
NPN
Emitter
DIP-SW2
㻞
㻻㻺
㻞
㻻㻺
㻟
㻻㻺
㻟
㻻㻺
㻠
㻻㻺
㻠
㻻㻺
㻣
㻻㻺
㻣
㻻㻺
External Test: 24 V Active (factory default setting)
㻠
㻻㻺
: Indicates a switch position.
Configure functions with the DIP Switches before wiring.
[Wiring Example]
Chapter
5
S1
KM1
24 VDC: Brown
OSSD2: White
OSSD1: Black
AUX: Red
MUTE B: Pink
MUTE A: Gray
RESET:
Yellow*1
0 VDC: Blue
F39-JGA-D
KM1
KM2
KM2
+24 VDC
Power supply
0 VDC
KM1
IN
KM2
PLC *2
S1: Lockout/Interlock Reset Switch
KM1,KM2: External device feedback
M: 3-phase motor
PLC: Programmable controller
(Used for monitoring only. NOT related to safety system.)
Beam state
M
Wiring Examples(F3SG-RA Series)
F39-GCNY2
F39-JGB-L
*1. Also used as EDM input line.
*2. When connecting to the PLC, the output mode must be
changed with the Configuration Tool.
*3. The functions are configurable with DIP Switch. Refer to
Chapter 3 Setting with DIP Switch for more information on
setting the functions by the DIP Switch.
Unblocked
Blocked
Reset Switch (S1)
OSSD
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
197
Input/Output Circuit and Applications
5-2-15. F3SG-RA with Y-Joint Plug/Socket Connector in Standard
Muting Mode/Exit-Only Muting Mode using PNP outputs
The following is the example of External Device Monitoring disabled, Auto Reset mode, PNP output
and External Test in 24 V Active.
[DIP Switch settings] *5
Function
DIP-SW1
EDM Disabled (factory default setting)
Receiver
Auto Reset (factory default setting)
PNP (factory default setting)
Emitter
DIP-SW2
㻞
㻻㻺
㻞
㻻㻺
㻟
㻻㻺
㻟
㻻㻺
㻠
㻻㻺
㻠
㻻㻺
㻣
㻻㻺
㻣
㻻㻺
External Test: 24 V Active (factory default setting)
㻠
㻻㻺
: Indicates a switch position.
Configure functions with the DIP Switches before wiring.
[Wiring Example]
Chapter
5
F39-GCNY2
S1
*2
24 VDC: Brown
ML
+24V DC
Power supply
0V
IN1
S1: Lockout/Interlock Reset Switch,
Override Switch or Override Cancel Switch
ML: Muting Lamp
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
IN2
Safety
Controller *3 *4
*1. Also used as EDM input line.
*2. Make sure to connect an override cancel switch to
the Reset line when using the override function.
Otherwise the override state may not be released by
the override cancel switch, resulting in serious injury.
*3. Refer to 5-4. Connectable Safety Control Units for
more information.
*4. The safety controller and the F3SG-R must share
the power supply or be connected to the common
terminal of the power supply.
*5. The functions are configurable with DIP Switch.
Refer to Chapter 3 Setting with DIP Switch for more
information on setting the functions by the DIP
Switch.
198
OSSD2: White
OSSD1: Black
MUTE B: Pink
MUTE A: Gray
0 VDC: Blue
RESET: Yellow*1
F39-JGA-D
AUX: Red
Wiring Examples(F3SG-RA Series)
F39-JGB-L
Beam state
Unblocked
Blocked
MUTE A
MUTE B
OSSD
Input/Output Circuit and Applications
5-3. Wiring Examples (F3SG-RE Series)
Examples of a motor control system using the F3SG-RE are shown below. This chapter shows
examples equivalent to ISO 13849-1 (PL e/Category 4).
24 VDC : Brown
OSSD2 : White
OSSD1 : Black
0 V : Blue
24 VDC : Brown
Not used : Black
Operating Range
Select Input : White
0 V : Blue
Emitter
Receiver
5-3-1. Short Mode
Chapter
+24 V
5
DC
Power
Supply
0V
Wiring Examples (F3SG-RE Series)
IN1
Functional Earth
IN2
Safety
Controller *1 *2
*1. Refer to 5-4. Connectable Safety Control Units for more information.
*2. The safety controller and the F3SG-R must share the power supply or
be connected to the common terminal of the power supply.
Beam state
Unblocked
Blocked
OSSD
The wiring examples in later pages do not indicate functional earth. To use functional earth, wire an earth cable
according to the example above. Refer to 4-5-5. Functional Earth Connection for more information.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
199
Input/Output Circuit and Applications
24 VDC : Brown
OSSD2 : White
OSSD1 : Black
0 V : Blue
24 VDC : Brown
Not used : Black
Operating Range
Select Input : White
0 V : Blue
Emitter
Receiver
5-3-2. Long Mode
+24 V
0V
Chapter
IN1
Safety
Controller *1 *2
5
*1. Refer to 5-4. Connectable Safety Control Units for more information.
*2. The safety controller and the F3SG-R must share the power supply or
be connected to the common terminal of the power supply.
Wiring Examples (F3SG-RE Series)
200
IN2
Beam state
Unblocked
Blocked
OSSD
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
DC
Power
Supply
Input/Output Circuit and Applications
5-3-3. Standalone F3SG-RE with Y-Joint Plug/Socket
Connector
When using the reduced wiring connector system, the Operating Range Selection is fixed to Long Mode.
Wrong wiring causes the F3SG-RE to go to the Lockout state due to Operating Range Selection Setting error. Make sure
that the cables are properly wired to the connector, referring to 4-5-4-3. Reduced Wiring Connector System.
F39-GCNY1
24 VDC: Brown
+24V DC
Power supply
0V
IN1
IN2
Safety
Controller *1*2
Beam state
*1. Refer to 5-4. Connectable Safety Control Units
for more information.
*2. The safety controller and the F3SG-RE must
share the power supply or be connected to the
common terminal of the power supply.
Wiring Examples (F3SG-RE Series)
OSSD2: White
5
OSSD1: Black
XS2F-M12P_ _4S_M
Chapter
0 VDC: Blue
XS2W-M12P_ _4SS_M
Unblocked
Blocked
OSSD
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
201
Input/Output Circuit and Applications
5-4. Connectable Safety Control Units
The F3SG-RA or F3SG-RE with PNP output can be connected to the safety control units listed in the table
below.
Connectable Safety Control Units (PNP output)
G9SA-301
G9SA-321
G9SA-501
G9SB-200-B
G9SB-200-D
G9SB-301-B
G9SB-301-D
G9SE-201
G9SE-401
G9SE-221-T
G9SX-AD322-T
G9SX-ADA222-T
G9SX-BC202
G9SX-GS226-T15
G9SP-N10S
G9SP-N10D
G9SP-N20S
NE0A-SCPU01
NE1A-SCPU01
NE1A-SCPU02
DST1-ID12SL-1
DST1-MD16SL-1
DST1-MRD08SL-1
NX-SIH400
NX-SID800
F3SP-T01
The F3SG-R with NPN output can be connected to the safety control unit listed in the table below.
Chapter
Connectable Safety Control Units (NPN output)
G9SA-301-P
5
Connectable Safety Control Units
202
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Chapter 6 Checklists
6-1. Pre-Operation Checklists
204
6-2. Maintenance Checklists
207
Chapter
6
Checklists
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
203
Checklists
6-1. Pre-Operation Checklists
Make sure Responsible Person tests the operation of the F3SG-R after installation to verify that
the F3SG-R operates as intended. Make sure to stop the machine until the test is complete.
Unintended function settings may cause a person to go undetected, resulting in serious injury.
After installation, the highest level administrator must use the following checklist to verify the operation,
placing a check mark in each of the boxes.
6-1-1. Checklists
6-1-1-1. Installation Condition Check
Chapter
6
Pre-Operation Checklists
The machine itself does not prevent the operation of safety functions such as stopping.
The hazardous part of a machine cannot be reached without passing through the detection zone of
the F3SG-R.
The system is configured so that the F3SG-R can always detect a worker who is working in the
hazardous zone.
The interlock reset switch is installed in a location that provides a clear view of the entire hazardous
zone and it cannot be activated from within the hazardous zone.
The pre-reset switch is installed in a location inside the hazardous zone and where it cannot be
operated from outside the hazardous zone.
Safety distance has been calculated. Calculated distance: S = (
)mm
Safety distance has been calculated with larger object resolution when floating blanking or reduced
resolution function is used.
Calculated distance: S = ( )mm
The actual distance is equal to or greater than the calculated distance. Actual distance = (
)mm
Reflective surfaces are not installed in prohibited zones.
Not installed in a retro-reflective configuration.
When muting function is used, a muting sensor must be installed so that muting state should not occur
when a human body enters a detection zone of F3SG-R by mistake.
When muting function is used, a muting sensor must be installed so that muting state should not occur
when a human body enters a hazardous zone of a machine.
When muting function is used, muting state can be checked from where a worker operates or adjust
the machine.
A muting sensor consists of 2 independent devices.
It is not used in flammable or explosive atmosphere.
6-1-1-2. Wiring Check Before Power Is Turned ON
Power supply unit must be dedicated to F3SG-R and other devices for electrical-detection protective
function of F3SG-R such as safety controller and muting sensor, and must not be connected to other
devices. It must have tolerance against total rated current of devices if it is connected to multiple
devices.
The power supply unit is a 24 VDC unit that conforms to the EMC Directive, Low-voltage Directive,
and output holding time specifications.
The power supply polarity is not connected in reverse.
Emitter/receiver cables are properly connected to the respective emitters/receivers.
Double insulation is used between I/O lines and the hazard potential (commercial power supplies,
etc.).
When using PNP output, the outputs are not short-circuited to +24 VDC line. When using NPN output,
the outputs are not short-circuited to 0 V line.
When using PNP output, loads are not connected to +24 VDC line. When using NPN output, loads
are not connected to 0 V line.
All lines are not connected to commercial power source.
F3SG-R's power supply connector and series connection connector must not be attached upside
204
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Checklists
down.
Model of emitter and receiver must be the same.
When 2 or more F3SG-R systems are used, they are in cascade connection or prevented from mutual
interference with each other.
On a secondary sensor farthest from its power supply, either of the following is attached:
- End Cap
- Lamp (F39-LP and F39-BTLP, sold separately)
- Bluetooth® Communication Unit (F39-BT, sold separately)
Neither connector, cap, or bracket must be loose.
Auxiliary output must not be used as safety output.
When using PNP output, 0 V line of the power supply is grounded. When using NPN output, +24 VDC
line of the power supply is grounded.
Wiring must not be bent, cracked, nor damaged.
6-1-1-3. Operation Check While the Machine Is Stopped
Chapter
The test rod is not deformed.
The object resolution may vary depending on the models of the F3SG-R and settings of floating
blanking function or reduced resolution function. Use a test rod with an appropriate diameter for
inspection. A test rod is not included in the F3SG-R product package.
The sensor can detect a test rod wherever it is in the detection zone. In other words, when a test rod
is inserted into the detection zone, the Stable-state indicator turns OFF and the ON/OFF turns red.
When fixed blanking function is used, you must ensure that all blanked zones in the detection zone
are covered by a hard barrier guard and there must be no zone in the detection zone where the test
rod goes undetected.
To check detection, move the test rod as shown in the diagram below.
6
Pre-Operation Checklists
Start
Stop
When the external test function is used:
When 24 V Active is enabled by the DIP Switch, the ON/OFF-state indicator turns red when the TEST
line is short-circuited to 9 V to Vs.
When 0 V Active is enabled by the DIP Switch, the ON/OFF indicator turns red when the TEST line
is short-circuited to 0 to 3 V.
When the external device monitoring function is used:
When the RESET line is open the ON/OFF indicator remains red regardless of the beam state of the
F3SG-R.
When the start interlock function is used:
When the F3SG-R is turned ON and the F3SG-RA is unblocked, the ON/OFF indicator remains red.
The RESET input turns the ON/OFF indicator to green.
When the restart interlock function is used:
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
E
205
Checklists
When the ON/OFF indicator is green and the F3SG-RA is blocked and then returned to unblocked
state, the ON/OFF indicator remains red. The RESET input turns the ON/OFF indicator to green.
When muting function is used, minimum muting time limit required must be set.
When muting function's operation mode is exit-only muting mode, minimum muting end wait time
required must be set.
Under muting state, a signal that indicates muting state must be output from the Auxiliary Output.
When override function is used, minimum override time limit required must be set.
Under override state, a signal that indicates override state must be output from the Auxiliary Output.
6-1-1-4. Checking that Hazardous Parts Stop While the Machine Operates
The hazardous parts stop immediately when a test rod is inserted into the detection zone at 3
positions: "directly in front of the emitter", "directly in front of the receiver", and "between the emitter
and receiver". (Use the appropriate test rod.)
The hazardous parts remain stopped as long as the test rod is in the detection zone.
The hazardous parts stop when the power of the F3SG-R is turned OFF.
The actual response time of the whole machine is equal to or less than the calculated value.
Chapter
6
Pre-Operation Checklists
206
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Checklists
6-2. Maintenance Checklists
Perform daily and 6-month inspection for the F3SG-R. Otherwise, the system may fail to work
properly, resulting in serious injury.
Do not try to disassemble, repair, or modify this product. Doing so may cause the safety functions
to stop working properly.
To ensure safety, keep a record of the inspection results.
When the user is a different person from those who installed or designed the system, he/she must be properly
trained for maintenance.
6-2-1. Checklists
6-2-1-1. Inspection at Startup and When Changing Operators
Chapter
6
Maintenance Checklists
There is no approach route other than through the detection zone of the F3SG-R.
Part of the operator's body always remains in the detection zone of the F3SG-R when working around
the machine's hazardous part.
The actual safety distance is equal to or greater than the calculated value.
There must be no dirt on or damage to the optical surface or spatter protection cover (F39-HGA, sold
separately) of the F3SG-R.
When 24 V Active is enabled by the DIP Switch, ON/OFF indicator turns red when the TEST line is
short-circuited to 9 V to Vs. When 0 V Active is enabled by the DIP Switch, ON/OFF indicator turns
red when the TEST line is short-circuited to 0 to 3 V.
When muting function is used, muting lamp must not be clear due to dirt or degradation.
The test rod is not deformed.
When the start interlock function is used:
When the F3SG-RA is turned ON and the F3SG-RA is unblocked, the ON/OFF indicator remains red.
The RESET input turns the ON/OFF indicator to green.
When the restart interlock function is used:
When the ON/OFF indicator is green and the F3SG-RA is blocked and then returned to unblocked
state, the ON/OFF indicator remains red. The RESET input turns the ON/OFF indicator to green.
When the power of the F3SG-RA is turned ON while nothing is in the detection zone, it must operate
as follows:
If start interlock is not used: The Power indicator and ON/OFF indicator turn green within 2 seconds
after the F3SG-RA is turned ON.
If start interlock is used: The Power indicator turns green and the ON/OFF indicator turns red within
2 seconds after the F3SG-RA is turned ON.
Nothing should exist in the detection zone and the Stable-state indicator must turn ON at power on.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
207
Checklists
The test rod is detected when it is moved around in the detection zone as shown in the diagram below.
In other words, when a test rod is inserted into the detection zone, the Stable-state indicator turns
OFF and the ON/OFF indicator turns red.
When fixed blanking function is used, you must ensure that all blanked zones in the detection zone
are covered by a hard barrier guard and there must be no zone in the detection zone where the test
rod goes undetected.
The object resolution may vary depending on the models of the F3SG-R and settings of floating
blanking function or reduced resolution function. Use a test rod with an appropriate diameter for
inspection. A test rod is not included in the F3SG-R product package.
Start
Stop
Chapter
6
Maintenance Checklists
Confirm that hazardous parts should stop while the machine is operating, as shown below.
When muting function is used, installation condition of muting sensor must not be changed.
When muting function is used, muting status can be checked from where a worker operates or adjust
the machine.
Neither connector, cap, or bracket must be loose.
6-2-1-2. Checking that Hazardous Parts Stop While the Machine Operates
The hazardous parts are movable when nothing is in the detection zone.
The hazardous parts stop immediately when a test rod is inserted into the detection zone at 3
positions: "directly in front of the emitter", "directly in front of the receiver", and "between the emitter
and receiver". (Use the appropriate test rod.)
The hazardous parts remain stopped as long as the test rod is in the detection zone.
The hazardous parts stop when the power of the F3SG-R is turned OFF while nothing is in the
detection zone.
6-2-1-3. Items to Inspect Every 6 Months or When Machine Settings Are Changed
In addition to inspection item at operation start, following items must also be verified.
The outputs of the F3SG-R and the machine are properly wired.
The total number of times that the control relays/contactors have switched is significantly lower than
their design lives.
There is no ambient light.
Safety distance has been calculated with changed object resolution when the setting of the floating
blanking or reduced resolution function is changed.
Calculated distance: S = ( )mm
When muting function setting is changed, a muting sensor must be installed so that muting state
should not occur when a human body enters a detection zone of F3SG-RA by mistake.
208
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Checklists
When muting function setting is changed, a muting sensor must be installed so that muting state
should not occur when a human body enters a hazardous zone of a machine.
When muting function setting is changed, a muting sensor must consist of 2 independent devices.
When the configuration of the cascade connection is changed, either of the following is attached on
a secondary sensor farthest from its power supply:
- End Cap
- Lamp (F39-LP and F39-BTLP, sold separately)
- Bluetooth® Communication Unit (F39-BT, sold separately)
When using PNP output, 0 V line of the power supply is grounded. When using NPN output, +24 VDC
line of the power supply is grounded.
Wiring must not be bent, cracked, nor damaged.
Chapter
6
Maintenance Checklists
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
209
Checklists
Chapter
6
Maintenance Checklists
210
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Chapter 7 Appendix
7-1. Troubleshooting
212
7-1-1. Lockout State
213
7-1-2. Warning
218
7-2. Optional Accessories(Sold Separately)
221
7-3. Glossary
228
7-4. Revision History
232
7
Chapter
Appendix
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
211
Appendix
7-1. Troubleshooting
 F3SG-RA Series
<Emitter>
<Receiver>
1. Top-beam-state indicator (Blue)
2. PNP/NPN mode indicator (Green)
3. Response time indicator (Green)
4. Sequence error indicator (Yellow)
5. Blanking indicator (Green)
6. Configuration indicator (Green)
1. Test indicator (Green)
7. Interlock indicator (Yellow)
2. Operating range indicator (Green)
8. External device monitoring indicator (Green)
3. Power indicator (Green)
9. Internal error indicator (Red)
4. Lockout indicator (Red)
10. Lockout indicator (Red)
11. Stable-state indicator (Green)
12. ON/OFF indicator (Green/Red)
13. Communication indicator (Green)
14. Bottom-beam-state indicator (Blue)
<Emitter>
7
Chapter
 F3SG-RE Series
<Receiver>
Troubleshooting
1. Top-beam-state indicator (Blue)
2. Operating range indicator (Green)
3. Power indicator (Green)
9. Internal error indicator (Red)
4. Lockout indicator (Red)
10. Lockout indicator (Red)
11. Stable-state indicator (Green)
12. ON/OFF indicator (Green/Red)
13. Communication indicator (Green)
14. Bottom-beam-state indicator (Blue)
212
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Appendix
7-1-1. Lockout State
7-1-1-1. Description
If F3SG-R detects any failure, it keeps safety output OFF and transitions to lockout state. Under
lockout state, the lockout indicators blink or are ON and other indicators blink based on the failure.
Solve the problems based on the table below.
Eliminate the cause of the problem. Then turn the power ON again or reset the lockout state by
providing a reset input to restart the F3SG-R.*
* The lockout reset function is not available for the F3SG-RE series. Turn the power ON again to
restart the F3SG-RE.
7
Chapter
Troubleshooting
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
213
Appendix
7-1-1-2. Troubleshooting
Identify an error according to the combination of the indicators when the error occurs. See the following
troubleshooting tables to take measures.
Blink
<Indicator status at lockout: Receiver>
Combination of Indicators and Error Description
TOP
BLANK
LOCKOUT
Blinking Once
[Error Description]
Cap error
Other sensor error
Blanking monitoring error
CFG
Cascading configuration error
EDM
External device monitoring error
INTERNAL
Internal error
Safety output error
COM
Communication error
BTM
DIP Switch setting error
ON
OFF
Safety output error due to power
supply voltage or noise
COM
Communication error due to
power supply voltage or noise
7
Chapter
ON
OFF
Troubleshooting
LOCKOUT
Blinking Twice
INTERNAL
Internal error due to power supply
voltage or noise
<Indicator status at lockout: Emitter>
Combination of Indicators and Error Description
LONG
LOCKOUT
Blinking Once
LOCKOUT
Blinking Twice
214
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
[Error Description]
DIP Switch setting error
Operating range selection setting error
POWER
Other sensor error
Cascading configuration error
Internal error
Communication error
POWER
Internal or Comunication
error due to noise
Appendix
Description
Error code
Cause and measures
Cap error
4F
A cap may be detached. Attach the cap properly.
Other sensor error
38
Other sensor being cascaded caused an error. Check the indicator of the
sensor.
Blanking monitoring error
EC
An error is detected by the fixed blanking monitoring function or the floating
blanking monitoring function.
See Chapter 2 "Fixed Blanking" or "Floating Blanking" to solve th e problem.
2-14. Fixed Blanking
2-15. Floating Blanking
Cascading configuration error
39, 3A, 3B
The cascading cable may be short-circuited, broken, or disconnected. Check
that the cascading cable should be tightly connected. If the cascading cable is
broken, replace it.
The number of connected sensors or beams may have exceeded the
maximum value due to cascading.
Check the configuration.
External device monitoring error
52
Relay may be welded.
Replace the relay.
The relay and the Reset line may not be properly wired.
Check the wiring with the relay.
Chapter 4 Wiring/Installation
The relay response time may be exceeding the allowable delay time.
Change the allowable delay time or replace the relay with one that has an
appropriate response time.
Chapter 4 Wiring/Installation
60, 6B, 6C
Chapter 4 Wiring/Installation
Communication error
30, 31, 32
The communication line or other wiring may be broken or short-circuited.
Check the Cascading or extension cables.
If the wiring is extended with cables other than specified, the cables used for
extension may not have performance equivalent or greater than the specified
cables. Use cables with the same performance or more than the specified
cables.
Troubleshooting
Safety output lines may be short-circuited to each other or another signal line
may be short-circuited to the safety output line.
Wire the safety output lines properly.
7
Safety output error
Chapter
2-10. External Device Monitoring (EDM)
Chapter 4 Wiring/Installation
DIP Switch setting error
E7, E8
A DIP Switch setting may have been changed during operation.
Check if a DIP Switch setting was changed or not.
Settings of two DIP Switches of a receiver may be unmatched.
Check if two DIP Switches of a receiver are matched.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
215
Appendix
Description
Operating range selection setting
error
Error code
--
Cause and measures
The setting of the operating range selection may be incorrect.
• F3SG-RA: Check if the Operating Range Selection of the DIP Switch is
properly set.
• F3SG-RE: Check if the Operating Range Select Input line is properly wired.
• F3SG-RE with Y Joint Connector: Check if the cables are properly wired to
the connector.
Chapter 3 Setting with DIP Switch
2-19. Operating Range Selection
4-5-4-3. Reduced Wiring Connector System
Safety output error due to power
supply voltage or noise
19
The power supply voltage may have dropped temporarily when the F3SG-R is
in operation. Check for temporary power supply voltage drop (by about 12
VDC) by the influence of the inductive load, etc.
If the exclusive power supply is not used, check the power consumption of
other connected devices for enough capacity.
Power supply voltage may be outside the rated range.
Connect the F3SG-R to a 24 VDC±20% power supply voltage.
Voltage fluctuation may have occurred due to insufficient power supply
capacity.
Replace the power supply with one that has a larger capacity.
Instantaneous break or instantaneous stop may have occurred due to power
sharing with other devices. Do not share the power supply with other devices.
Connect the F3SG-R to a power supply that is dedicated to electro-sensitive
protective devices for electro-sensitive protective equipment such as the
F3SG-R, safety controller, etc.
1A
Effect of noise may be excessive.
Chapter
If other devices using the same power supply generate noise, do not share the
same power supply with other devices, and use a separate power supply
exclusively for the safety components.
7
Troubleshooting
The inductive noise tends to be induced especially if the power supply line of
the machine guarded and the power supply line of the F3SG-R are arranged in
parallel.
Arrange the exclusive power supply near the F3SG-R or lay the power supply
line of the F3SG-R away from the power supply line of the machine guarded.
If the power supply for the F3SG-R is located near the power supply of the
machine guarded and it uses the same ground, it is subject to the influence of
common mode noise from the ground.
Separate the grounding point or use it as the exclusive ground.
Communication error due to power
supply voltage or noise
19
The power supply voltage may have dropped temporarily when the F3SG-R is
in operation. Check for temporary power supply voltage drop (by about 12
VDC) by the influence of the inductive load, etc.
If the exclusive power supply is not used, check the power consumption of
other connected devices for enough capacity.
1A
Communication error may have occurred due to noise.
Check the noise level in the environment.
Internal error due to power supply
voltage or noise
19, 1A
The internal circuitry may be defective due to power supply voltage or noise.
Check the noise level in the environment.
Make sure that the power supply voltage is 24 VDC±20%.
If the indicator still shows this error, replace the F3SG-R.
Internal or communication error
due to noise
--
The internal circuitry may be defective due to noise.
Check the noise level in the environment.
Communication error may have occurred due to noise.
Check the noise level in the environment.
216
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Appendix
Description
Internal error
Error code
Cause and measures
Error code
other than
those above
An error may have occurred in the internal circuit.
Replace the F3SG-R.
7
Chapter
Troubleshooting
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
217
Appendix
7-1-2. Warning
7-1-2-1. Description
If an error is detected that prevents the F3SG-R to continue normal operation, the STB or SEQ
indicator blinks to notify warning information according to the error. The F3SG-R continues normal
operation. When the cause of the error is solved, the F3SG-R automatically recovers from the warning
status.
7-1-2-2. Troubleshooting
Identify an error according to the combination of the indicators when the error occurs. See the following
troubleshooting tables to take measures.
Blink
OFF
<Indicator status at warning: Receiver>
Combination of Indicators and Error
Description
[Warning Description]
STB
LOCKOUT
Malfunction due to ambient light or vibration
*1
SEQ
Muting sequence error or Interlock sequence error
*1 There are several illumination patterns to identify
a faulty sequcence.
Chapter
<Indicator status at warning: Emitter>
None
7
Troubleshooting
Description
Malfunction due to ambient
light or vibration
Warning code
11
Cause and measures
An instantaneous beam misalignment may have occurred due to vibration or
ambient light.
Check the installation condition.
Take necessary measures against mutual interference according to "4-1-4. Mutual
Interference Prevention".
4-1-4. Mutual Interference Prevention
Muting sequence error
2C, 2D, 2F
Muting input may have been applied in the incorrect order.
Check the pattern of illumination of the LED indicator to identify the cause.
7-1-2-3. Muting Sequence Error Indication
Interlock sequence error
--
An input related to interlock may have been applied in an incorrect sequence.
Check the pattern of illumination of the LED indicator to identify the cause.
7-1-2-4. Interlock Sequence Error Indication
218
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Appendix
7-1-2-3. Muting Sequence Error Indication
Sequence error indicator
Cause and measures
Power supply may have been turned ON with muting input A or B being ON.
Check the condition of the muting sensors and light curtains.
muting input B may have been turned ON before muting input A was turned ON.
Check the condition of the muting sensors.
Blinking: Once
muting input A and B may have been turned ON at the same time.
•Check the arrangement of the muting sensors.
•Check if the wiring of muting input A and B is short-circuited.
Either muting input A or B may have been turned ON with the light curtain being blocked or in
Interlock State.
Check the condition of the light curtains.
muting input B may have been turned ON within T1min (= 0.1 s *1) after muting input A was
turned ON.
•Check that if the muting sensors are installed too close each other.
•Check that if the speed of the workpiece is too fast.
*1 Factory default setting
Blinking: Twice
It may have taken T1max (= 4 s *1) or longer for muting input B to be turned ON after muting
input A was turned ON.
•Check that if the muting sensors are installed too far each other.
•Check that if the speed of the workpiece is too slow.
*1 Factory default setting
The light curtain may have been blocked after muting input A was turned ON but before
muting input B was turned ON.
Check the condition of the light curtains.
Blinking: Six times
Muting may have been released with muting input A and B remained ON after a workpiece
passed through the light curtain.
•Check that the workpiece still remains.
•Check that the speed of the workpiece is too slow.
Blinking: Seven times
The next muting sequence may have started after muting was released but before the initial
muting condition was established.
•Check that if a next workpiece has not entered before the current workpiece passes through
the light curtain.
•Check that if the interval between workpieces are too narrow.
Troubleshooting
Blinking: Five times
The light curtain entered the muting state, but muting may have then been released while a
workpiece passes through the light curtain.
•Check that the workpiece still remains.
•Check that if the speed of the workpiece is too slow.
•Check that the muting sensors have been installed upstream and downstream of the light
curtain with the size of workpieces taken into account. (Using four muting sensors)
7
Muting may have been released after the light curtain entered the muting state but before a
workpiece blocked the light curtain.
•Check that the workpiece still remains.
•Check that the speed of the workpiece is too slow.
Chapter
Blinking: Four times
The light curtain may have been blocked within 0.08 s after muting input A and B were
normally turned ON.
•Check that if the muting sensor and light curtain are installed too close each other.
•Check that if the speed of the workpiece is too fast.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
219
Appendix
7-1-2-4. Interlock Sequence Error Indication
The following table is applied only when the pre-reset function is being enabled.
Sequence error indicator
Cause and measures
The reset or pre-reset switch may have been pressed before the light curtain receives light.
Check the reset input and pre-reset input wiring.
Blinking: Once
Blinking: Twice
The light curtain may have been interrupted or the pre-reset switch may have been pressed
before the pre-reset switch is pressed.
Check the light curtain status and pre-reset input wiring.
After the pre-reset switch was pressed, the pre-reset or reset switch may have been pressed
before the light curtain is interrupted.
Check the installation environment of the light curtain.
After the pre-reset switch was pressed and the light curtain was interrupted, the pre-reset
switch may have been pressed before the reset switch is pressed.
Check the pre-reset input wiring.
Blinking: Three times
After the pre-reset switch was pressed, a time period from interruption of the light curtain to
the reset switch being pressed may have exceeded the allowable time.
Check the installation environment of the light curtain as well as pre-reset and reset
switches.
The number of interruptions of the light curtain may have exceeded the allowable value after
the pre-reset switch was pressed and before the reset switch is pressed.
Check the installation environment of the light curtain.
7
Chapter
Troubleshooting
220
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Appendix
7-2. Optional Accessories(Sold Separately)
Single-Ended Connector Cable (for emitter)
Appearance
Model
Cable length
F39-JG3A-L
3m
F39-JG7A-L
7m
F39-JG10A-L
10 m
F39-JG15A-L
15 m
F39-JG20A-L
20 m
Specifications
M12 connector (5-pin), 5 wires
Single-Ended Connector Cable (for receiver)
Appearance
Model
Cable length
F39-JG3A-D
3m
F39-JG7A-D
7m
F39-JG10A-D
10 m
F39-JG15A-D
15 m
F39-JG20A-D
20 m
Model
Cable length
Specifications
M12 connector (8-pin), 8 wires
Double-Ended Cable (for emitter)
Appearance
F39-JG3B-L
3m
F39-JG5B-L
5m
F39-JG7B-L
7m
F39-JG10B-L
10 m
F39-JG15B-L
15 m
F39-JG20B-L
20 m
M12 connector (5-pin) on both ends
Double-Ended Cable (for receiver)
Appearance
Model
Cable length
F39-JGR5B-D
0.5 m
F39-JG1B-D
1m
F39-JG3B-D
3m
F39-JG5B-D
5m
F39-JG7B-D
7m
F39-JG10B-D
10 m
F39-JG15B-D
15 m
F39-JG20B-D
20 m
Specifications
M12 connector (8-pin) on both ends
Optional Accessories(Sold Separately)
1m
7
0.5 m
F39-JG1B-L
Chapter
F39-JGR5B-L
Specifications
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
221
Appendix
Cascading Cable (two cables per set, for emitter and receiver)
Appearance
Model
Cable length
F39-JGR2W
0.2 m
Specifications
Emitter cable:
Cap (5-pin), M12 connector (5-pin)
Receiver cable:
Cap (8-pin), M12 connector (8-pin)
Single-Ended Cable (Round Water-resistant Connector: Connector Connected to Cable, Socket on One
Cable End)
Appearance
Sheath material
Cable length
PVC
PVC
PVC
PUR
PUR
PUR
2m
5m
10 m
2m
5m
10 m
Model
XS2F-M12PVC4S2M
XS2F-M12PVC4S5M
XS2F-M12PVC4S10M
XS2F-M12PUR4S2M
XS2F-M12PUR4S5M
XS2F-M12PUR4S10M
Specifications
M12 connector (4-pin),
4 wires
Double-Ended Cable (Round Water-resistant Connector: Connectors Connected to Cable, Socket and Plug
on Cable Ends)
Appearance
7
Chapter
Optional Accessories(Sold Separately)
Sheath material
Cable length
PVC
PVC
PVC
PUR
PUR
PUR
2m
5m
10 m
2m
5m
10 m
Specifications
M12 connector (4-pin),
on both ends
Y-Joint Plug/Socket Connector
Appearance
Model
F39-GCNY1
F39-GCNY2
Cable length
0.5 m
Remarks
M12 connectors.
Used for reduced wiring.
F39-GCNY1: for F3SG-RE*
F39-GCNY2: for F3SG-RA
*When using this connector, the Operating
Range Selection is fixed to Long Mode.
4-Joint Plug/Socket Connector
Appearance
Model
F39-GCN4
F39-GCN4-L
F39-GCN4-D
222
Model
XS2W-M12PVC4SS2M
XS2W-M12PVC4SS5M
XS2W-M12PVC4SS10M
XS2W-M12PUR4SS2M
XS2W-M12PUR4SS5M
XS2W-M12PUR4SS10M
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Remarks
M12 connectors.
Used for reduced wiring for connecting F3SG-RA with F3W-MA.
F39-GCN4: Includes one each of F39-GCN4-L and F39-GCN4-D.
F39-GCN4-L: Used to connect F3SG-RA emitter with F3W-MA
emitter.
F39-GCN4-D: Used to connect F3SG-RA receiver (PNP output)
with F3W-MA receiver.
Appendix
Interface Unit
Appearance
Model
F39-GIF
Remarks
A dedicated cable is also supplied.
Bluetooth® Communication Unit
Appearance
Model
F39-BT
Remarks
Used for the receiver.
Lamp and Bluetooth® Communication Unit
Appearance
Model
F39-BTLP
Remarks
Used for the receiver.
7
Chapter
Lamp
Model
F39-LP
Remarks
Used for the receiver.
End Cap
Appearance
Model
F39-CNM
Remarks
Housing color: Black
For both F3SG-RA emitter and receiver
(Attached to the F3SG-RA. The End Cap can be purchased if lost. )
Optional Accessories(Sold Separately)
Appearance
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
223
Appendix
Standard Fixed Bracket
Appearance
Model
F39-LGF
Application
Remarks
2 brackets per set.
(Included in the F3SG-R product package.)
Bracket to mount the
F3SG-R.
Side mounting and
backside mounting
possible.
Beam alignment after
mounting not possible.
Standard Adjustable Bracket
Appearance
Model
F39-LGA
Application
Remarks
2 brackets per set.
Bracket to mount the
F3SG-R.
Beam alignment after
mounting possible.
Side mounting and
backside mounting
possible.
Top/Bottom Adjustable Bracket
Appearance
Model
Application
Bracket to mount the
F3SG-R. Use this bracket
at the top and bottom
positions of the F3SGR.
Beam alignment after
mounting possible. Side
mounting and backside
mounting possible.
F39-LGTB-1
F39-LGTB-1 does not
come with the parts to
mount to a wall surface
(Top/Bottom Bracket (3)
and Screw (1). Please
prepare these parts
according to your device.
7
Chapter
F39-LGTB
4 brackets per set.
This bracket is not useable together with
the Standard Fixed Bracket. When it is
necessary to use it with another bracket,
only the combination with the Standard
Adjustable Bracket is possible.
Refer to 4-4-3-3. Mounting with Top/Bottom
Adjustable Brackets (F39-LGTB) for more
information on parts names of this bracket.
Optional Accessories(Sold Separately)
Test Rod
Appearance
Model
STI-TO14
STI-TO30
To check operation before use, purchase and use the test rod.
224
Remarks
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Diameter
14 mm dia.
30 mm dia.
Appendix
Smart Muting Actuator
Appearance
Model
F3W-MA0100P
F3W-MA0300P
Remarks
Applicable to PNP-output devices. Refer to Smart Muting Actuator
F3W-MA Series User's Manual for details.
Spatter Protection Cover (two pieces per set, common for emitter/receiver)
Appearance
Model
F39-HGA
(for F3SG-RA)
F39-HGB
(for F3SG-RE)
Remarks
For the F3SG-R of the protective height of 2,000 mm or longer, use
two Spatter Protection Covers of different lengths.
Please note the following:
• The operating range of the F3SG-R attached with the Spatter
Protection Cover is 10% shorter than the rating.
• The Spatter Protection Cover extends over the DIP Switch cover
of the F3SG-RA. Be sure to use the Spatter Protection Cover
only after all required settings are made to the DIP Switch.
Control Unit
Appearance
Model
G9SA-301
Output
• An F39-JGA Single-Ended
Cable is required.
• An F3SG-R with PNP output can
be connected.
• A type of 5 N.O. and 1 N.C.
contacts is also available.
7
Chapter
Safety output (relay): NO
contact x 3
Auxiliary output (relay): NC
contact x 1
Remarks
Appearance
Model
G9SA-301-P
Output
Safety output (relay): NO
contact x 3
Auxiliary output (relay): NC
contact x 1
Remarks
• An XS5F-D421-80-F Round
Water-resistant Connector is
required.
• An NPN type of F3SG-R can be
connected.
Optional Accessories(Sold Separately)
Control Unit
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
225
Appendix
Control Unit
Appearance
Model
Output
G9SB-301-B
Safety output (relay): NO
contact x 3
Auxiliary output (relay): NC
contact x 1
Auto reset
G9SB-301-D
Safety output (relay): NO
contact x 3
Auxiliary output (relay): NC
contact x 1
Manual reset
G9SB-200-B
Safety output (relay): NO
contact x 2
Auto reset
G9SB-200-D
Safety output (relay): NO
contact x 2
Manual reset
Remarks
• An F39-JGA Single-Ended
Cable is required.
• An F3SG-R with PNP output can
be connected.
• Thickness of a type of three N.O.
and one N.C. contacts is 22.5
mm.
• Thickness of a type of two N.O.
contacts is 17.5 mm.
Control Unit
Appearance
Model
G9SX-AD322-T15
Output
Safety output (solid-state):
source output (PNP) x 3
(instantaneous), source output
(PNP) x 2 (OFF-delayed)
Auxiliary output (solid-state):
source output (PNP) x 2
7
Chapter
Optional Accessories(Sold Separately)
226
Remarks
• An F39-JGA Single-Ended
Cable is required.
• An F3SG-R with PNP output can
be connected.
• 16 patterns of OFF-delayed
output for up to 15 seconds can
be set.
• The OFF-delayed output can be
used as instantaneous output by
setting it to 0 second.
• Can be configured for partial
control and total control.
• Can be extended to connect a
relay unit.
Control Unit
Appearance
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Output
Remarks
G9SP-N10S
Model
Safety output (solid-state):
source output (PNP) x 4
Test output (solid-state): source
output (PNP) x 4
Standard output (solid-state):
source output (PNP) x4
• An F39-JGA Single-Ended
Cable is required.
• An F3SG-R with PNP output can
be connected.
G9SP-N10D
Safety output (solid-state):
source output (PNP) x 16
Test output (solid-state): source
output (PNP) x 6
G9SP-N20S
Safety output (solid-state):
source output (PNP) x 8
Test output (solid-state): source
output (PNP) x 6
Appendix
Control Unit
Appearance
Model
Application
Specifications
NX-SIH400
Safety input (solid-state): sink
input (PNP) x 4
Test output (solid-state): source
output (PNP) x 2
• An F39-JGA Single-Ended
Cable is required.
• An F3SG-R with PNP output can
be connected.
NX-SID800
Safety input (solid-state): sink
input (PNP) x 8
Test output (solid-state): source
output (PNP) x 2
Control Unit
Appearance
Model
Application
G9SE-201
Safety output (relay): NO
contact x 2 (instantaneous)
Auxiliary output (solid-state):
source output (PNP) x 1
G9SE-401
Safety output (relay): NO
contact x 4 (instantaneous)
Auxiliary output (solid-state):
source output (PNP) x 1
G9SE-221-T
Safety output (relay): NO
contact x 2 (instantaneous), NO
contact x 2 (OFF-delayed)
Auxiliary output (solid-state):
source output (PNP) x 1
Specifications
• An F39-JGA Single-Ended
Cable is required.
• An F3SG-R with PNP output can
be connected.
• For G9SE-221-T, 16 patterns
of OFF-delayed output for up to 5
or 30 seconds can be set.
7
Chapter
Optional Accessories(Sold Separately)
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
227
Appendix
7-3. Glossary
Term
A
Description
Accumulated load switching frequency
Total number of operations of a load to be connected to the F3SG-RA, from
when the F3SG-RA is first energized until the present time.
Allowable Beams
Dynamic Muting: Area(s) (or beam(s)) to be added in a Dynamic Muting zone,
in order to prevent an accidental interruption of the F3SG-RA due to vibration.
Fixed/Floating Blanking: Beam(s) in a Blanking zone, that are not monitored by
the Blanking Monitoring function.
B
Allowable delay time
The allowable amount of time difference from when the state of the Safety
outputs changes until the state of an external relay changes. The F3SG-R
enters the Lockout state if this time is exceeded.
Auto reset mode
Mode that disables Start Interlock and Restart Interlock. The Safety outputs are
turned ON when no object is detected in the detection zone.
Auxiliary output
Function to give output signal according to the settings. This must not be used
for safety applications.
Blanking zone
Area in the detection zone of the F3SG-RA, where the Fixed Blanking or the
Floating Blanking is enabled.
Configuration Tool
Setting tool that allows the user to make settings to the F3SG-RA with a PC.
Designated beam output
Function to signal the state of user-designated beam(s) to the Auxiliary output
or Lamp. To use the function, target beam(s) must be designated.
Designated beam output information
Information on the beam state of user-designated beam(s) to be signaled to the
Auxiliary output or Lamp. To signal the information, the Designated beam
output information must be assigned to an output destination.
Dynamic muting
Function to configure a new muting zone after muting is enabled based on a
result measuring a workpiece height for a certain period of time.
Effective aperture angle (EAA)
Range of angles in which the F3SG-R can operate.
Excess power-on time information
Information to be signaled to the Auxiliary output or Lamp when the power-on
time exceeds the power-on time threshold value. To signal the information, the
Power-On Time information must be assigned to an output destination.
Exit-only muting delay time
Time difference from when the signal of Muting input A or B is turned OFF until
the Muting state is cancelled.
Exit-only muting mode
Muting mode to be used for such an application where objects move from the
inside to the outside of the hazardous zone.
External device monitoring function (EDM)
Function to monitor the operation of an N.C. contacts of external relays (or
contactors) that control the hazardous zone of a machine, for any malfunctions
such as welding.
External test
Function that stops emission at a specified time to check that the Safety
outputs are being properly turned OFF.
Fixed blanking
Function to disable part of the detection zone of the F3SG-RA and keep the
Safety outputs in the ON state even if an object blocks the disabled detection
zone.
Fixed blanking monitoring function
Function to bring the F3SG-RA in the Lockout state when part of the Fixed
Blanking zone is blocked.
Floating blanking
Function to disable a specified number of beams in the detection zone of the
F3SG-RA, and keep the Safety outputs in the ON state even if an object
smaller than the dimension of the specified number of beams blocks the F3SGRA.
Floating blanking monitoring function
Function to bring the F3SG-RA in the Lockout state if the number of blocked
beams is smaller than specified.
Interlock
Information to be signaled to the Auxiliary output or Lamp when the F3SG-R is
in the Interlock is state. To signal the information, the Interlock information must
be assigned to an output destination.
Interlock Information
Provides output through auxiliary output if interlock input is ON. Note that
interlock information must be assigned to the destination.
E
7
Chapter
C
D
Glossary
F
I
228
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Appendix
Term
L
M
Description
Cancels the Interlock state.
Inverted signal output mode
In this mode, the logic of the Auxiliary output signal is reversed.
Light level diagnosis information
Information to be signaled to the Auxiliary output or Lamp when the Safety
output is in the ON state and when the incident light level is from 100% to 170%
of the ON-threshold value for 10 seconds or more. To signal the information,
the Light Level Diagnosis information must be assigned to an output
destination.
Light level monitoring
Function to read out the light level of incident light or ambient light on the
F3SG-RA.
Load switching frequency
Function to display the number of operations of a load to be connected to the
F3SG-RA. The number is counted from when the number was last reset until
the present time.
Lockout
Function to keep the Safety outputs in the OFF state when an error is detected
by the F3SG-R.
Lockout information
Information to be signaled to the Auxiliary output or Lamp when an error or
lockout occurs. To signal the information, the Lockout information must be
assigned to an output destination.
Lower beam(s)
Beams located toward the Power Cable of the F3SG-R.
Maintenance information
Function to read the maintenance information of the F3SG-RA and view it on a
PC screen, with the Configuration Tool.
Manual reset mode
Function to enable the Start Interlock and Restart Interlock. The Safety outputs
are turned ON by applying a reset signal when there is no object in the
detection zone.
Maximum allowable muting signal interruption
Maximum duration of a signal interruption allowed in Muting inputs A and B.
Muting
Function to temporarily disable the safety function of the F3SG-RA and keep
the Safety outputs in the ON state even if the F3SG-RA is blocked.
Muting end wait time
Time difference from when the F3SG-RA is unblocked until the Muting state is
cancelled.
Muting input time limit value (maximum)
Maximum time difference between Muting inputs A and B.
Muting input time limit value (minimum)
Minimum time difference between Muting inputs A and B.
7
Muting key cap
Connector to be attached to the end cap of an emitter or receiver to use the
Muting function.
Muting sensor
Input device, such as photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor, to give an input
signal for notifying the start and end of the Muting function.
Glossary
Chapter
Interlock reset
Muting sequence error
An error that occurs when muting signal is not received in the correct order. The
Safety outputs keep in the ON state unless the F3SG-RA is blocked.
Muting time limit
The duration time of the Muting function. The Muting state is cancelled if it
continues for longer than this time limit.
N
Number of floating beams
Number of beams to be configured in the Floating Blanking zone, for which the
F3SG-RA does not transition to the Lockout state or Machine Stop state (Safety
output OFF) even when blocked.
O
Object resolution (Detection capability)
Minimum size of an object that can be detected in the protective height of the
F3SG-R.
Operating range selection
Function to change the operating range by changing the emission light level of
the F3SG-R.
Operating status monitoring
Function to read out the I/O data and status of functions of the F3SG-RA.
Output operation mode
Information to be signaled to an output part (Safety output, Auxiliary output).
Override
Function that forcibly turns the Safety outputs ON when the Muting is not
working.
Override input time limit (maximum)
Input time limit (maximum value) of the special sequence to activate the
Override function.
Override time limit
The duration time of the Override function. The Override state is cancelled if it
continues for longer than this time limit.
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
229
Appendix
Term
P
PELV
Description
Protected Extra Low Voltage. A grounded circuit separated by double insulation
or equivalent from hazardous voltage. It does not generate voltage that
exceeds ELV under normal conditions and under single-fault conditions.
Normally, protection against direct contact is required.
PNP/NPN Selection
Function to select the safety output type between PNP and NPN.
Position detection muting mode
Mode that enables the Muting function according to the position of a hazardous
source such as a robot arm, using heterogeneous redundant inputs.
Power-on time
Function to display the period of time when the F3SG-RA is energized, starting
from when the power-on time was last reset until the present time.
Power-on time reset
Function to reset the power-on time of the F3SG-RA to 0. In the case of
cascade connection, the power-on time can be reset for each cascaded
segment of the F3SG-RA.
Power-on time threshold value
When the power-on time exceeds this value, an output is signaled to the
Auxiliary output or Lamp. To signal the information, the Power-On Time
information must be assigned to an output destination.
Pre-Reset
One of the Interlock reset functions. Interlock state can be released only in the
sequence that the operator operates the Pre-reset switch installed in the
hazardous zone and leave the hazardous zone, and then operates the Reset
switch outside the hazardous zone.
Pre-Reset state
The F3SG-RA under this state is allowed to be blocked after the input of the PreReset signal is ensured. When the number of times the F3SG-RA is blocked is set
to infinite, the F3SG-RA stays in this state until the Reset input signal is received.
Primary sensor
Name used for the F3SG-RA to be connected nearest the power supply, when
in cascade connection.
Reduced resolution
Function to change the size of the object resolution so that an object of the size
between 1 and 3 beams has no effect.
Reset
Function to release the Interlock state or Lockout state.
Chapter
Response time adjustment
Function to change the response time so that the Safety outputs can hardly be
turned OFF due to accidental interruption by an environmental factor.
Response time from ON to OFF
Period of time from when the F3SG-R is blocked until the Safety outputs are
turned from ON to OFF.
Glossary
Restart interlock
Function to turn the Safety outputs to the OFF state when the F3SG-RA is
blocked and keep this state until a reset signal is received.
Safety output (OSSD)
Output to be turned to the ON state when safety is ensured. This can be used
for safety applications.
Safety output information
Information to be signaled to the Auxiliary output or Lamp when the Safety
outputs are in the ON state. To signal the information, the Safety output
information must be assigned to an output destination.
SD Manager 2
Setting software that is used as the Configuration Tool for the F3SG-RA. It
allows the user to make settings to or monitor the operation of the F3SG-RA
when the F3SG-RA is connected to the PC via the Interface Unit or Bluetooth®
Communication Unit.
Secondary sensor
Name used for other segments of F3SG-RA's than the primary sensor, when in
cascade connection.
SELV
Safety Extra Low Voltage. An ungrounded circuit separated by double
insulation or equivalent from hazardous voltage. It does not generate voltage
that exceeds ELV under normal conditions and under single-fault conditions. If
the nominal voltage exceeds 25 VAC or 60 VDC, protection against direct
contact is required.
Setting recovery
Function to restore the factory settings of the F3SG-RA.
Setting state
Status of the F3SG-RA when settings are being performed with the
Configuration Tool. In this state, the Safety outputs are in the OFF state.
Standard muting mode
Muting mode to be used for such an application where a muting sensor is
positioned on both sides of the F3SG-RA. The factory default setting is this
mode.
Start interlock
Function to turn the Safety outputs to the OFF state at power-on or recovery
from power failure and keep this state until a reset signal is received.
R
7
230
S
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Appendix
Term
T
Description
Teach-in
Function to configure target beams of the following functions by interrupting the
beams.
- Fixed Blanking
- Floating Blanking
Troubleshooting support signal
Information to be signaled to the Auxiliary output or Lamp when any one of a
Muting Sequence Error, Interference/Vibration Information and Light Level
Diagnosis Information signals is in the ON state. To signal the information, the
Troubleshooting Support signal must be assigned to an output destination.
U
Upper beam(s)
Beams located toward the terminal of the F3SG-R.
V
Vs
Power supply voltage value in your usage environment.
W
Warning zone function
Function to configure part of the detection zone, in which the Safety outputs
are not affected by the beam state. The blocked state of the Warning zone can
be signaled to the Auxiliary output. This function must not be used for safety
applications.
Warning zone information
Information to be signaled to the Auxiliary output or Lamp when the Warning
zone is blocked. To signal the information, the Warning Zone information must
be assigned to an output destination.
7
Chapter
Glossary
E
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
231
Appendix
7-4. Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the manual number at the bottom of the front and back covers
of this manual.
Z352-E1- 06
Revision No.
Revision
symbol
Revisions
01
October, 2014
First edition
02
December, 2014
- Added Lamp.
- Added Setting Tool.
- Minor corrections.
03
January, 2015
- Added F3SG-RE.
- Added Spatter Protection Cover.
- Minor corrections.
04
February, 2015
Minor corrections.
05
April, 2015
- Added software versions of Configuration Tool
- Minor corrections
06
August, 2015
- Added Bluetooth® Communication Unit and 4-Joint Plug/Socket Connector.
- Minor corrections.
7
Chapter
Revision History
232
Revision date
F3SG-R
User’s Manual
Terms and Conditions of Sale
1. Offer; Acceptance. These terms and conditions (these "Terms") are deemed
part of all quotes, agreements, purchase orders, acknowledgments, price lists,
catalogs, manuals, brochures and other documents, whether electronic or in
writing, relating to the sale of products or services (collectively, the "Products")
by Omron Electronics LLC and its subsidiary companies (“Omron”). Omron
objects to any terms or conditions proposed in Buyer’s purchase order or other
documents which are inconsistent with, or in addition to, these Terms.
2. Prices; Payment Terms. All prices stated are current, subject to change without notice by Omron. Omron reserves the right to increase or decrease prices
on any unshipped portions of outstanding orders. Payments for Products are
due net 30 days unless otherwise stated in the invoice.
3. Discounts. Cash discounts, if any, will apply only on the net amount of invoices
sent to Buyer after deducting transportation charges, taxes and duties, and will
be allowed only if (i) the invoice is paid according to Omron’s payment terms
and (ii) Buyer has no past due amounts.
4. Interest. Omron, at its option, may charge Buyer 1-1/2% interest per month or
the maximum legal rate, whichever is less, on any balance not paid within the
stated terms.
5. Orders. Omron will accept no order less than $200 net billing.
6. Governmental Approvals. Buyer shall be responsible for, and shall bear all
costs involved in, obtaining any government approvals required for the importation or sale of the Products.
7. Taxes. All taxes, duties and other governmental charges (other than general
real property and income taxes), including any interest or penalties thereon,
imposed directly or indirectly on Omron or required to be collected directly or
indirectly by Omron for the manufacture, production, sale, delivery, importation, consumption or use of the Products sold hereunder (including customs
duties and sales, excise, use, turnover and license taxes) shall be charged to
and remitted by Buyer to Omron.
8. Financial. If the financial position of Buyer at any time becomes unsatisfactory
to Omron, Omron reserves the right to stop shipments or require satisfactory
security or payment in advance. If Buyer fails to make payment or otherwise
comply with these Terms or any related agreement, Omron may (without liability and in addition to other remedies) cancel any unshipped portion of Products sold hereunder and stop any Products in transit until Buyer pays all
amounts, including amounts payable hereunder, whether or not then due,
which are owing to it by Buyer. Buyer shall in any event remain liable for all
unpaid accounts.
9. Cancellation; Etc. Orders are not subject to rescheduling or cancellation
unless Buyer indemnifies Omron against all related costs or expenses.
10. Force Majeure. Omron shall not be liable for any delay or failure in delivery
resulting from causes beyond its control, including earthquakes, fires, floods,
strikes or other labor disputes, shortage of labor or materials, accidents to
machinery, acts of sabotage, riots, delay in or lack of transportation or the
requirements of any government authority.
11. Shipping; Delivery. Unless otherwise expressly agreed in writing by Omron:
a. Shipments shall be by a carrier selected by Omron; Omron will not drop ship
except in “break down” situations.
b. Such carrier shall act as the agent of Buyer and delivery to such carrier shall
constitute delivery to Buyer;
c. All sales and shipments of Products shall be FOB shipping point (unless otherwise stated in writing by Omron), at which point title and risk of loss shall
pass from Omron to Buyer; provided that Omron shall retain a security interest in the Products until the full purchase price is paid;
d. Delivery and shipping dates are estimates only; and
e. Omron will package Products as it deems proper for protection against normal handling and extra charges apply to special conditions.
12. Claims. Any claim by Buyer against Omron for shortage or damage to the
Products occurring before delivery to the carrier must be presented in writing
to Omron within 30 days of receipt of shipment and include the original transportation bill signed by the carrier noting that the carrier received the Products
from Omron in the condition claimed.
13. Warranties. (a) Exclusive Warranty. Omron’s exclusive warranty is that the
Products will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of
twelve months from the date of sale by Omron (or such other period expressed
in writing by Omron). Omron disclaims all other warranties, express or implied.
(b) Limitations. OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ABOUT NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABIL-
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
ITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS.
BUYER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE
PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR
INTENDED USE. Omron further disclaims all warranties and responsibility of
any type for claims or expenses based on infringement by the Products or otherwise of any intellectual property right. (c) Buyer Remedy. Omron’s sole obligation hereunder shall be, at Omron’s election, to (i) replace (in the form
originally shipped with Buyer responsible for labor charges for removal or
replacement thereof) the non-complying Product, (ii) repair the non-complying
Product, or (iii) repay or credit Buyer an amount equal to the purchase price of
the non-complying Product; provided that in no event shall Omron be responsible for warranty, repair, indemnity or any other claims or expenses regarding
the Products unless Omron’s analysis confirms that the Products were properly handled, stored, installed and maintained and not subject to contamination, abuse, misuse or inappropriate modification. Return of any Products by
Buyer must be approved in writing by Omron before shipment. Omron Companies shall not be liable for the suitability or unsuitability or the results from the
use of Products in combination with any electrical or electronic components,
circuits, system assemblies or any other materials or substances or environments. Any advice, recommendations or information given orally or in writing,
are not to be construed as an amendment or addition to the above warranty.
See http://www.omron247.com or contact your Omron representative for published information.
Limitation on Liability; Etc. OMRON COMPANIES SHALL NOT BE LIABLE
FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
LOSS OF PROFITS OR PRODUCTION OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY
WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS, WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS
BASED IN CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY.
Further, in no event shall liability of Omron Companies exceed the individual
price of the Product on which liability is asserted.
Indemnities. Buyer shall indemnify and hold harmless Omron Companies and
their employees from and against all liabilities, losses, claims, costs and
expenses (including attorney's fees and expenses) related to any claim, investigation, litigation or proceeding (whether or not Omron is a party) which arises
or is alleged to arise from Buyer's acts or omissions under these Terms or in
any way with respect to the Products. Without limiting the foregoing, Buyer (at
its own expense) shall indemnify and hold harmless Omron and defend or settle any action brought against such Companies to the extent based on a claim
that any Product made to Buyer specifications infringed intellectual property
rights of another party.
Property; Confidentiality. Any intellectual property in the Products is the exclusive property of Omron Companies and Buyer shall not attempt to duplicate it
in any way without the written permission of Omron. Notwithstanding any
charges to Buyer for engineering or tooling, all engineering and tooling shall
remain the exclusive property of Omron. All information and materials supplied
by Omron to Buyer relating to the Products are confidential and proprietary,
and Buyer shall limit distribution thereof to its trusted employees and strictly
prevent disclosure to any third party.
Export Controls. Buyer shall comply with all applicable laws, regulations and
licenses regarding (i) export of products or information; (iii) sale of products to
“forbidden” or other proscribed persons; and (ii) disclosure to non-citizens of
regulated technology or information.
Miscellaneous. (a) Waiver. No failure or delay by Omron in exercising any right
and no course of dealing between Buyer and Omron shall operate as a waiver
of rights by Omron. (b) Assignment. Buyer may not assign its rights hereunder
without Omron's written consent. (c) Law. These Terms are governed by the
law of the jurisdiction of the home office of the Omron company from which
Buyer is purchasing the Products (without regard to conflict of law principles). (d) Amendment. These Terms constitute the entire agreement between
Buyer and Omron relating to the Products, and no provision may be changed
or waived unless in writing signed by the parties. (e) Severability. If any provision hereof is rendered ineffective or invalid, such provision shall not invalidate
any other provision. (f) Setoff. Buyer shall have no right to set off any amounts
against the amount owing in respect of this invoice. (g) Definitions. As used
herein, “including” means “including without limitation”; and “Omron Companies” (or similar words) mean Omron Corporation and any direct or indirect
subsidiary or affiliate thereof.
Certain Precautions on Specifications and Use
1. Suitability of Use. Omron Companies shall not be responsible for conformity
with any standards, codes or regulations which apply to the combination of the
Product in the Buyer’s application or use of the Product. At Buyer’s request,
Omron will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying
ratings and limitations of use which apply to the Product. This information by
itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the Product in combination with the end product, machine, system, or other application
or use. Buyer shall be solely responsible for determining appropriateness of
the particular Product with respect to Buyer’s application, product or system.
Buyer shall take application responsibility in all cases but the following is a
non-exhaustive list of applications for which particular attention must be given:
(i) Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical
interference, or conditions or uses not described in this document.
(ii) Use in consumer products or any use in significant quantities.
(iii) Energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation
systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations.
(iv) Systems, machines and equipment that could present a risk to life or property. Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to this Product.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCT FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS
RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY OR IN LARGE QUANTITIES WITHOUT
ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO
2.
3.
4.
5.
ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON’S PRODUCT IS PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE
OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.
Programmable Products. Omron Companies shall not be responsible for the
user’s programming of a programmable Product, or any consequence thereof.
Performance Data. Data presented in Omron Company websites, catalogs
and other materials is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of Omron’s
test conditions, and the user must correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the Omron’s Warranty and Limitations
of Liability.
Change in Specifications. Product specifications and accessories may be
changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons. It is our practice to change part numbers when published ratings or features are changed,
or when significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the Product may be changed without any notice. When in doubt, special part numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for
your application. Please consult with your Omron’s representative at any time
to confirm actual specifications of purchased Product.
Errors and Omissions. Information presented by Omron Companies has been
checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no responsibility is assumed
for clerical, typographical or proofreading errors or omissions.
OMRON AUTOMATION AND SAFETY • THE AMERICAS HEADQUARTERS • Chicago, IL USA • 847.843.7900 • 800.556.6766 • www.omron247.com
OMRON CANADA, INC. • HEAD OFFICE
Toronto, ON, Canada • 416.286.6465 • 866.986.6766 • www.omron247.com
OMRON ARGENTINA • SALES OFFICE
Cono Sur • 54.11.4783.5300
OMRON ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO • HEAD OFFICE
México DF • 52.55.59.01.43.00 • 01-800-226-6766 • mela@omron.com
OMRON CHILE • SALES OFFICE
Santiago • 56.9.9917.3920
OMRON ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO • SALES OFFICE
Apodaca, N.L. • 52.81.11.56.99.20 • 01-800-226-6766 • mela@omron.com
OTHER OMRON LATIN AMERICA SALES
54.11.4783.5300
OMRON ELETRÔNICA DO BRASIL LTDA • HEAD OFFICE
São Paulo, SP, Brasil • 55.11.2101.6300 • www.omron.com.br
OMRON EUROPE B.V. • Wegalaan 67-69, NL-2132 JD, Hoofddorp, The Netherlands. • +31 (0) 23 568 13 00 • www.industrial.omron.eu
Authorized Distributor:
Automation Control Systems
• Machine Automation Controllers (MAC) • Programmable Controllers (PLC)
• Operator interfaces (HMI) • Distributed I/O • Software
Drives & Motion Controls
• Servo & AC Drives • Motion Controllers & Encoders
Temperature & Process Controllers
• Single and Multi-loop Controllers
Sensors & Vision
• Proximity Sensors • Photoelectric Sensors • Fiber-Optic Sensors
• Amplified Photomicrosensors • Measurement Sensors
• Ultrasonic Sensors • Vision Sensors
Industrial Components
• RFID/Code Readers • Relays • Pushbuttons & Indicators
• Limit and Basic Switches • Timers • Counters • Metering Devices
• Power Supplies
Safety
• Laser Scanners • Safety Mats • Edges and Bumpers • Programmable Safety
Controllers • Light Curtains • Safety Relays • Safety Interlock Switches
Z22I-E-02
08/15
Note: Specifications are subject to change.
Printed on recycled paper.
© 2015 Omron Electronics LLC
Printed in U.S.A.
Download PDF